Tutorials Archive - InDesignSkills https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/ Bitesize Tips, Tutorials & Inspiration for Adobe InDesign Mon, 24 Oct 2022 17:57:58 +0000 en-GB hourly 1 https://i0.wp.com/www.indesignskills.com/wp-content/uploads/2021/10/cropped-favicon.png?fit=32%2C32&ssl=1 Tutorials Archive - InDesignSkills https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/ 32 32 199237004 What Entry-Level UI/UX Jobs Require No Experience? https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/what-entry-level-uiux-jobs-require-no-experience/ Tue, 14 Dec 2021 18:12:33 +0000 https://www.indesignskills.com/?post_type=tutorials&p=16879 If you’re looking for the next step in your career, a role in UI/UX design is well worth considering. One of the fastest growing design sectors, UI and UX focusses on creating the best experience possible for users of apps, websites and other media. UX and UI design have become a popular avenue for fresh […]

The post What Entry-Level UI/UX Jobs Require No Experience? appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
If you’re looking for the next step in your career, a role in UI/UX design is well worth considering. One of the fastest growing design sectors, UI and UX focusses on creating the best experience possible for users of apps, websites and other media.

UX and UI design have become a popular avenue for fresh graduates and those looking to transition from related fields. This is mainly due to a growing demand for designers across multiple industries.

If you’ve just finished your design degree or a certificate program and are looking for a UI/UX job, it can be daunting to find a job. Many aspiring designers are daunted by the “X years of experience required” in job descriptions. But, fear not. There are still roles for those without any professional experience. We’ve listed 3 job positions that someone with no industry experience has a chance of landing, along with tips on how to get the job.


3 UI/UX Jobs That Require No Experience


Here are 3 UI/UX job positions that require little to no experience:  

UI/ UX Intern

springboard entrey-level ux and ui designer roles how to apply  

A User Interface Designer Intern or User Experience Designer Intern is typically a generalist. The job description will call for basic knowledge about the industry and design principles and proficiency in design tools, like Adobe XD, Figma, and Sketch. Typically, these roles will teach you:  

  • User research
  • Wireframing
  • Basic information architecture

This role is perfect for those getting started out since they get to work closely with UX design specialists and product designers. You get valuable feedback from experts and learn how to put your design tools into action. The only downside is that many internships pay a minimal fee, and some might not pay at all. Many internships are also only available to fresh graduates and not for experienced professionals that want to change careers.

Junior UI/UX Designer

springboard entrey-level ux and ui designer roles how to apply A junior designer is on the same level or slightly above the totem pole compared to an intern, but it is still an entry-level position. In this role, you will still work as a generalist assisting the more experienced members of your team. However, this is a full-time position, so there’s a higher chance of finding a specialty and developing your skills within the organization. Recruiters will likely count projects during a UI/UX bootcamp or internship as professional experience when hiring junior designers.

A junior designer role is suitable for both fresh graduates and aspirants that want to switch careers. If you’re already working in another field but have transferable skills, then applying for a junior role within the design team in your organization is one of the best ways to find a job. Some job postings also refer to Junior Designer as “Associate Designer.”

Junior UX Roles

springboard entrey-level ux and ui designer roles how to apply

There are plenty of roles that go into building an excellent user experience, including user research and UX writer. Many organizations offer junior positions to entry-level applicants on these teams, provided they have related work experience in a related field.

So, if you’re an experienced copywriter, you can apply to become a UX writer with basic design knowledge. These roles are excellent for individuals that want to get into UX design from another career or industry.


Is Experience Important In UI/UX Design?


springboard entrey-level ux and ui designer roles how to apply

Yes. Experience is important, but only to a certain extent. Recruiters use “years of experience” on job descriptions as a way to weed out people who don’t know what they’re doing. Rather than a firm requirement, experience is an arbitrary qualifier for suitable candidates.

So, what does that mean for you? It means that if you find an entry-level UI/UX job and meet most of the requirements, except for the “years of experience,” then you should apply anyway. Your chances of getting an entry-level job are more dependent on your design portfolio, resume, and any connections, rather than how long you’ve been in the industry. As a newbie, you have the chance to let your work speak for you. Recruiters will choose an inexperienced designer with a great portfolio over a slightly experienced professional with a mediocre portfolio. This is why it is essential to build a good UI/UX portfolio. Overall, years of experience should not be the only factor that stops you from applying to entry-level jobs.


Where to find UI/UX designer jobs?


Start with the usual sites, i.e., LinkedInIndeed, andGlassdoor. You can also try these design-specific job boards:  

    1. AIGA Design Jobs
    2. UX Jobs Board
    3. User Experience Professionals Association
    4. Dribbble
    5. IxDA Jobs

 


Next steps


Now that you know which jobs you can apply to, let’s focus on how you can land them. First, read this handy guide on how you can get a UI/UX job without prior experience. Second, check out Springboard’s UI/UX Bootcamp. Springboard’s online course will help you gain the necessary skills and experience needed to land your dream UI/UX design job. springboard entrey-level ux and ui designer roles how to apply

The post What Entry-Level UI/UX Jobs Require No Experience? appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
16879
What’s the Difference Between Digital Design and Print Design? A Helpful Guide https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/difference-between-digital-design-and-print-design/ Wed, 21 Apr 2021 13:50:30 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=14005 At one time, graphic designers were print designers—used to creating layouts for posters, books and brochures. Now, in the 2020s, the definition of what graphic designers actually do is becoming increasingly broad…and increasingly digitised. From UX design to web design, app design to social design, there’s a whole range of design fields that have emerged […]

The post What’s the Difference Between Digital Design and Print Design? A Helpful Guide appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
At one time, graphic designers were print designers—used to creating layouts for posters, books and brochures. Now, in the 2020s, the definition of what graphic designers actually do is becoming increasingly broad…and increasingly digitised.

From UX design to web design, app design to social design, there’s a whole range of design fields that have emerged in the digital era. Of course, this doesn’t mean graphic designers have to know how to code. However, having some idea about digital design can help you to create designs for print that translate to screens seamlessly, while a little knowledge of the basics of digital design can help you to broaden your skillset and offer your clients a little something extra.

If you’re starting out in graphic design, or are a seasoned print designer looking to learn a little more about the world of online design, this quickstart guide will help you to find your feet in the digital world.


What is Print Design?


difference between digital and print design guide for graphic designers UX design definition UI design definition app design web design social media design

Traditionally (i.e. before the birth of the internet), graphic designers were print designers and the two were synonymous. Print design includes, but isn’t limited to:

  • Branding for print
  • Packaging design
  • Publishing and editorial design
  • Stationery design
  • Exhibition and signage design
  • Poster design

Today, many graphic designers will find that the designs they create for print must also translate effectively to digital screens. While some graphic designers find that they can get by with knowing the basics (scroll down to Digital Design Tips for Graphic Designers, below), others might become full-time digital designers, applying their skills to web design, UX design or social media design.


What is Digital Design?


difference between digital and print design guide for graphic designers UX design definition UI design definition app design web design social media design

Although the majority of print design work is created using digital software, digital design refers to design which is created solely for digital purposes and devices. If you can see and interact with a design on a screen—whether it be on a phone, desktop or digital billboard—this is a form of digital design.

The main digital design disciplines are:


1. Web design


The original digital design discipline, web designers create the layouts and styling of websites, often with the help of a web developer.

While developers ensure the website is built, hosted and maintained, a web designer’s job is to define the aesthetic of the site. From selecting web fonts to formulating color palettes, defining photography styles to creating a wireframe (a sort of blueprint for the layout of the site’s pages), a web designer might create a live demo of the site before the developer takes over, or use web design software like Adobe Dreamweaver, Canva or Google Web Designer.


2. App design


Similar to the above, except that the designs are optimised for apps. App designers may have to take into account the limited screen size used by most app users, as well as give more consideration to icons, accessibility and UX design (see below).

difference between digital and print design guide for graphic designers UX design definition UI design definition app design web design social media design

3. UX and UI design


User experience (UX or UE) design is a relatively young discipline, and combines aspects of graphic design with psychology, interaction design and anthropology, as well as other fields. At its core, UX design aims to provide users of websites and apps with the best possible experience, allowing them to have a seamless and efficient journey through a digital design.

UI (user interface) design is different to UX in that it tends to focus more on the design and aesthetics of a digital design, and how this can be enhanced to achieve a better user experience.


4. Branding for web


Brand design is a more familiar subject for graphic designers, who are used to creating logos and identities for print media (see What is Print Design, above). Branding for web simply refers to how that brand design translates to digital media, such as websites and apps. For example, a graphic designer might need to provide a brand color palette with HEX swatches as well as printable CMYK versions, or optimise a logo design as a much smaller favicon for a browser tab.

difference between digital and print design guide for graphic designers UX design definition UI design definition app design web design social media design

5. Social media design


Social media design refers to designs created for social media, including but not limited to, posts and stories on Instagram, Twitter, Facebook and TikTok, as well as social media advertising. Once the domain of social media marketers, businesses are increasingly seeking out specialised designers to create content for social media that uses creative designs for static and video content.

Now you know a little more about what the main digital design disciplines are, you might be wondering how you can start to use digital design in your own projects. Scroll down to learn  how you can adapt your design work for screens and discover tips and tricks for making your print designs digital-ready in no time!


Digital Design Tips for Graphic Designers


If the thought of UX design makes you turn pale, don’t panic! There is a good reason why these specialist disciplines have emerged over the past decade—each aspect of digital design requires particular experience and specialist knowledge. Of course, it’s very likely graphic designers—including traditional print designers—will have to interact with digital design at some point. The tips below are intended to help graphic designers engage productively with digital designers, and help adapt your print projects to screens.


Tip 1: Convert to HEX colour


While CMYK, spot colours and Pantone are the language of print designers, for digital designers RGB swatches are the standard, with HEX codes—which render RGB values as a hexadecimal code, e.g. #ff8e00 (dark orange)—used ubiquitously across web and app design.

Tip: If you create a CMYK palette, it’s not always a good idea to use automated conversion to create an RGB palette (i.e. by simply switching the colour to RGB using Adobe software or an eyedropper tool). RGB colour works by emitting light, making them appear very differently (and brightly in comparison) to their CMYK counterparts. You can use a colour tool like Adobe Color to convert and tweak colour swatches between CMYK and RGB modes.

difference between digital and print design guide for graphic designers UX design definition UI design definition app design web design social media design

Tip 2: Design with interaction and animation in mind


As video content becomes increasingly normalised across websites and social media platforms, designers are becoming more used to adapting their static content for animation. While graphic designers don’t have to become animators overnight, it can be useful to consider how your design could be animated or incorporated into a video. Whether it’s a logo that could transform from one thing into another, or an illustration that could be animated as part of a simple GIF, think about how your static work could be given motion and dynamism.

Tip: You can use Adobe Photoshop’s Timeline feature to create quick video animations from static images (Window > Timeline).


Tip 3: Use typefaces that include web fonts


Graphic designers are always falling for the latest lust-worthy typeface…but take a moment to find out whether your typeface of desire is available as a webfont. Webfonts are fonts which have been specially created for use on websites and apps, and contain CSS code to allow the font to be rendered on your website for viewers to see.

While you can use OTF (OpenType Font) and other types of font files on most web applications, WOFF (Web Open Font Format) is the standard file type for use online.

Tip: Note that you will also usually require a separate webfont licence to use your chosen font on websites and apps.


Tip 4: Rethink sizing


A billboard is huge. A poster is big. A mobile phone screen is teeny tiny. Graphic designers who are used to creating layouts for large-scale media will need to get used to working in miniature when working on digital designs.

Tip: Reconsider the sizing of elements such as type, graphics, icons and buttons (hint: they will need to take up more space on your layouts to be legible). Develop a habit of viewing completed designs on your phone screen—this will give you a good sense of how legible elements are when set at a particular scale.

difference between digital and print design guide for graphic designers UX design definition UI design definition app design web design social media design

Tip 5: Consider accessibility and usability


While UX and UI designers are habituated with considering these issues, print designers are not always as well initiated when it comes to accessibility.

Why is accessibility important on screens? First of all, as pointed out above, screens are often much smaller than printed layouts, meaning that text and other elements are already more difficult to read and see. In addition, the brightness of screens can diminish the visibility and legibility of text for visually-impaired users.

Consider the effect of colour contrast, text size and layout design on how users can view and interact with your design. Vision simulator tools like Web Disability Simulator can help you to assess how a design would appear to users with different vision impairments.

difference between digital and print design guide for graphic designers UX design definition UI design definition app design web design social media design

Conclusion: Time to Go Digital?


While digital design is ever-evolving and ever-expanding, there will always be a place for print design in the industry. Nonetheless, print designers will undoubtedly have to consider how static, printable designs can be adapted for screens.

Armed with a little know-how about HEX colours and webfonts, even the most committed of print designers might be tempted to explore the exciting possibilities of digital design.

Want to keep a footing in the tangible world? These print design tutorials will help to hone your hard-copy skills:


Illustrations used throughout by Kate Pilko.

The post What’s the Difference Between Digital Design and Print Design? A Helpful Guide appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
14005
Go InDesign Pro in 5 Days! https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/go-indesign-pro/ Mon, 23 Mar 2020 10:18:36 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=13060 InDesign Skills was made to give budding and experienced designers alike the inspiration and resources to improve their graphic design ability. With many of us staying at home for the next few weeks, we wanted to help you dedicate some of that time to learning a new skill. Plus, we thought a bit of structure […]

The post Go InDesign Pro in 5 Days! appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
InDesign Skills was made to give budding and experienced designers alike the inspiration and resources to improve their graphic design ability.

With many of us staying at home for the next few weeks, we wanted to help you dedicate some of that time to learning a new skill. Plus, we thought a bit of structure would help too!

We’ll work towards creating a business card in InDesign, in 5 bitesize tutorials over the course of the week. By Friday you’ll have an ultra-professional business card design, as well as having picked up key print design skills in InDesign, including:

Over the next week, we’ll help you create a professional business card from scratch. Each day, there’ll be a short video that takes you through document setup, layers, fonts, colour, and exporting your final design.

  • How to Make a Document for Print
  • How to Use Layers
  • How to Use Fonts and Format Typography
  • How to Apply Color
  • How to Export Your InDesign Document Ready for Print

We really hope you enjoy it, and would love to see what you come up with. 

PLUS Adobe is offering 2 months of free Creative Cloud. Yup, that’s right, totally free. Find out more here.

Take advantage and seize the chance to up your InDesign Skills!

The post Go InDesign Pro in 5 Days! appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
13060
How to Create Invisible Text Wraps in InDesign https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/invisible-text-wrap/ Fri, 14 Feb 2020 15:11:58 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=12931 In this quick and easy-to-follow tutorial we’ll expand on the basics of using the Text Wrap function in Adobe InDesign. Wrapping text around ‘invisible’ shapes in InDesign allows you to give your layouts some serious style.  Great for magazine and poster design, this effect works best when you have dense text on a page. If […]

The post How to Create Invisible Text Wraps in InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
In this quick and easy-to-follow tutorial we’ll expand on the basics of using the Text Wrap function in Adobe InDesign. Wrapping text around ‘invisible’ shapes in InDesign allows you to give your layouts some serious style. 

Great for magazine and poster design, this effect works best when you have dense text on a page. If you need to, brush up on the basics of creating a text wrap in InDesign here.


What You’ll Need to Create Your Text Wrap Effect


You’ll need access to a trio of Adobe programsAdobe Photoshop, Adobe Illustrator and, of course, Adobe InDesign.

You’ll also need a photo or vector graphic with a strong silhouette and preferably no background or a white background, so it can be easily removed. 

Here, I’ve already created a layout for a magazine, complete with columns of text. You can easily apply this effect to any similar layout you have created.

invisible text wrap indesign wrap text around vector shape

1. How to Prepare Your Image


You can use either a photo or vector image to create your text wrap effect, but if you’re using a photo you will need to follow a few extra steps using Photoshop and Illustrator. To allow text to wrap around a silhouette, you will need to create a vector shape. 

If you have a ready-to-use vector shape, skip ahead to Step 4.

Step 1

You might have a part of the image you’d like to maintain in the final effect, such as the umbrella handle. In this case, you will need to isolate the handle in Photoshop. To begin, open the original photo in Photoshop. 

To remove a white or plain colour background, go to Select > Color Range. Click once on the background to pick up the colour, before adjusting the Edge Detection slider in the Properties panel that opens. 

invisible text wrap indesign wrap text around vector shape

When you’re happy with the tightness of the selection around the edge of the shape, click OK. Then hit Delete on your keyboard to remove the background. 

invisible text wrap indesign wrap text around vector shape

Step 2

Use the Lasso Tool (L) to loop off any part of the image that is not the handle (the part you’d like to keep as a photographic image in the final result). 

invisible text wrap indesign wrap text around vector shape

Then hit Delete to remove the selection. 

invisible text wrap indesign wrap text around vector shape

File > Save As the image as a Photoshop file, which will preserve the transparent background. 

invisible text wrap indesign wrap text around vector shape

Step 3

Open Illustrator and File > Place, choosing the original photo, as before, and opening it. 

Go to Window > Image Trace. 

In the Image Trace window, set the Mode to Black and White. Check the Ignore White box at the bottom of the window.

Check the Preview button, and then experiment with the Threshold, Paths and Corners sliders, until you’re happy with the traced result. 

invisible text wrap indesign wrap text around vector shape

When you’re done click Trace to exit the window. 

Go to Object > Image Trace > Expand. 

invisible text wrap indesign wrap text around vector shape

Select the Eraser Tool (Shift+E) and use this to separate any parts of the image that you won’t want to use in the text wrap effect. In this case, this is the handle of the umbrella, which will be substituted with a photo version. Delete any parts of the graphic you won’t use. 

invisible text wrap indesign wrap text around vector shape

Step 4

Your vector shape is ready to use—you can either save this as a vector file (e.g. Illustrator, EPS), or Edit > Copy the vector directly in Illustrator, ready to Paste into your InDesign document. 

invisible text wrap indesign wrap text around vector shape

2. Create the Text Wrap Effect in InDesign


Step 1

In InDesign, expand the Layers panel, and lock the layer which contains all the text in your document. 

Go to New Layer from the panel’s main menu, and create a new layer for the text wrap image to sit on. 

invisible text wrap indesign wrap text around vector shape

Step 2

If you have a photo element to your image, use the Rectangle Frame Tool (F) to create an image frame on the layout. 

File > Place the edited image you created earlier [in 1.1, above]. 

invisible text wrap indesign wrap text around vector shape

Step 3

File > Place or Edit > Paste (if you’ve copied the vector in Illustrator) the vector shape, and position it on the page. Use Shift and your mouse to scale it proportionally.

invisible text wrap indesign wrap text around vector shape

Expand the Swatches panel (Window > Color > Swatches), and set the Fill Color of the vector shape to [None].

invisible text wrap indesign wrap text around vector shape

Step 4

Go to Window > Text Wrap to open the Text Wrap panel.

Select the shape and choose the third option along, Wrap around object shape, from the set of icons at the top of the panel. You can experiment with the Offset value to make the text wrap tighter or looser. 

For these ‘invisible’ wrap effects, it’s usually better to have a tighter text wrap, and therefore a low offset value, such as 0 mm. 

invisible text wrap indesign wrap text around vector shape

Pro Tip

You may also want to create a subtle text wrap around some photographic elements on your layout. 

To do this, you can create a quick vector shape directly in InDesign using the Pen Tool (P). Trace your way around the element you want to wrap text around, lopping it round to create a complete shape. 

invisible text wrap indesign wrap text around vector shape

Then apply the Wrap around object shape option in the Text Wrap panel, and ensure the Fill Color of the shape is set to [None]. 

invisible text wrap indesign wrap text around vector shape
invisible text wrap indesign wrap text around vector shape

Great Job!

Your ‘invisible’ text wrap effect is finished. 

invisible text wrap indesign wrap text around vector shape

Why not try using this technique for a variety of different shapes to create interesting and stylish concepts in your magazine and poster designs?

invisible text wrap indesign wrap text around vector shape

Ready to get creative? Discover more great InDesign tutorials here, or brush up on your type skills with these typography tutorials.

 

The post How to Create Invisible Text Wraps in InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
12931
The Beginner’s Guide to Types of Image File https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/image-file-types/ Mon, 28 Oct 2019 12:35:51 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=12728 Confused about JPEGs versus PNGs? Mystified by GIFs or TIFFs? Fear not! Read on for your straightforward guide to types of digital and print image files, as well as where (and where not) to use them. Check out how to work with images in InDesign. 1. JPEG (files ending in .jpg) The most common and […]

The post The Beginner’s Guide to Types of Image File appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Confused about JPEGs versus PNGs? Mystified by GIFs or TIFFs?

Fear not! Read on for your straightforward guide to types of digital and print image files, as well as where (and where not) to use them.

Check out how to work with images in InDesign.


1. JPEG (files ending in .jpg)


image file type beginner's guide jpeg png eps native gif tiff

The most common and versatile of types of image file, JPEG (or JPG) stands for Joint Photographic Experts Group. Catchy.

JPEGS are compressed image files, resulting in a smaller file size than the original, pre-exported file. JPEGs are raster files, meaning that they lose quality when scaled, and can appear blurry or pixelated if scaled to a larger size than they have been saved to.

Because JPEGs can be saved with particular dimensions and quality (usually measured in DPI, dots per inch), they are useful for when you have an idea of the space the image will need to occupy. For example, if you want to use an image on a printed magazine cover, you can size the JPEG to the dimensions of the cover, and set the resolution to 300 dpi (see tip, below).

Where to use a JPEG: Photos on websites and print media.

Top tip: For print design, JPEGs are best used at a minimum of 300 dpi. For websites and apps, a 72 dpi resolution will suffice.


2. PNG (files ending in .png)


image file type beginner's guide jpeg png eps native gif tiff

PNG images (standing for Portable Network Graphic) are essential tools for web design. Able to preserve the quality of text and lines better than JPEGs, they are also able to preserve transparencies.

PNGs are usually larger files than JPEGs, which is why they are not usually used for saving images that are photos only.

Where to use a PNG: Images that contain a mix of photos and text, or logos and other exported vector images, on websites and apps.


3. TIFF (files ending in .tif)


image file type beginner's guide jpeg png eps native gif tiff

TIFF image files, which stands for Tagged Image File Format, contain a large amount of image data. They are uncompressed, resulting in very large file sizes, but as a result are flexible in terms of color, preserve layers and image tags, and are of a very high quality.

Though usually used for print design due to their large size, TIFFs can be rendered in both CMYK and RGB color.

Where to use a TIFF: Print media and high-quality website images; photos for printing or using online.


4. GIF (files ending in .gif)


image file type beginner's guide jpeg png eps native gif tiff

Having achieved fame as easily shareable animations, GIFs are probably best known for bringing the antics of household cats to the masses on Tumblr and WhatsApp.

Standing for Graphic Interchange Format, GIFs are compressed image files, but in contrast to JPEGs the compression is lossless, resulting in a larger file size.

GIFs have a limited color range, meaning they are rarely used for photos online, and almost never used in print design.

Where to use a GIF: Low-quality images and animations for websites and apps.


5. EPS (files ending in .eps)


image file type beginner's guide jpeg png eps native gif tiff

Short for Encapsulated PostScript, EPS files contain vector image content. Compatible with most vector editing software, like Adobe Illustrator and CorelDRAW, EPS files can be scaled up or down to any size, without compromising on quality. They can also be edited using vector software.

Not usually used on websites because of their large size, EPS files are most commonly used as shareable image files for illustrators and designers. For example, one individual can save a logo or other vector file as an EPS file in Adobe Illustrator, and share this with another individual who can open and edit the file in CorelDRAW.

Where to use an EPS: Use as a more flexible ‘native’ file format (see below), for sharing editable vector files with others or across different vector programs.


6. ‘Native’ and Raw Image Files


image file type beginner's guide jpeg png eps native gif tiff

One of the most baffling things for novice designers to be faced with is to be asked for a ‘native’ image file. A vague term indeed, but essentially a native file refers to the original file type that the image was created in.

The most commonly requested native file types are those generated by Adobe software, such as PSD (Adobe Photoshop), INDD (Adobe InDesign) and ASE (Adobe Illustrator) files.

Usually native files are requested by designers (or clients) from other designers, so that they are able to access  and optionally edit and re-export the image.

Raw image files are similar, in that they are unprocessed, non-exported images, but raw files are normally used by photographers and photo editors, as these files contain data from digital cameras.

Where to use Native and Raw image files: To exchange original, editable images with other designers or clients.


Learn how to wrap text around images in InDesign in this quick and simple tutorial.

Discover more beginner’s tips and tutorials for getting started in Adobe InDesign, and pick up some essential graphic design skills.

The post The Beginner’s Guide to Types of Image File appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
12728
How to Make a Zine in Adobe InDesign https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/how-to-make-a-zine/ Fri, 09 Nov 2018 11:25:32 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=8723 Zines, self-published mini magazines, are a fresh and exciting way to present photos, illustrations or ideas. Here we’ll look at how you can put together your own zine layout in InDesign, complete with page numbers, print-friendly color, and a stylish design. You’ll also learn how to export your zine artwork correctly for printing. By the […]

The post How to Make a Zine in Adobe InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Zines, self-published mini magazines, are a fresh and exciting way to present photos, illustrations or ideas. Here we’ll look at how you can put together your own zine layout in InDesign, complete with page numbers, print-friendly color, and a stylish design. You’ll also learn how to export your zine artwork correctly for printing.

By the end of the tutorial you’ll have a zine template you can customise to make a more unique design.

Suitable for relative beginners to InDesign, this is a great all-round introduction to basic print design techniques.

zine design indesign template

What You’ll Need to Create Your Zine


As well as access to Adobe InDesign, you’ll need a selection of images and fonts to use in your zine.

To recreate the design pictured here, you can download the following photos and fonts:

Install the font onto your computer and you’re ready to start designing.


How to Set Up the Zine Document in InDesign


Step 1


Open InDesign and go to File > New > Document.

Set up the document for Print, with an A5 page size (148 x 210 mm). Set the number of pages to 10 and make sure Facing Pages is checked.

Add a Top and Bottom Margin of 19 mm, set the Inside Margin to 21 mm and the Bottom Margin to 25 mm.

Finally, add a 5 mm Bleed to all edges except the Inside edge, and click Create.

zine design indesign template new document
zine design indesign template

Step 2


Expand the Layers panel (Window > Layers).

Double-click on Layer 1 and rename this Color.

Create two more new layers — Photos, and Type.

zine design indesign template new layer

Step 3


Expand the Swatches panel (Window > Color > Swatches).

Choose New Color Swatch from the panel’s drop-down menu (at top-right).

With the Type set to Process and Mode to CMYK, set the levels below to C=96 M=82 Y=3 K=0. Click Add and Done.

Create a second new swatch, C=0 M=86 Y=89 K=0.

zine design indesign template swatches

Step 4


Choose New Gradient Swatch from the Swatches panel’s menu.

zine design indesign template gradient swatch

Name the swatch Gradient Swatch. Click on the left-hand stop on the Gradient Ramp, and choose your blue swatch, C=96 M=82 Y=3 K=0, from the Stop Color menu.

For the right-hand stop choose your red swatch, C=0 M=86 Y=89 K=0.

Click Add and Done.

zine design indesign template gradient swatch

2. How to Edit Your Zine’s Master Pages


Step 1


Double-click on the A-Master icon at the top of the Pages panel (Window > Pages) to bring up the master on your screen.

zine design indesign template master

Use the Type Tool (T) to create a text frame across the bottom of the left-hand page.

zine design indesign template master

Here you can place page numbers. With your type cursor in the frame, go to Type > Insert Special Character > Markers > Current Page Number.

zine design indesign template insert page number

You can format the page number using the Swatches panel and Character and Paragraph panels (Window > Type & Tables > Character / Paragraph).

zine design indesign template page number

Step 2


Edit > Copy and Edit > Paste the page number text frame, moving this over to the right-hand page.

zine design indesign template page numbers

Step 3


Use the Rectangle Tool (M) to create a tall, narrow shape across the left edge of the spread, taking it up to the bleed, and allowing a small area to extend onto the page.

Set the Fill Color of this to Gradient Swatch.

zine design indesign template colored trim

Copy and Paste the rectangle, and on the copy, Right-Click > Transform > Flip Horizontal.

zine design indesign template flip horizontal

Move this over into a mirrored position on the right-hand page.

zine design indesign template page trim

Step 4


In the Pages panel, Right-Click on the A-Master icon, and choose Duplicate Master Spread “A-Master”.

zine design indesign template duplicate master

On the new B-Master, select and delete the page number text frames.

zine design indesign template colored trim
zine design indesign template colored trim

Step 5


In the Pages panel, select the top [None] master page, and choose Apply Master to Pages from the panel’s drop-down menu.

We want to have no master applied to the front and back cover of our zine, which is on pages 1 and 10 of our document. So type in 1, 10 and click OK.

zine design indesign template apply master to pages

Select the B-Master icon in the Pages panel, and, as before, choose Apply Master to Pages. You want to apply the B-Master to any pages which you don’t want to have page numbers. In this case, I type in 2, 6, before clicking OK.

zine design indesign template master apply

3. How to Section Your Zine


Step 1


In this zine, I want to split the document into two sections, with page 1 beginning on what is currently page 3 of the document.

To begin a new section, Right-Click on the page you want to start as page 1 (in this case page 3), and choose Numbering & Section Options.

zine design indesign template start section

Step 2


In the New Section window that opens, check Start Page Numbering at, and set this to 1.

zine design indesign template new section

Then click OK. You’ll get a warning message, but don’t worry about that. Just click OK.


Step 3


On the first page of the document, Right-Click > Numbering & Section Options.

zine design indesign template new section

As before make sure Start Page Numbering at is selected and set to 1. But this time choose a different Style for the Page Numbering, such as lowercase roman numerals. Then click OK.

zine design indesign template new section
zine design indesign template new section

4. How to Create a Front Cover for Your Zine


Step 1


Working on the first page (i) of your document, and on the Color layer, use the Rectangle Tool (M) to create a shape across the whole page, extending the edge up to the bleed on the top, right and bottom sides.

Set the Fill Color to Gradient Swatch.

zine design indesign template gradient

You can adjust the strength of the gradient from the Gradient panel (Window > Color > Gradient). Here I want to make the gradient blend more abruptly in the center of the page.

zine design indesign template gradient

Step 2


Copy and Edit > Paste in Place the rectangle shape, adjusting the Fill to your blue swatch, C=96 M=82 Y=3 K=0.

zine design indesign template noise gradient

With the blue shape selected go to Object > Effects > Transparency, and bring the Opacity down to 30%.

zine design indesign template grainy gradient

Click on Inner Glow in the panel’s left-hand menu. With the Mode set to Normal, click on the colored square to adjust the Effect Color to your red swatch, C=0 M=86 Y=89 K=0.

Increase the Opacity to 100%.

Set the Source to Centre, Size to around 55 mm, Choke to 50% and Noise to about 45%. Then click OK.

zine design indesign template noise gradient

Step 3


Working on the Type layer, use the Type Tool (T) to add text to your cover, setting the Font to Cormorant and Font Color to [Paper].

zine design indesign template front cover

5. How to Build Up Content on the Inside Pages of Your Zine


Step 1


Select both rectangle shapes sat on the Color layer on the front cover, and Copy them.

Scroll down to the first inside spread of your zine, and Paste the shapes, moving them over onto the left-hand page.

zine design indesign template gradient

Step 2


Edit > Paste a second time, and with this copy selected, go to Object > Convert Shape > Ellipse.

zine design indesign template paste shapes

From the top Controls panel adjust the Width and Height of the circles to 108 mm.

zine design indesign template circle gradient

Then move these over the top of the left page, positioning them centrally. Shift the top circle slightly up and to the right to create a slightly blurry effect.

zine design indesign template circle gradient

Step 3


You can add text to your zine using the Type Tool (T), and working on the Type layer.

Here, I’ve added text set in Cormorant and a blue, C=96 M=82 Y=3 K=0, Font Color, to the right-hand page of the spread.

zine design indesign template text frame

Step 4


Use the Rectangle Frame Tool (F) to create image frames on some of the pages of your zine.

Go to File > Place to drop images into the frames.

zine design indesign template place images
zine design indesign template place images

Step 5


Use the swatches you’ve already created to format text, adding a touch of color to your typography.

Here, I’ve also set the text to Align towards spine (which you can find in the top Controls panel with the Type Tool selected).

zine design indesign template typography

Step 6


Use elements you’ve already created, such as the colored rectangles and circles on the first spread, to create a quick and simple design for your back cover, on the final page of the document.

Make sure to add your website to the back cover too.

zine design indesign template back cover

6. How to Export Your Zine for Print


Step 1


File > Save your artwork, then go to File > Export.

Choose Adobe PDF (Print) from the Format menu, name your file, and then click Save.

zine design indesign template export pdf

Step 2


In the Export Adobe PDF window, choose Press Quality for the Adobe PDF Preset, at the top.

Make sure the pages are set to Export As: Pages (not spreads).

zine design indesign template export pdf bleed

Click on Marks and Bleeds in the left-hand menu. Check All Printer’s Marks and Use Document Bleed Settings, before clicking Export.

zine design indesign template export pdf

You can send off this PDF document straight to the printers, great job!

zine design indesign template

The post How to Make a Zine in Adobe InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
8723
InDesign Tutorials | 10 Things You Can Create With InDesign https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/10-indesign-tutorials/ Fri, 21 Sep 2018 08:31:36 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=8628 If you’re new to InDesign, or feeling stuck in a rut with creating the same sorts of items, this list of InDesign tutorials will help you discover a wide range of exciting things you can create. From magazine cover tutorials to EPUB tutorials, and everything in-between, you might discover something you’d never thought you could […]

The post InDesign Tutorials | 10 Things You Can Create With InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
If you’re new to InDesign, or feeling stuck in a rut with creating the same sorts of items, this list of InDesign tutorials will help you discover a wide range of exciting things you can create.

From magazine cover tutorials to EPUB tutorials, and everything in-between, you might discover something you’d never thought you could create using this versatile layout software.


1. Magazine Design Tutorial (& Template)


One of our most popular InDesign tutorials, this walkthrough is great way to get an overview of all aspects of InDesign. You can use InDesign to create both the interior layouts and covers for magazines. All major magazine titles you’ll see at the newsstand, from Vogue to GQ, will have been created using InDesign.

Get started with creating your own print magazine from scratch with this duo of easy-to-follow tutorials.indesign tutorials for beginners magazine designDownload this free template for a magazine cover, and adapt it to create your own unique design.

indesign tutorials for beginners magazine design cover template


2. EPUB Tutorial


InDesign isn’t limited to creating designs only for print. The latest version, CC, is perfectly equipped to help you create documents for ePublishing (EPUBs), such as eMagazines, eBooks and interactive PDFs.

This InDesign tutorial leads you through the basics of creating and publishing your own EPUBs using InDesign.

indesign tutorials for beginners epub emagazine ebook


3. Invitation Tutorial (& Template)


Giving you a great overview of how to design pretty documents in InDesign, this InDesign tutorial is a great place to start. With a sophisticated interface designed to allow you to set up high-quality print designs, which include foiling, die-cutting or embossing, InDesign is the perfect choice for creating high-end stationery like wedding and event invitations.

Take a look at this free-to-download botanical wedding invite template, which consists of both an invitation and save-the-date card.

indesign tutorials for beginners wedding invitation


4. Flyers and Brochure Tutorial (& Template)


Looking for a tutorial to help give your marketing materials an update?

You can create flyers, brochures and booklets quickly and easily in InDesign, which is perfectly tuned for creating single-page, double-sided and multi-page documents for print.

This free flyer template provides you with an easy-to-edit foundation for creating your own tri-fold flyer designs.

indesign tutorials for beginners flyers brochures


5. Book Cover Tutorial (& Template)


Creating book covers can be fiddly. But setting up a wraparound cover with a spine and bleed is a doddle using InDesign’s handy grids and guides.

In this InDesign tutorial you’ll learn how to set up a cover design for a paperback book in InDesign to a professional standard.

indesign tutorials for beginners book cover design


6. Typeset Pages for Books Tutorial


In this InDesign tutorial we’ll tackle the art of typesetting. Typesetting is the process of arranging long pieces of text on either a single page, or across a long document, such as a book, magazine or report.

While word-processing programs can limit the amount you can do with typesetting, InDesign allows you to typeset to a professional standard. This easy-to-follow tutorial shows you how to get started with typesetting the interior pages of books.indesign tutorials for beginners book typesetting interior pages


7. Business Card Tutorial


Business cards may be small, but they have to make a big impact. InDesign allows you to create beautiful business cards, perfectly optimised for print, in next to no time.

This InDesign tutorial will help you get started on the right foot by discovering the standard sizes for business cards.

indesign tutorials for beginners business cards


8. Letterhead Tutorial (& Template)


Letterheads have abandoned their dusty reputation, as it’s now easy to achieve a stylish, on-trend look for your business stationery using InDesign.

This free letterhead tutorial and template makes a great foundation for creating your own unique design.

Creative letterhead free template for InDesign. Simple design layout for your creative business. Download this free template.


9. Advanced Typographic Layouts


One of the biggest advantages of InDesign over other design software is its unsurpassable functionality for formatting typography. You’ll find a huge range of advanced features for making your text look its very best, from optical margin alignment to drop caps.

This InDesign tutorial shows you how you can create both basic and advanced drop caps in InDesign, to give your paragraphs a stylish twist.

indesign tutorials for beginners drop cap typography


10. Resume Tutorial


In a competitive job market it pays to stand-out amongst the crowd. Creating a resume in InDesign is quick and easy, and allows you to be more experimental with column layouts, colour and typography.

If you’re not sure how to begin, working with an existing resume template is a good start. This free-to-download modern resume template is clean, stylish and easy to adapt with your own fonts and colors.

indesign tutorials for beginners resumes cv


Don’t miss our other free InDesign tutorials for beginners.

The post InDesign Tutorials | 10 Things You Can Create With InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
8628
How to Create Stylish Magazine Pull Quotes https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/pull-quotes-magazine-layout/ Tue, 28 Aug 2018 10:42:59 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=8594 Pull quotes are a great technique for drawing attention to key items of text on a layout, and are often used in editorial design to make a feature of interesting soundbites. It’s quick and easy to create pull quotes in InDesign once you know a few tips. In this bitesize tutorial we’ll look at two […]

The post How to Create Stylish Magazine Pull Quotes appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Pull quotes are a great technique for drawing attention to key items of text on a layout, and are often used in editorial design to make a feature of interesting soundbites.

It’s quick and easy to create pull quotes in InDesign once you know a few tips. In this bitesize tutorial we’ll look at two ways of creating pull quotes that are simple to do and look really effective.


Method #1: Wrap Text Around Your Pull Quote


If you want to add pull quotes over the top of existing paragraphs of text, applying a text wrap is an easy way of ensuring quotes and body text work seamlessly together.magazine pull quotes indesign


Step 1


Use the Type Tool (T) to create a text frame near to or over the top of the body text where you want the pull quote to appear.

Type in the quote, and use either the top Controls panel or the Character panel (Window > Type & Tables > Character) to format the text. Here I’ve set the font to Cardo Italic.

magazine pull quotes indesign cardo font


Step 2


With the text frame selected go to Window > Text Wrap.

Choose Wrap around bounding box from the options at the top of the window, before adjusting the Offset values until the body text around the quote is pushed away equally from the edges of the text frame.

You may need to apply subtly different Offset values to create an evenly spaced look.

magazine pull quotes indesign text wrap


Step 3


If you want to create multiple pull quotes across columns sitting next to each other, you can ensure the baseline of the body text remains consistent by copying and pasting the pull quote frame, preserving the same text wrap settings.magazine pull quotes indesign


Method #2: Adjust the Inset Spacing of Your Pull Quote


If you want to layer a pull quote over an image, you can give your text frame a color fill and adjust the inset spacing to create a seamless effect. Here’s how to do it.magazine pull quotes indesign


Step 1


Use the Type Tool (T) to create a text frame for your pull quote, and type up the quote.magazine pull quotes indesign

Format the quote using the Controls panel or the Character panel (Window > Type & Tables > Character). The font I’ve used here is Futura Extra Bold.

I’ve also used the Swatches panel (Window > Color > Swatches) to add a different Font Color to the quotation marks.magazine pull quotes indesign swatches


Step 2


Go to Window > Type & Tables > Story.

With the text frame selected check the Optical Margin Alignment box. This will shift outlying elements of text like quotation marks to the outside of the text frame, creating a tidier look for your quote.magazine pull quotes indesign optical margin alignment


Step 3


Use the Swatches panel to add a Fill Color to your text frame.

If, for example, you were creating a layout set on blank, white paper, you could set the Fill to [Paper] to match the background and create a seamless overlapping effect.magazine pull quotes indesign swatches


Step 4


With the text frame selected go to Object > Text Frame Options.

magazine pull quotes indesign text frame options

Adjust the Inset Spacing values so that the text frame has a generous margin around the outside. Make sure the Preview box is checked, to allow you to see how much spacing you are adding. This will frame the quote nicely, and create a more attractive final result. When you’re happy, click OK to exit the window.

magazine pull quotes indesign text frame options inset spacing

And there we have it! Two quick and easy techniques for creating magazine pull quotes. Really simple, and really effective.


The post How to Create Stylish Magazine Pull Quotes appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
8594
The Most Popular Standard Book Sizes in the US and UK https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/standard-book-sizes/ Fri, 27 Jul 2018 08:32:52 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=8440 Confused about which size you should opt for when designing your book? Although books can be printed in a huge range of sizes, these are the top four most widely used standards in the US and UK. These book sizes are guaranteed to fit snugly on the bookstore’s shelf, and you’ll also find suggestions for […]

The post The Most Popular Standard Book Sizes in the US and UK appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Confused about which size you should opt for when designing your book? Although books can be printed in a huge range of sizes, these are the top four most widely used standards in the US and UK.

These book sizes are guaranteed to fit snugly on the bookstore’s shelf, and you’ll also find suggestions for choosing a suitable size for your chosen genre.


The Top 4 Most Popular Book Sizes in the US


Standard book size self-publishing usa pocket book fiction


Pocket Book: 4.25 in x 6.87 in


Best for: Low-cost paperback fiction

Pocket books are sized to do just that—fit nicely in a back pocket. This format is cheap to print and convenient to carry around, so it makes a great fit for cheap paperback fiction. You’ll see this size sold in newsagents and airports, as well as bookstores.

Standard book size self-publishing usa trade digest fiction


Digest: 5.5 in x 8.5 in


Best for: Paperback fiction and non-fiction

The Digest format is the smallest of what are termed ‘trade’ sizes in the States.

These are amongst the most widely circulated paperback sizes in the country, and suit both fiction and non-fiction titles.

Standard book size self-publishing usa US trade fiction


US Trade: 6 in x 9 in


Best for: Paperback fiction

The more common of the trade sizes is US Trade, a slightly larger format often used for paperback fiction. This is a failsafe size to pick for fiction, and is the most common standard size offered by print-on-demand services for both self-published authors and publishing houses.

Standard book size self-publishing usa hardcover fiction


Hardcover: Ranges from 6 in x 9 in to 8.5 in x 11 in


Best for: Premium fiction and non-fiction

Hardcover (or hardback) sizes vary widely in the US, but generally the size of these books tends to fall somewhere between 6 x 9 in and 8.5 x 11 in.

Self-publishers tend to avoid hardcovers in favor of cheaper paperbacks, but with more POD sites offering hardcover print runs at increasingly better value, it’s starting to become more of a realistic option for self-published authors.


The Top 4 Most Popular Book Sizes in the UK


Standard book size self-publishing uk a format fiction


A-Format: 178 mm x 111 mm


Best for: Airport fiction

A-format books are dinky, and perfect for readers on the go. This format used to be the standard for airport fiction, but now you’ll also see it used widely for reprints of classic novels and niche fiction, like self-help or humour.

Standard book size self-publishing uk b format fiction


B-Format: 198 mm x 129 mm


Best for: Paperback fiction

B-Format books are probably the most widely circulated in the UK, being the industry standard for most paperback fiction. If you’re unsure about which size to choose for your book, B-Format is a pretty safe bet.

You’ll see this stocked widely across both physical and online bookstores, and most print-on-demand sites will feature the B-Format as one of their recommended sizes for self-publishers.

Standard book size self-publishing uk demy fiction


Demy: 216 mm x 135 mm


Best for: Large-format paperbacks

Larger paperbacks are being increasingly used in the UK in place of more expensive to produce hardbacks. The Demy format is commonly used for airport fiction these days, often replacing the more traditional and smaller A-format size.

If you’re looking to create a mass-market book, either in the self-help or fiction genres, a Demy size is a good option for attracting maximum attention on the shelf without the expense of printing a hardback.

Standard book size self-publishing uk royal fiction


Royal: 234 mm x 156 mm


Best for: Hardback novels

A Royal is a large-format size suited to novels and some non-fiction (such as high-volume biographies). Because Royals are larger than Demys, B-formats and A-formats, you’ll often see them in hardback (hardcover) format.

These are the books you’ll see showcased in the ‘New Hardback Fiction’ section of the bookstore, arranged so that the front covers face the browser. Being the largest of British fiction sizes, Royals aren’t the cheapest to produce, but they make a big visual impact.


The post The Most Popular Standard Book Sizes in the US and UK appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
8440
5 Typography Rules All Designers Should Know https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/typography/ Mon, 09 Jul 2018 15:53:03 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=8414 New to the world of Typography? Designers swear by these five go-to rules for keeping their typography looking tip-top. From adding optical margin alignment to adjusting tracking, here you’ll find a handy set of guides for lifting your typography skills to a pro level. 1. Balance Classic Typefaces with Cutting Edge Fonts Fonts are the […]

The post 5 Typography Rules All Designers Should Know appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
New to the world of Typography? Designers swear by these five go-to rules for keeping their typography looking tip-top.

From adding optical margin alignment to adjusting tracking, here you’ll find a handy set of guides for lifting your typography skills to a pro level.


1. Balance Classic Typefaces with Cutting Edge Fonts


typography rules you need to know indesign balance old and new fontsFonts are the building blocks of great typography, but with so many type styles vying for your attention it can be easy to neglect genuinely good fonts in favor of the newest fad.

Most pro designers will retain a deep respect and affection for classic fonts, often opting for Old-Style serifs like Garamond or geometric sans serifs like Futura over newer fonts. Why? These typefaces have enduring popularity for good reason—they’re attractive, legible, are often available in a wide variety of weights and styles, and have design traits which ensure they still look fresh and relevant on modern layouts.

If you want to make your typography look as professional as possible, try pairing an old-school font, like Baskerville or Avenir, with a new font. Our favorite source for free commercial fonts is FontSquirrel.


2. Increase Your T r a c k i n g


typograohy rules you need to know indesign tracking

Tracking effects the letter-spacing across a whole word, phrase or paragraph of text. Reducing tracking often makes typography appear a bit too squashed (though try it if your font is already too generously spaced), but increasing it just slightly can have an instant prettifying effect on your type, making it appear more legible and attractive.

To edit tracking in InDesign, access the option from the top Controls panel or the Character panel (Window > Type & Tables > Character). Try increasing the value to just 5 or 10 to see an instant difference.

typograohy rules you need to know indesign tracking


3. Edit Your Typography’s Leading


typograohy rules you need to know indesign leadingLeading, which effects the spacing between lines of text, has a similar beautifying effect on typography as tracking. Increasing the leading from its default value allows long sections of text to ‘breathe’ and helps improve readability.

InDesign applies an automated leading value to text, which you can see underneath the Font Size menu in the Controls panel. Place your Type Tool (T) cursor in the paragraph or highlight the text, before increasing this value slightly.

typograohy rules you need to know indesign leading


4. Apply Optical Margin Alignment


typography rules you need to know indesign optical margin alignment

Optical margin alignment is the pro typographer’s best kept secret. Applying margin alignment shifts small elements like serifs and apostrophes to the outside of the text frame, creating a tidier edge to a paragraph. It’s a really subtle trick which really works—try it and you won’t look back!

To apply margin alignment in InDesign, go to Window > Type & Tables > Story and check the Optical Margin Alignment box.typography rules you need to know indesign optical margin alignment


5. Establish a Hierarchy


typography rules you need to know indesign hierarchyThis isn’t as frightening as it sounds. Establishing a hierarchy in your typography only means that you create an A, B, C order to your type. By making A your largest and boldest header, B your smaller subtitle and C your smallest body text, you can guide the reader’s eye comfortably across the layout. Establishing a hierarchy helps layouts to look less crowded and confusing, even if they contain a lot of text content.

Varying the size, weight (e.g. Bold, Italic) and switching between uppercase and lowercase characters all help to create a hierarchy on your designs. Pulling out sentences in pull-out quotes can also help to draw attention to key items of information.

It may seem obvious, but keep in mind that in English language layouts readers will naturally look to the top-left corner of the page as a starting point, so it often makes sense to place your A heading here.



The post 5 Typography Rules All Designers Should Know appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
8414
How to Export InDesign Documents as PDFs https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/indesign-export-pdf/ Fri, 06 Jul 2018 17:40:02 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=8387 Once you’ve finished creating a document in Adobe InDesign, you’ll want to export it to a more useful format, which then can be printed, emailed or posted online. PDFs (Portable Document Formats) are one of the most commonly used file types for sharing your artwork with others. Here we’ll look at how to export your […]

The post How to Export InDesign Documents as PDFs appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Once you’ve finished creating a document in Adobe InDesign, you’ll want to export it to a more useful format, which then can be printed, emailed or posted online.

PDFs (Portable Document Formats) are one of the most commonly used file types for sharing your artwork with others. Here we’ll look at how to export your InDesign documents as both print-ready and web-ready PDFs.


How to Export Your InDesign Document as a PDF for Print


Whether you’re sending your artwork to a professional printer, local printshop or online to a POD (print on demand) site, it’s likely they will ask for your work to be submitted in PDF format. Here’s how to do it!

Step 1

First make sure you’re completely happy with your InDesign artwork. Perform a Preflight to check for any missing images or errors, and consider running a spellcheck or checking a printed proof before you export.

Step 2

File > Save your InDesign document, before going to File > Export.

export indesign document to pdf

In the Export window that opens, name your file (putting something like ‘to print’ in the title is a good idea) and choose Adobe PDF (Print) from the Save as type/Format drop-down menu.

export indesign document to pdf save window

Click Save.

In the Export to Adobe PDF window that opens choose [Press Quality] from the Adobe PDF Preset menu at the top.

export indesign document to pdf press quality

Click on Marks and Bleeds in the window’s left-hand menu.

If you’re exporting artwork for print, it’s usual practice to include some printer’s marks on your PDF. While some printers won’t require registration marks or color bars, they may prefer it if you did include crop marks and/or bleed marks. Check your printer’s preferences before you export. To include all marks check All Printer’s Marks.

Most printers will also want you to include a bleed on your PDF, which extends the artwork past the edge of the page (trim edge).

To include a bleed in your artwork, check Use Document Bleed Settings to include a pre-defined bleed, or set the width manually.

marks and bleeds export indesign document to pdf

Click Export to generate your press-ready PDF. Great job! You can send this straight off to the printers.

export indesign document to pdf press ready pdf


How to Export Your InDesign Document as a PDF for Online


PDFs are equally adaptable to viewing on digital devices, such as laptops, phones and eReaders. To optimise your artwork for viewing on a screen the export steps are a little different.

Step 1

Go to File > Export. Name the file and choose Adobe PDF (Interactive) from the Save as type/Format menu.

export interactive pdf indesign online viewing save window

Click Save.

In the Export to Interactive PDF window that opens, select the range of pages you’d like to include. If you’ve created a document made up of facing spreads (such as a magazine), you may want to ensure the viewer sees these as Spreads, rather than individual Pages.

export interactive pdf indesign online viewing

Under the Viewing options, you can define how the pages of the PDF are scaled on the screen. Choose Default for automatic sizing, or choose Fit Page to ensure the page fits to the screen size.

export interactive pdf indesign online viewing default

Under Presentation you can also choose Open in Full Screen Mode if you want the reader to have an immersive experience.

export interactive pdf indesign online viewing

Click on Compression in the window’s left-hand menu. For viewing online, set the JPEG Quality to Medium and Resolution (ppi) to 72.

export interactive pdf indesign online viewing image quality

To add a secure login for your PDF, click on Security in the window’s left-hand menu. From here you can set a password to open the document, and/or to restrict printing and editing.

export interactive pdf indesign online viewing password lock

Then hit Export to create your PDF. If you’ve set a password you’ll be prompted to enter this when you export.

export interactive pdf indesign online viewing password lock


The post How to Export InDesign Documents as PDFs appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
8387
How to Create a Botanical Wedding Invite in InDesign https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/wedding-invitation/ Thu, 31 May 2018 14:10:10 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=8331 Romantic botanical styles are one of our favorite wedding stationery trends here at InDesignSkills. But there’s no need to splash out on expensive invites when you can create your own in InDesign, and have them printed cheaply through a POD (print-on-demand) site. So save those precious wedding pennies, and follow this tutorial on how to […]

The post How to Create a Botanical Wedding Invite in InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Romantic botanical styles are one of our favorite wedding stationery trends here at InDesignSkills.

But there’s no need to splash out on expensive invites when you can create your own in InDesign, and have them printed cheaply through a POD (print-on-demand) site.

So save those precious wedding pennies, and follow this tutorial on how to create your own nature-inspired invitations.botanical rustic wedding invite indesign


What You’ll Need to Create Your Invite


To create the design pictured here you’ll need to download the following image and font files:

As well as access to Adobe InDesign you’ll also need to have access to vector software like Adobe Illustrator or Inkscape for editing the olive leaf graphics.


1. How to Set Up Your Invite Document in InDesign


Step 1


Open InDesign and click on Create New (or go to File > New > Document).

Click on Print at the top of the New Document window. Switch the Units to Inches, and set the Width of the page to 5 in and Height to 7 in.

Add a Bleed of 0.125 in, and click Create.botanical rustic wedding invite indesign create new


Step 2


Expand the Layers panel (Window > Layers) and double-click on the Layer 1 name. Rename it as Background and click OK.

Choose New Layer from the panel’s top-right drop-down menu. Name this layer Leaves and click OK. Create two more layers—first, Type Border, and, finally, Type at the top of the sequence.

Lock all layers except Background, which we’ll work on first.botanical rustic wedding invite indesign layers panel


Step 3


Expand the Swatches panel (Window > Color > Swatches) and choose New Color Swatch from the panel’s menu.botanical rustic wedding invite indesign new swatch

Choose New Color Swatch from the panel’s menu. Name the swatch Off-White, and with the Type set to Process and Mode to CMYK, set the levels below to C=4 M=3 Y=5 K=0. Then click Add and Done.

Create a second new swatch, naming it Peach and setting the levels to C=6 M=41 Y=37 K=0.botanical rustic wedding invite indesign new swatch


2. How to Build Up Color on Your Invite


Step 1


Working on the Background layer, take the Rectangle Tool (M) and drag across the page, extending the shape up to the edge of the bleed on all sides.

From the Swatches panel set the Fill of the shape to Off-White.botanical rustic wedding invite indesign new document


Step 2


Lock the Background layer and unlock the Type Border layer.

Use the Rectangle Tool (M) to create a second shape over the top of the first, also with an Off-White Fill.

Make this shape smaller, 3.5 in in Width and 4.5 in in Height, and position centrally on the page.botanical rustic wedding invite indesign rectangle tool


Step 3


With this smaller rectangle selected, go to Object > Effects > Drop Shadow.

Click on the colored square to the right of the Mode menu, and switch the Effect Color to Peach, before clicking OK.

Bring the Opacity of the shadow down to around 25%, increase the Size to 0.625 in and add about 10% Noise. Then click OK to exit the window.botanical rustic wedding invite indesign effect color


Step 4


Create another rectangle shape over the top of this one, making it slightly smaller and leaving a small margin between the two.botanical rustic wedding invite indesign black shape

From the Swatches panel set the Fill of this shape to [None] and the Stroke Color to Peach.

From the Stroke panel (Window > Stroke), increase the Weight of the shape’s edge to 2.25 pt.botanical rustic wedding invite indesign rectangle border


3. How to Format Typography on Your Invite


Step 1


Lock the Type Border layer and unlock the top layer, Type.

Switch to the Type Tool (T) and drag across the border shapes, creating a text frame about a third of the way down.

Type in ‘Name 1’, and from either the top Controls panel or the Character and Paragraph panels (Window > Type & Tables > Character/Paragraph), set the Font to Sen, Size 19 pt, Tracking (letter-spacing) to 300, All Caps and Align Center.botanical rustic wedding invite indesign type tool

Copy and Paste the text frame, to create a copy below, editing the text to read ‘Name 2’.botanical rustic wedding invite indesign type tool


Step 2


Create another text frame between the two names, typing in an ampersand, ‘&’, and setting the Font to Cormorant Garamond, SemiBold Italic, Size 18 pt, Align Center.

From the Swatches panel adjust the Font Color to Peach.botanical rustic wedding invite indesign type tool ampersand


Step 3


Create a text frame above the names, typing in intro text like ‘join us to celebrate / the union of’.

Set the Font to Cormorant Garamond Regular, Size 7 pt, Leading (line-spacing) to 15 pt, Tracking 300 and Align Center.botanical rustic wedding invite indesign type tool

Copy and Paste the text frame a couple of times, positioning these below the names and editing the text to read the date, time and location of the event.

Set another text frame with ‘reception to follow’ at the bottom, set in Cormorant Garamond Italic, Size 8 pt, Tracking 200 and Align Center.botanical rustic wedding invite indesign type tool


Step 4


You can divide up sections of information by setting a text frame between them and setting the Font to Cormorant Garamond Regular and Font Color to Peach.

Go to Window > Type & Tables > Glyphs. Set your Type Tool cursor in the text frame, and identify a bullet glyph from the list of glyphs in the panel. Double-click to insert it into the frame.botanical rustic wedding invite indesign glyphs panelbotanical rustic wedding invite indesign layers panel


4. How to Add a Botanical Touch to Your Invite


Step 1


Open up the olive wreath vector illustration in Adobe Illustrator, or other vector software of your choice.botanical rustic wedding invite indesign olive wreath

Isolate individual leaves and Copy and Paste them into new documents. File > Save As each as it’s own Illustrator or EPS file, with a transparent background.botanical rustic wedding invite indesign olive vector


Step 2


Head back to your InDesign document.

Lock the Type layer and unlock the Leaves layer below. Create a small image frame using the Rectangle Frame Tool (F), over the top-right corner of the type border.

File > Place, choosing one of your individual leaf images and clicking Open. Allow it to fill the frame completely, and scale and rotate to allow it to frame the corner of the rectangle shape nicely.botanical rustic wedding invite indesign olive vector


Step 3


Repeat the process, creating more individual image frames over both the top-right and bottom-left corners of the type border, and placing individual leaf images into each.botanical rustic wedding invite indesign olive vector


5. How to Export Your Finished Invite for Printing


Step 1


Go to File > Export, and choose Adobe PDF (Print) from the Format menu at the bottom of the Export window. Name the file and hit Save.

In the Export Adobe PDF window that opens, choose [Press Quality] from the Adobe PDF Preset menu at the top.botanical rustic wedding invite indesign export pdf


Step 2


Click on Marks and Bleeds in the window’s left-hand menu.

Some print services will prefer you to either include printer’s marks and a bleed, or only to include the bleed, so make sure to check your printer’s preferences beforehand.

Here, I’ve checked both All Printer’s Marks and Use Document Bleed Settingsbotanical rustic wedding invite indesign marks and bleeds

Click Export to create your print-ready file.

And you’re done! Great job! You can send this PDF file straight off for printing.botanical rustic wedding invite indesign press ready pdf

Free template version of this tutorial coming very soon…


Hungry for more InDesign tips and tutorials? Click this way.

 

The post How to Create a Botanical Wedding Invite in InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
8331
What are Widows and Orphans? https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/widows-and-orphans/ Tue, 22 May 2018 15:44:45 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=8307 They might sound a tad Dickensian, but ‘widows’ and ‘orphans’ are actually terms designers use to describe unwanted stray words in typography. Here, we’ll look at what widows and orphans are, and share some quick and easy tips for banishing them from your typesetting. What is a widow? A widow is a lone word or […]

The post What are Widows and Orphans? appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
They might sound a tad Dickensian, but ‘widows’ and ‘orphans’ are actually terms designers use to describe unwanted stray words in typography.

Here, we’ll look at what widows and orphans are, and share some quick and easy tips for banishing them from your typesetting.


What is a widow?


widow orphan typography solutions

A widow is a lone word or short group of words that appears at the bottom of a paragraph, column or page.

They tend to make long sections of text look unbalanced and messy, as well as leaving too much excess white space at the end of a page.

widow orphan typography solutions

What is an orphan?


widow orphan typography solutions

An orphan is a similar unwanted straggler, but this describes words that appear at the top of a page.

Orphans really belong on the previous page, as not only do they look untidy on the page they appear, but they also break the flow of reading across two pages.

widow orphan typography solutions

OK, got it. Now how do I get rid of them?


There are three quick and easy solutions to banishing both widows and orphans, leaving your typography beautiful and neat.

The directions below are descibed for InDesign users, but you can observe the same general processes whichever design software you’re using.


Solution #1: Slightly extend the edge of your text frame


It’s amazing how even extending the side of your text frame just a millimeter or two can tidy up those widows and orphans, and it’s barely noticeable that the frame is larger than others around it.

In InDesign, take the Selection Tool (V, Escape) and pull the right or left edge of your text frame slightly, extending it until the orphan or widow is pulled into the main body of the paragraph.

widow orphan typography solutions

Solution #2: Apply optical margin alignment to your text


Optical margin alignment is a method of shifting small text elements like commas, apostrophes and serifs to sit outside the edge of the text frame. As well as being a great way of making your paragraphs look generally more symmetrical and attractive, it’s also a nifty way of helping to get widows and orphans in line.

In InDesign, go to Window > Type & Tables > Story.

With the text frame selected or your Type Tool (T) cursor set in the paragraph, check the Optical Margin Alignment box. You’ll notice a subtle shift across some of the text. If your widow or orphan is a short word this can be enough to make them toe the line.

widow orphan typography solutions

Solution #3: Apply tracking or kerning to the text


Some designers would argue that reducing tracking (letter-spacing across a group of words or a paragraph) is the lazy solution to banishing widows and orphans, but in some situations it’s simply necessary.

If you’re dealing with only a tiny word that is stubbornly resistant, reducing kerning (letter-spacing between individual letters) slightly between either some of the letters of the word, the preceeding word or in the space between the two final words of the paragraph is a more elegant solution.

In InDesign, use the Type Tool (T) to highlight the whole paragraph, the final sentence or the final few words of the paragraph. From either the Controls panel running along the top of the workspace or the Character panel (Window > Type & Tables > Character), reduce the Tracking (symbolised by a VA on top of an arrow) to -5 initially. Reduce the Tracking further to -10 etc, until you’re happy with the result.

widow orphan typography solutions

To adjust Kerning, place your type cursor between the two letters you’d like to draw slightly together, then look for the V/A symbol in the Controls or Character panel. Adjust to -5, and repeat between other letters until the widow or orphan is pulled onto the previous line.


   

The post What are Widows and Orphans? appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
8307
Quick Tip: How to Fix Overset Text in InDesign https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/fix-overset-text/ Wed, 14 Mar 2018 09:34:22 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=7936 If you’re seeing a little ‘+’ symbol at the bottom of a text frame, or getting an error warning when you come to export your InDesign file, you may need to fix an overset text problem. Here, we’ll look at some quick and effective tips for fixing overset text, making your documents error-free in no […]

The post Quick Tip: How to Fix Overset Text in InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
If you’re seeing a little ‘+’ symbol at the bottom of a text frame, or getting an error warning when you come to export your InDesign file, you may need to fix an overset text problem.

Here, we’ll look at some quick and effective tips for fixing overset text, making your documents error-free in no time.


1. I have an error, is it overset text?


The problem: “I have a red ‘error’ flagged up; but how do I know it’s overset text?”
The solution: Identify the root cause in the Preflight panel

You may have noticed a small red circle at the bottom-left of the InDesign workspace, next to ‘x errors’ text. When you go to File > Export an InDesign document, InDesign will also alert you at this point if there are any errors in your document that require attention before exporting.overset text indesign solutions get rid of excess text preflight error

Errors come in various forms—from missing font files to missing image links—but one of the most common errors you will come across is overset text.

Usually, this is because you’ve been happily occupied tweaking font sizes and leading, without realising that a couple of lines of text have slipped beyond the edge of the final text frame. In more extreme cases, you could have pages of unwanted overset text brought in from a placed Word file, or simply a case of Edit > Paste clicked one too many times.

But there’s no need for tears. Overset text is easy to fix. It all starts with identifying it as the problem in the first place.

Click on the red ‘error’ circle at the bottom of the workspace to open the Preflight panel (or go to Window > Output > Preflight).

In the panel that opens, you’ll be able to see areas of errors capitalised, in the case of overset text this will be ‘TEXT’. Click on the arrow symbol to the left of ‘TEXT’ to expand the error.

Expanding each ‘Overset text’ in turn will reveal the source of the error, i.e. ‘Text Frame’, with a page reference highlighted in blue to the right.

Click on the page number to bring up the culprit on screen.overset text indesign solutions get rid of excess text preflight error

Now we’ve located the overset text, you can fix it quickly and easily. Read on to find out how…


2. How to find the overset text


The problem: “I can’t see the overset text!”
The solution: View ‘invisible’ overset text

Sometimes it’s difficult to know whether you’re dealing with a single paragraph of overset text or several pages.

To make the overset text visible, place your cursor in the text frame and go to Edit > Edit in Story Editor.overset text indesign solutions get rid of excess text story editor

And voila! All the overset text is marked by a red line.overset text indesign solutions get rid of excess text story editor

From here, you can edit the overset text, highlight it, Copy or Cut it, or Delete it.overset text indesign solutions get rid of excess text story editor


3. How to fix overset text


The problem: “I can’t get rid of all this excess text”
The solution: Ctrl+Shift+End

Manually highlighting text in the Story Editor and deleting it from here is a good solution for removing small amounts of overset text. But what if you’re dealing with pages upon pages of unwanted text?

This is where a simple keyboard shortcut comes in handy. First, place your text cursor at the end of the text you want to keep. Then:

(Windows) Ctrl + Shift + End to select all overset text, then hit Delete to remove it

(Mac) Cmd + Shift + fn + Right-arrow to select all overset text, then hit Delete to remove it

Problem sorted! Now you can get on with exporting your document, and generally get on with your day.


Want more InDesign quick tips? These quick and simple tutorials will turn you into an InDesign pro in no time.

The post Quick Tip: How to Fix Overset Text in InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
7936
Quick Tip: How to Use Baseline Grids in InDesign https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/baseline-grid-indesign/ Fri, 02 Mar 2018 09:40:40 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=7924 Remember that pleasing feeling of writing on lined paper back at school? InDesign’s baseline grid function helps you to replicate just that, allowing you to space text evenly across your whole document. Baseline grids are super simple to use and instantly make layouts look ultra-professional. Let’s look at how to activate them and snap text […]

The post Quick Tip: How to Use Baseline Grids in InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Remember that pleasing feeling of writing on lined paper back at school? InDesign’s baseline grid function helps you to replicate just that, allowing you to space text evenly across your whole document.

Baseline grids are super simple to use and instantly make layouts look ultra-professional. Let’s look at how to activate them and snap text to the grid lines.


Why Do I Need to Use a Baseline Grid?


A baseline grid is a grid of horizontal lines that are evenly spaced across your document. Without the grid visible it can be tricky to make your text perfectly aline across your document.

baseline grid indesign align text snap to grid leading

A baseline grid is particularly handy for multi-column or spread-based layouts, like magazines, flyers or EPUBs, where you have multiple text frames lined up next to each other. Overall, it promotes a more uniform, professional look across your InDesign documents, so it’s well worth doing.


How to View the Baseline Grid in InDesign


Before making the baseline grid visible you can edit its settings by going to Edit > Preferences > Grids (Windows) or InDesign > Preferences > Grids (Mac).

baseline grid indesign align text snap to grid leading preferences

From here, you can adjust where the grid starts on the page (from the Relative To menu you can select whether you’d like the grid to start from the top of the page or the top margin), and how far apart you want the lines to be spaced (measured in pt; you can set this to match your desired Leading setting).

baseline grid indesign align text snap to grid leading

With your preferences defined, go to View > Grids & Guides > Show Baseline Grid.

baseline grid indesign align text snap to grid leading

The grid will now be visible on all pages of your document. If it doesn’t appear initially, you may need to zoom into the page to make it visible.


How to Snap Text to the Baseline Grid in InDesign


Open up the Paragraph panel (Window > Type & Tables > Paragraph).

To snap text to the grid either place your Type Tool (T) cursor into one of the text frames or highlight all the text you’d like to apply the action to.

baseline grid indesign align text snap to grid leading

Then click on the Align to Baseline Grid button at the bottom-right corner of the Paragraph panel. All the lines of text will snap into place, aligning perfectly with each other.

baseline grid indesign align text snap to grid leading

If you save your formatted text as a Style (Window > Styles > Paragraph Styles), the same baseline grid alignment settings will apply to all text you go on to apply that style to. This is really useful if your document is very long.


Want more InDesign quick tips? These quick and simple tutorials will turn you into an InDesign pro in no time.

The post Quick Tip: How to Use Baseline Grids in InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
7924
The Quick-Start Guide to Graphic Design https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/become-graphic-designer/ Tue, 20 Feb 2018 17:04:25 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=7890 Is it your dream to become a graphic designer? If you have an eye for design and a flair for technology this creative field might be a great fit for you. But how to get started? Here we look at eight quick-start tips for beginning a new career in graphic design. You’ll also find our […]

The post The Quick-Start Guide to Graphic Design appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Is it your dream to become a graphic designer? If you have an eye for design and a flair for technology this creative field might be a great fit for you.

But how to get started? Here we look at eight quick-start tips for beginning a new career in graphic design. You’ll also find our edit of the best beginner tutorials and sources of inspiration to get you started on the right footing.


1. Start With the Basics


To become a graphic designer you need to know how to use computers to create layouts for both print and online. However, it can be difficult to know which software to invest in, given that there are tons of options available.

Although there are some good free alternatives available, most professional designers will use Adobe software. The core trio is Adobe InDesign, Adobe Photoshop and Adobe Illustrator.

InDesign is a publishing program, tailored for creating layouts and multi-page documents, such as posters, magazines and flyers. Designers use Photoshop to edit photos or largely raster image-based layouts. Illustrator is used to create vector graphics, such as illustrations and logos.

You can learn more about the difference between design programs, and how to make the best choice for your own needs here.adobe creative suite indesign

You’ll find that designers’ preferences for software vary, but generally each designer has their own favorite program which they use on a daily basis. For most print designers, this will be InDesign, which is perfectly suited for print work. Digital designers might also use InDesign, but they may prefer the arguably more digital-friendly capabilities of Photoshop or Illustrator.

The interfaces of InDesign and other design-specialist software can seem a little intimidating at first, but once you know a little more about the basics—such as tools and panels—it’s easy to get the ball running.

Learn how to get started with InDesign here.

Still not sure where to make a start?

Make sure to check out these InDesign beginner’s tutorials to get a flavor of the software. dobe creative suite indesign


2. Fall in Love With Typography


Typography, which describes how type is formatted and arranged on a layout, is an essential building block of graphic design. Every designer has their own fondness for typography, which in some runs to obsession.

With a little know-how, it won’t be long before you too develop a deep and meaningful attachment to all things type. Once you start animatedly telling your friends what the difference between a sans serif and a serif is, you know you’ve been bitten by the bug.

Get started with this helpful guide to formatting type in InDesign, which covers all the basics.

When you’re ready to dive in a little deeper, you can find a range of typography-centric tips and tutorials here.

Soon, you’ll want to develop your typography skills further with more specific training, like this tutorial on how to create simple and more complex drop caps.typography beginners design drop cap tips


3. Become a Master of Working With Images


Images bring an immersive quality to your designs, and can provide inspiration for the typefaces and colors you want to use on your layout.

To get started with using images in your designs, you need to know how to make them work for you. You can edit images using Photoshop but you don’t need to be a Photoshop whizz to get started with using images in your designs. You can place, size and rotate images within InDesign directly, allowing you to use photos in your layouts instantly.

Here you’ll find a beginner’s guide to using images in your InDesign layouts.

magazine spread photo

Some kinds of layout really allow you to make photography a key part of your design. Magazines are a great place to start honing your image layout skills.

Check out this trio of tutorials on how to incorporate photos into magazine spreads in new and interesting ways.

Vector graphics also play a significant role in graphic design. Vector illustrations can take the place of photos, and vector graphics, like logos and shapes, can bring scalable impact to your designs.

Dip a toe into vector with this introduction to creating shapes and illustrations in InDesign.

vector illustration shapes indesign tree


4. Understand Color


Type, graphics and color make up the holy trinity of graphic design. You can use these three elements as a foundation for creating any layout.

Color defines the mood and personality of a layout. It’s important to not only develop a good understanding of how colors complement or clash with one another, but also how to set up color on your designs at a technical level too.

This beginner’s guide to color spells out the difference between RGB and CMYK color, as well as advice for using Spot and Pantone colors.

Adobe’s handy Adobe Color CC app allows you to experiment with color combinations and create unique palettes from photos, which you can use directly in InDesign.toucan adobe color


5. Learn How to Prepare for Print…


Even if you’re set on digital design, it’s important to have a solid foundation of print design skills. Why? Understanding print design basics will teach you key techniques you can carry forward into digital work, such as how to craft beautiful layouts and how to work with grids.

If you ever want to be able to create print work, such as stationery, signage or publications, it’s essential that you take a little time to read about how to prepare documents correctly for print, such as including bleeds and setting up color spaces correctly.

This indispensable guide shows you how to prepare your designs for print faultlessly every time.cmyk color


6. …and For Online, Too


Print and digital design share common traits, but generally designers choose to specialise in one or the other. Where print design is in some ways very traditional (which is both its charm and its curse), digital design is ever-changing and exciting.

If you want to dip a toe into the world of digital, learning how to create simple designs for online use is a good place to start.

Learn how to create your own eBooks and eMagazines with this EPUB tutorial.epub ebook

Or source digital inspiration from our edit of the best email marketing examples.monki email marketing


7. Become a Specialist in one area


Most designers get a sense of whether their strengths and interests lie more with print or digital design, but within these broader disciplines you can also choose to specialise further.

Within print design, for example, you will find designers who focus on branding, book design or typography.

Get started with book design, with this tutorial on how to create a book cover.book cover layout indesign

Within the expanding field of digital, many designers choose to specialise in app, website, EPUB or UX design.


8. Keep Inspired!


No graphic designer can flourish in a vacuum, and seeking inspiration by looking at the work of others is an incredibly important part of your development as a designer.

Keep your motivation up and your creative juices flowing by looking at our round-up of the best design inspiration.

Balancing trend-driven design with your own style is the key to creating designs that feel fresh and unique.

Make sure to keep abreast of the latest trends across the graphic design world by clicking here.de 36 fragorna packaging inspiration

De 36 frågorna packaging by Martin Ohlsson

The post The Quick-Start Guide to Graphic Design appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
7890
Quick and Easy Decorative Lettering in InDesign https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/vintage-text-effect-indesign/ Fri, 01 Dec 2017 16:27:04 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=7681 Taking inspiration from retro and circus-style lettering, these decorative drop caps would make beautiful additions to layouts or as stand-alone designs. While they may look elaborate, these text effects don’t take long to put together using Adobe InDesign. This method also keeps the text editable, so you can quickly and easily change the letter while […]

The post Quick and Easy Decorative Lettering in InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Taking inspiration from retro and circus-style lettering, these decorative drop caps would make beautiful additions to layouts or as stand-alone designs.

While they may look elaborate, these text effects don’t take long to put together using Adobe InDesign. This method also keeps the text editable, so you can quickly and easily change the letter while preserving colors and effects.

Ready to get started? Let’s dive in…


What You’ll Need to Create Your Decorative Letter


All you need is access to Adobe InDesign and a font of your choice.

Serif fonts with a more traditional style tend to work best with this vintage-inspired look. For the lettering designs pictured here, I’ve used Didot (Bold) and Mr Darcy (Regular).

Here’s what we’ll be creating*.

*You can adapt the design to a letter of your choice; simply follow the same steps below, tweaking details to suit your letter choice.


Step 1


Open up InDesign and go to File > New > Document.

Create a new document to any size you prefer. Here, I’ll be working on an A3 single page. Click OK to create your document.decorative typography indesign hand-lettering vintage circus type effect text effect


Step 2


Begin by using the Type Tool (T) to create a large text frame in the center of the page.

Type in your letter, here ‘C’, and set the Font to your chosen style (here, Didot Bold) from either the Controls panel running along the top of the workspace or the Character panel (Window > Type & Tables > Character).

Make sure the Font Size is generous, here I’ve increased it to 600 pt*.

*If you want to incorporate your letter into another design, you can later vectorize your letter by going to Type > Create Outlines, and scale the whole design more easily.decorative typography indesign hand-lettering vintage circus type effect text effect didot


Step 3


You’ll need a palette of four color swatches to create your decorative letter. For this particular design, I’m going to use four of the default colors already provided in the Swatches panel.

But if you’d like to use different colors for your design, you can create new swatches by selecting New Color Swatch from the Swatches panel (Window > Color > Swatches).decorative typography indesign hand-lettering vintage circus type effect text effect swatches


Step 4


Select the letter by highlighting it with your Type Tool cursor, or use the Selection Tool (V, Escape) to select the text frame. Head up to Object > Effects Inner Glow. This will add an inner color to your letter.

Click on the colored square to the right of the mode menu at the top of the window that opens. From here, you can choose one of your color swatches to apply to the glow. Here I’ve gone for red.

Back in the Effects window, under the Options section below, set the Technique to Precise, Source to Center, Choke to 100% and Noise to 20%. You can tweak the Size of the glow depending on the size of your text.decorative typography indesign hand-lettering vintage circus type effect text effect inner glowdecorative typography indesign hand-lettering vintage circus type effect text effect didot


Step 5


Click on the Drop Shadow option at the top of the Effects window’s left-hand menu. This will add a colored shadow to the outside of your letter.

Choose a contrasting color for the Effect Color. Here I’ve gone for cyan.

Tweak the Distance, Angle and Size until you’re happy with the position of the shadow. Increase the Spread to 100% and add about 10% Noise.decorative typography indesign hand-lettering vintage circus type effect text effect effectsdecorative typography indesign hand-lettering vintage circus type effect text effect drop shadow


Step 6


Click on Outer Glow in the Effects window menu. This will add a highlight shadow to the outside of your letter.

Adjust the Mode to Normal, and you can either keep the Effect Color set to the default [Paper] (white) swatch, or choose a different contrasting swatch.

Add about 20% Noise and increase the Spread to 100%, before clicking OK to exit the window.decorative typography indesign hand-lettering vintage circus type effect text effect effectsdecorative typography indesign hand-lettering vintage circus type effect text effect didot


Step 7


You can add extra decorative elements to your letter by using the drawing tools in InDesign’s Tools panel, which is docked to the left-hand side of the workspace.

Use the Pen Tool (P) to create curved elements, holding down your cursor to create curved lines, and allowing the shape of the letter to guide the design.decorative typography indesign hand-lettering vintage circus type effect text effect drawing

To tweak the shape of your drawing, use the Smooth Tool to smooth out kinks, and the Direct Selection Tool (A) to directly select anchor points and adjust their position.decorative typography indesign hand-lettering vintage circus type effect text effect pen tool drawingdecorative typography indesign hand-lettering vintage circus type effect text effect pen tool drawing smooth tool


Step 8


You can combine shapes to create decorative elements. Here, I’ve used the Ellipse Tool (L) to draw a circle over the top of the letter, meeting the curved line I’ve already created, creating a simple tear shape where the two shapes meet.decorative typography indesign hand-lettering vintage circus type effect text effect circle ellipse tool

Use the Scissors Tool (C) to cut away unwanted parts of shapes…decorative typography indesign hand-lettering vintage circus type effect text effect shapes drawing

…and go to Object > Paths > Join to unite shapes.decorative typography indesign hand-lettering vintage circus type effect text effect paths join


Step 9


Give your shape a contrasting Fill Color (here, cyan) from the Swatches panel.decorative typography indesign hand-lettering vintage circus type effect text effect swatches cyan

Go to Object > Effects > Inner Glow to add an inner color to the shape. As before, set the Choke to 100%, and Source to Center. Tweak the other options until you’re happy with the effect.decorative typography indesign hand-lettering vintage circus type effect text effect inner glow


Step 10


You can Edit > Copy, Edit > Paste shapes and flip or rotate them by Right-Clicking > Transform.decorative typography indesign hand-lettering vintage circus type effect text effect flip verticaldecorative typography indesign hand-lettering vintage circus type effect text effect decoration shapes

You can also use the Ellipse Tool (L) to create quick and easy polka dot decorations for your design.decorative typography indesign hand-lettering vintage circus type effect text effect circle ellipse tool polka dots


Step 11


Your decorative letter is finished! Great job!decorative typography indesign hand-lettering vintage circus type effect text effect

You can easily change the letter and preserve the colors and effects by typing in a different letter into the text frame. All you have to do is adjust the decorative elements on top to complete the effect.

Here are a few other letter designs I created using the same technique.

This ‘S’ uses a bold color combination of cream, mustard, pink and green. The Font used is Mr Darcy Regular. I’ve used the Pen Tool (P) to create arrow embellishments, and the Ellipse Tool (L) to create a polka dot effect.decorative typography indesign hand-lettering vintage circus type effect text effect

This ‘E’ is set in Didot, with a color palette of cream, orange, pink and white. I created the inner stripe on the design using the Rectangle Tool (M).decorative typography indesign hand-lettering vintage circus type effect text effect


Next in this series


Looking for more typography tips? These quick and simple tutorials will turn you into a typography pro in no time.

The post Quick and Easy Decorative Lettering in InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
7681
The Beginner’s Guide to Kerning https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/kerning/ Thu, 09 Nov 2017 12:10:03 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=7569 Find out more about kerning, including what exactly kerning is and how you can apply kerning in your own design work. What is Kerning? Kerning is the process of increasing or decreasing the space between individual characters, adjusting the position of letters in relation to others. It’s commonly used on prominent pieces of text, such […]

The post The Beginner’s Guide to Kerning appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Find out more about kerning, including what exactly kerning is and how you can apply kerning in your own design work.

What is Kerning?


Kerning is the process of increasing or decreasing the space between individual characters, adjusting the position of letters in relation to others. It’s commonly used on prominent pieces of text, such as headlines and logos. Note that tracking, on the other hand, is used to adjust the letter-spacing uniformly over a range of characters (read more about tracking). what is kerning beginners typography letter-spacing how to indesign


Why Do Designers Use Kerning?


Although the process of tweaking kerning may be very subtle, it can have significant effects on the legibility and overall presentation of text.

Designers kern letters to improve the overall symmetry of a word or phrase, which the default tracking settings provided in the font file may not be able to achieve alone.what is kerning beginners typography letter-spacing how to indesign

As well as having an instant beautifying effect on text, kerning can also have an effect on the readability of the text. When done well, words just read better.

However, a note of caution! There are many infamous examples on the web of kerning gone wrong, when poorly kerned letters have formed unintended or, in some cases, downright rude, words.


How Do I Apply Kerning?


In InDesign, you can adjust kerning from either the Controls panel running along the top of the workspace or the Character panel (Window > Type & Tables > Character).

Select the Type Tool (T), click your cursor to the left or right side of a letter, and increase or decrease the kerning (which is measured in thousandths of an em) by choosing from the default options (which jumps in sequences of 5’s, 10’s, 25’s and 100’s) or typing in a number.what is kerning beginners typography letter-spacing how to indesign


Pro Tips


Observe these top tips whenever you kern to keep your text looking as professional as possible.

  • Certain letters require more kerning attention than others. Slanted letters like W, V, K and A tend to sit too far away from other letters when kept to their default spacing. Letters with arms or large serifs, such as T, L and K may suffer from the opposite problem, tending to sit too close to other letters, creating an overcrowded effect. So make sure to comb your designs for these problem letters.
  • Flipping your text upside down (or click on a page in the Pages panel, and Right-Click > Page Attributes > Rotate Spread View > 180°) before you kern is an age-old tip beloved of typographers. This allows you to asses the spacing between letters on a purely visual level, without being distracted by the meaning of the word. It’s an eccentric tip that works surprisingly well.

Want more typography tips? These quick and simple tutorials will turn you into a typography pro in no time.

The post The Beginner’s Guide to Kerning appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
7569
The Beginner’s Guide to Tracking https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/letter-spacing-tracking-typography/ Thu, 09 Nov 2017 11:58:44 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=7576 In our typography breakdown series, we look at some of the key techniques which have the ability to transform lacklustre text into jaw-dropping typography. Here, we’re going to find out more about letter-spacing or Tracking, including what it is and how you can adjust letter-spacing to improve your own design work. What is letter-spacing / […]

The post The Beginner’s Guide to Tracking appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
In our typography breakdown series, we look at some of the key techniques which have the ability to transform lacklustre text into jaw-dropping typography.

Here, we’re going to find out more about letter-spacing or Tracking, including what it is and how you can adjust letter-spacing to improve your own design work.


What is letter-spacing / Tracking?


Tracking is the typographer’s term for letter-spacing. Sometimes confused with kerning (which is used to adjust spacing between individual letters), tracking adjusts the letter-spacing uniformly over a range of characters.

Tracking affects the visual density of a word, phrase or paragraph. Decreasing the tracking makes the words appear more compact, while increasing tracking increases the amount of white space between letters and words, creating a more airy effect.what is tracking beginners typography letter-spacing how to indesign


Why Do Designers Use Tracking?


Designers apply tracking for two main reasons:

  • Firstly, when tracking is increased it can improve the readability of text. Letters and words are more visually distinguished from each other, allowing the eye to process them more easily than if characters were pushed closely together.
  • Many designers apply tracking to improve the look of typeset text. Increasing or decreasing tracking has the power to reduce the amount of hyphenation in a paragraph, and banish widows (lone words at the end of a paragraph) and orphans (lone words at the top of a page, which should belong on the previous page).

what is tracking beginners typography letter-spacing how to indesign

In the second image the tracking has been reduced. This pushes all the letters closer together, causing the same number of words to fit onto less lines (which removes the widow ‘eat’).


How Do I Apply Tracking?


In InDesign, you can adjust kerning from either the Controls panel running along the top of the workspace or the Character panel (Window > Type & Tables > Character).

Use your Type Tool (T) cursor to either highlight the text or use the Selection Tool (V, Escape) to select the whole text frame*.

The tracking option is indicated by an ‘A V’ symbol with an arrow sitting below, and is found alongside the other most commonly used text formatting options in the Controls or Character panel. Measured in thousandths of an em, you can either choose a positive (to increase the spacing) or negative (to decrease) value from the drop-down menu, or type in a numeric value in the text box.

*For a linked sequence of text frames selecting the first text frame will apply the tracking settings to the text flowing across all the frames.what is tracking beginners typography letter-spacing how to indesign


Pro Tips


Tracking may be simple to do, but professional designers still have a few tricks up their sleeve for making the most of this type technique.

  • Tracking may be a quick-fix for line-spacing, but combining tracking with kerning will really lift your typography to a professional standard. As tracking affects the spacing between all characters, it won’t take into account specific spacing requirements between particular letters. So make sure to combine these two techniques for maximum effect.
  • Tracking goes hand-in-hand with leading, which is the space between lines of text. Generous tracking requires generous leading; otherwise you may end up with paragraphs that appear stretched horizontally and look disproportionate.
  • Sometimes it just doesn’t look right to apply negative tracking to your text, which can make paragraphs appear squashed. If this is the case but you still have widows or orphans ruining the look of your typesetting, apply optical margin alignment to try to shift outlying elements, like serifs and apostrophes, to the outside of your text frames, giving yourself a little more breathing room. Go to Window > Type & Tables > Story and check Optical Margin Alignment.

Want more typography tips? These quick and simple tutorials will turn you into a typography pro in no time.

The post The Beginner’s Guide to Tracking appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
7576
The Beginner’s Guide to Leading https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/leading-typography/ Fri, 03 Nov 2017 16:31:34 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=7558 In our typography breakdown series, we look at some of the key techniques which have the ability to transform lacklustre text into jaw-dropping typography. Here, we’re going to find out more about leading (or line spacing), including what it is and how you can apply it in your own design work. What is Leading? The […]

The post The Beginner’s Guide to Leading appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
In our typography breakdown series, we look at some of the key techniques which have the ability to transform lacklustre text into jaw-dropping typography.

Here, we’re going to find out more about leading (or line spacing), including what it is and how you can apply it in your own design work.


What is Leading?


The definition of leading is: the distance between two baselines of lines of type. The word ‘leading’ originates from the strips of lead hand-typesetters used to use to space out lines of text evenly. The word leading has stuck, but essentially it’s a typographer’s term for line spacing.what is leading beginners typography line-spacing how to indesign


Why Do Designers Use Leading?


Leading is one of the quickest and simplest tweaks you can do to make your text look instantly better.

If you’re working in design software like InDesign, the program will set a default leading value whenever you type up more than one line of text. However, this is not usually generous enough, and can make paragraphs look squashed. This works fine if you’re creating a crammed front page for a newspaper, but less well for most other purposes.what is leading beginners typography line-spacing how to indesign

Increasing the leading allows the text to breathe and makes it appear instantly more attractive. For readers it has practical advantages too—increasing leading makes text easier to read, and it’s also kinder on reader’s eyes over longer periods of reading.

So if you’re designing a book or magazine layout, increasing your leading will ensure your audience is captive for longer.what is leading beginners typography line-spacing how to indesign


How Do I Apply Leading?


When working in InDesign, once you’ve created a piece of text using the Type Tool (T), you can adjust the leading from either the Controls panel running along the top of the workspace or the Character panel (Window > Type & Tables > Character). To edit the leading across a whole section of text, either highlight the text or click on the text frame to select it.

Leading is always positioned below or next to the Font Size option. Setting the leading to Auto will apply InDesign’s default leading for the font size you currently have applied. You should see this as a minimum value for your leading. Increasing the leading (which is measured in points, pt) will increase the line-spacing across your paragraph.what is leading beginners typography line-spacing how to indesign

To apply a particular leading value to just one line of text (e.g. if you want to separate a paragraph visually from a heading positioned above), highlight the line you want to shift downwards and increase the leading.what is leading beginners typography line-spacing how to indesign


Pro Tips


Leading may seem straightforward enough but designers have all sorts of tricks and tips for making the most of this simple type technique.

  • While generous leading can improve the look of paragraphs, making the leading overly generous can disrupt the flow of the text and impact on legibility. Print out different leading settings before going to print, to make sure you can read the text comfortably.
  • Setting text against a colored or dark background? Apply slightly more generous leading than normal to make the text ultra-clear to read.
  • Different fonts will suit different leading settings, as the x-height (the height of lowercase letters) will vary between fonts. Fonts with shorter x-heights won’t require as much leading as those with taller lowercase letters.

Want more typography tips? These quick and simple tutorials will turn you into a typography pro in no time.

The post The Beginner’s Guide to Leading appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
7558
Drawing Shapes and Illustrations in InDesign https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/drawing-shapes/ Thu, 26 Oct 2017 15:54:56 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=7520 It’s surprisingly quick and easy to create illustrated graphics in InDesign, without the need for dipping into vector software or splashing out on stock images. In this tutorial you’ll learn how to draw shapes and silhouettes in InDesign, and apply stylistic effects, like noise, shadows and gradients, to create a vintage-inspired, screen-printed effect. Suitable for […]

The post Drawing Shapes and Illustrations in InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
It’s surprisingly quick and easy to create illustrated graphics in InDesign, without the need for dipping into vector software or splashing out on stock images.

In this tutorial you’ll learn how to draw shapes and silhouettes in InDesign, and apply stylistic effects, like noise, shadows and gradients, to create a vintage-inspired, screen-printed effect.

Suitable for beginners, this is a handy little introduction to drawing with shapes in InDesign.


Why Draw in InDesign?


InDesign isn’t always the first software option that springs to mind for creating vector graphics, but it’s actually a fantastic choice if you’re looking to create quick illustrations to incorporate into other InDesign layouts, such as flyers, magazines or posters.

InDesign brings together the best of both worlds for illustration—a set of vector drawing tools you would normally find in Illustrator as well as the advanced effects you would usually only be able to apply in Photoshop.

Geometric shapes, simple silhouettes, logo designs and patterns are all easily achievable with the tools available to you in InDesign. You’ll also end up with a vector (not raster) graphic, which means you can scale your design as you wish without compromising on quality.

Here, we’ll work towards creating this winter tree illustration, to demonstrate a range of handy drawing techniques. You can apply the same techniques and principles to your own designs—the only limitation is your imagination!how to draw shapes illustrations in indesign final christmas winter tree

Ready to get drawing? Awesome, let’s go!


1. How to Draw a Shape


Step 1

Open up InDesign and go to File > New > Document, creating a document at any size you wish. If you’re creating your illustration for print media (e.g. flyers, stationery etc) set the Intent to Print. Want to create a design for social media or attaching to an email? Choose Web instead.

With the document created, you’ll need to get familiar with the Tools panel to create your illustration. This is docked over on the left side of the workspace (or go to Window > Tools).

Even if you’re not using a graphics tablet, using the Pen Tool (P) to create shapes on the page will give you a high level of control. Click onto the page and move around to create your shape, before connecting the silhouette at the first anchor point.how to draw shapes illustrations in indesign pen tool

Step 2

You can switch to the Direct Selection Tool (A) to select individual anchor points and tweak their position.

Once you’ve clicked onto an anchor point (it will switch to white once accurately selected), use your mouse or the arrow keys to shift the position of the anchor point, perfecting your shape.how to draw shapes illustrations in indesign pen tool

Step 3

For illustrations made up of separate lines (i.e. not a complete shape), it’s best to use the Line Tool (\).

Click onto the page once, then twice, to create a single line. To create a completely straight horizontal or vertical line hold down Shift while you drag.

Here I’ve created a single central branch for the tree using the Line Tool, before creating individual branches reaching from the trunk to the outer edge of the tree using the same tool.how to draw shapes illustrations in indesign line tool

I switch to the Direct Selection Tool (A) to select individual anchor points and move them until I’m happy with their position.how to draw shapes illustrations in indesign line tool


2. How to Add Color and Effects


Step 1

Once you have your shape in place it’s time to get creative with color!

If you’re creating a simple logo or icon design you may want to use just one or two colors, but more complex illustrations might benefit from a palette of colors. To create a variety of color swatches to work with, go to the Swatches panel (Window > Color > Swatches) and choose New Color Swatch from the panel’s top-right drop-down menu. Play around with the CMYK (for print) or RGB (for web) percentage levels, before clicking Add and OK to add it to the Swatches panel.

Select the shape you’d like to apply the swatch to and set the Fill to your chosen swatch from the Swatches panel. For larger shapes it almost always looks best if you set the Stroke Color to [None].how to draw shapes illustrations in indesign swatch

Step 2

Now you’re ready to start applying effects to your illustration to bring in texture and depth.

If you have a group of elements you want to apply the same effect to you may find it easier to first Right-Click > Group them together, as I’ve done here with the branches of the tree.how to draw shapes illustrations in indesign group

Then head up to Object on the main menu bar running along the top of the workspace, and choose Effects and then select any option from that menu. Whichever option you click on will open the Effects window. From here you can apply all sorts of effects to your design, such as shadowing, gradients and glows.

Below you’ll find highlighted some of the effects which I think have the potential to bring out the best in your illustrations…

Drop Shadow

Adding a shadow to your graphics can give the design more depth and body.

Apply the effect subtly by adjusting the Effect Color from Black to be a closer match to the background color below (here, I’ve opted for a dark green to complement the tree foliage below). You can also bring down the Opacity and adjust the Distance, Size and Spread to make the shadow more subtle.how to draw shapes illustrations in indesign glow

Step 3

Copying and pasting (Edit > Copy/Paste) certain elements on your design and shifting their position slightly can give your illustrations an authentic screen-printed or letterpress look. Here I’ve pasted a copy of the tree branches to create that effect.how to draw shapes illustrations in indesign paste

In this design I’ve used the Pen Tool (P) to create individual sections of color across the tree.how to draw shapes illustrations in indesign color

Selecting each colored section I can also adjust the transparency settings by once again heading up to Object > Effects and choosing Transparency.

Transparency

Applying a Transparency effect to some or all of your illustration can really help the design to blend together and look more professional.

Choosing Normal from the Mode menu and reducing the Opacity will simply fade the element selected, allowing details from other elements sitting below to become more visible.

Applying an Overlay blending mode is a great way of preserving the impact and color of the element while still making elements below more visible.how to draw shapes illustrations in indesign transparency overlay

Step 4

You can make vector graphics look more hand-drawn by adding grainy texture. The best way to do this is with the Inner Glow option in the Effects window.

Inner Glow

You can apply a glowy, light-up effect to the inside of your shapes by adding Inner Glow, but I tend to use this option for applying grainy noise instead.

To do this, adjust the Mode to Normal, and choose a color that is similar to, but not the same as, the color of the shape you are applying the effect to. Increase the Size and Choke to extend the effect across the whole shape, and then adjust the level of Noise until you are happy with the amount of grain.how to draw shapes illustrations in indesign drop shadow

Step 5

You can also make shapes appear as if they are glowing on the outside, which is a lovely effect for adding a lit-up effect to elements like stars, lightbulbs, suns or moons. Once you’ve created your shape (here, I’ve created a star shape using the Pen Tool), head up again to Object > Effects, and choose Outer Glow.how to draw shapes illustrations in indesign pen tool

Outer Glow

With the Mode set to Screen, adjust the Size and Spread of the effect until you’re happy with the amount of glow around your shape. Adding a little Noise will soften the effect.how to draw shapes illustrations in indesign outer glow


Conclusion: Illustrating Made Easy in InDesign


In this tutorial we’ve looked at a simple three-step process for creating illustrations in InDesign. Let’s take a quick recap:

  • First, use the Pen Tool and shape tools (e.g. Line Tool) in the Tools panel to create simple shapes, lines and silhouettes.
  • Next, create a range of color swatches in the Swatches panel and apply your palette to your drawing.
  • Finally, style your illustration using the options available in InDesign’s Effects window, such as glows, shadows, noise and transparencies.

Hungry for more drawing tutorials? Check out this guide to creating arrow shapes in InDesign, or why not find inspiration for your next InDesign layouts here?

The post Drawing Shapes and Illustrations in InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
7520
The Beginner’s Guide to Font Pairing https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/font-pairing/ Mon, 25 Sep 2017 10:44:28 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=7490 Most layouts look best when at least two fonts are used to set text. Magazine spreads, book pages, flyers, websites and other text-based designs will always benefit from a well-chosen font pairing. But if you’ve never paired fonts before, where to begin? This guide shows you five easy ways* to create a failsafe font combination every […]

The post The Beginner’s Guide to Font Pairing appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Most layouts look best when at least two fonts are used to set text. Magazine spreads, book pages, flyers, websites and other text-based designs will always benefit from a well-chosen font pairing. But if you’ve never paired fonts before, where to begin?

This guide shows you five easy ways* to create a failsafe font combination every time, and suggest appropriate ways to use each font pairing style. Read on to find your font dream team…

* These five font pairings are based on using one font for the headline (the main title on your page) and another font for the body text (the longer paragraphs which make up the bulk of content on your page). If you want to add sub-headings or pull-out quotes setting text in an italic weight is always a wise move, or try using a bold or condensed version of your body text font to add contrast while keeping the typography looking polished.


1. Sans Serif Headline + Serif Body Text


This is the most common font pairing style designers will use when they want to make their typography look instantly more polished and professional. Why does this font pairing work so well? Firstly, the pairing has high contrast, which creates interest and stimulates the eye. Secondly, this pairing feels at once both classic and contemporary, which makes it suitable for all sorts of layouts. Finally, bookish serifs tend to be easy to read, while sans serifs add a more modern, sophisticated flourish, making it a pairing that’s both functional and stylish.

Within this font pairing style, you’ll find that certain sans serifs look better teamed with particular serifs. A good starting point is to decide on a headline sans serif that you really love, and then rotate the serif body text through several options until you find the font that looks just right.

One of our favourite font pairings is headlines set in Bebas Neue, with body text set in Caslon. A sub-heading set in Adobe Caslon Pro Italic adds the perfect finishing touch.font pairing beginners typography font families typeface sans serif serif bebas neue caslon


2. Headline + Body Text Fonts From the Same Font Family


Most fonts belong to a typeface family—a group of fonts which vary in weight (e.g. bold, italic, book etc) but ultimately have the same base design. A family may also include more stylised variations of the original roman weight, such as condensed, outlined and expanded.

Some font families contain as few as three fonts, while others might extend to include dozens of fonts. These larger font families are known as ‘superfamilies’.

Pairing two fonts taken from either the same family or superfamily is a quick route to creating a design that feels pulled-together and elegant. The success of this sort of pairing rests on the shared similarities between the chosen fonts, rather than contrast, which has a calming effect on the eye. For layouts which require a more traditional, formal or conservative style, this sort of font pairing is the perfect choice.

That’s not to say that sourcing two fonts from the same family needs to be dull. In fact the vast range of font styles you can track down within a superfamily can give you plenty of variation, to keep your design looking playful. We love the combination of a Roboto Slab headline with Roboto body text. These fonts have very different weights but share the same rounded-geometric form.font pairing beginners typography font families typeface sans serif serif roboto


3. Headline + Body Text Fonts Which Share the Same Mood


All fonts have a personality, whether it’s the bouncy optimism of a rounded sans serif or the serious conservatism of a traditional serif. Each font brings its own personality to a design, helping to give the whole layout a certain mood or vibe.

Professional typographers call this evasive sense of mood that a group of fonts share a ‘sub-category’. Some serif fonts, such as Bembo and Garamond, fall into the Old Style sub-category, with these fonts tending to have an old-fashioned, dignified personality. These work well paired with Humanist sans serifs like Frutiger and Gill Sans, because these too have an old-fashioned, serious mood.

Here a Garamond headline and sub-heading makes a great team alongside Gill Sans body text.font pairing beginners typography font families typeface sans serif serif

Transitional serifs have a more modern mood than Old Style typefaces, which makes them a suitable pairing for Geometric or Rounded sans serifs, like Futura and Avenir. Here, a headline set in Mrs. Eaves is stylishly offset by Futura body text.font pairing beginners typography font families typeface sans serif serif

Modern serifs, such as Didot and Bodoni, have a classic elegance but feel more fun and fashionable than their Old Style relatives. Because they are more contemporary in style, they team best with Geometric sans serifs.

In this example, Bodoni and Open Sans make for an elegant font pairing.font pairing beginners typography font families typeface sans serif serif


4. Display Headline + Humanist or Transitional Body Text


You don’t always need to rely on blowing your headline up to large size to make an impact. Display or Headline fonts are specially designed to make text really shout for attention. These heavily stylised or chunky display fonts, such as FF Scala and Eczar, look fantastic paired with Humanist or Transitional body text, whether in serif or sans serif styles.

If you’re putting together a more design-forward layout which needs to grab a viewer’s attention, such as a poster or magazine cover, this font pairing won’t fail to turn heads, and it looks super-stylish too.

Here a headline set in Scala Sans Black is the perfect foil to the simple charms of Gentium Basic.font pairing beginners typography font families typeface sans serif serif


5. Round Sans Serif Headline + Old-Style Serif Body Text


Rounded fonts are youthful, and used alone give an almost childlike quality to a design. Pairing a rounded sans serif headline, like Woodford Bourne or Quicksand with more traditional serif body text exaggerates further the contrast that we looked at with the serif/sans serif font pairing at the start of the article.

This is a more space-age version of that pairing rule, giving layouts a futuristic spin that feels clean and cutting-edge. In this example the exaggerated tracking of Quicksand as the headline makes the ultimate contrast with neat and pulled-together Garamond.font pairing beginners typography font families typeface sans serif serif


Still feeling overwhelmed with the sheer choice of fonts on the web? Check out our pick of the best fonts for every purpose and budget.

The post The Beginner’s Guide to Font Pairing appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
7490
Create a Neon Text Effect in InDesign https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/neon-text-effect/ Wed, 19 Jul 2017 11:40:14 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=7390 Who’s got the time to do lengthy typography tutorials? Or the cash to splash on Photoshop actions? Here at InDesignSkills we’re all about making your life easier, while picking up some awesome new design skills along the way. Read on to find out how you can create a light-up neon text effect directly in InDesign in […]

The post Create a Neon Text Effect in InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Who’s got the time to do lengthy typography tutorials? Or the cash to splash on Photoshop actions?

Here at InDesignSkills we’re all about making your life easier, while picking up some awesome new design skills along the way. Read on to find out how you can create a light-up neon text effect directly in InDesign in under 5 minutes.

neon sign text effect glow light-up indesign typography


How to Create a Neon Effect


Light-up neon type is fantastic for adding nighttime glamour or a moody 1980s feel to your designs. This sort of text effect would look great on a poster or event flyer, and it’s so easy to do!

Step 1

I’ve set up the effect pictured here on a landscape A3 page (go to File > New > Document), though of course feel free to adapt the page size to suit your own purposes.

Expand the Layers panel (Window > Layers) and rename Layer 1 as Background. Use the Rectangle Tool (M) to create a shape that extends across the whole of the page.

For the text effect to have impact, you’ll need to give the rectangle a dark fill. Opt for [Black] in the Swatches panel (Window > Color > Swatches), or to recreate the color used here, click on New Color Swatch in the panel’s drop-down menu. Double-click the new swatch to edit it, setting the CMYK values to C=85 M=76 Y=61 K=93.neon sign text effect glow light-up indesign typography swatches

Step 2

In the Swatches panel create a further two new swatches:

Dark Pink – C=10 M=100 Y=0 K=0neon sign text effect glow light-up indesign typography

Pale Pink – C=5 M=12 Y=0 K=0neon sign text effect glow light-up indesign typography

We’ll use these to layer up the dark and light tones of the neon effect. If you want the neon effect to be a different color, say blue, create two swatches in the same way, one dark blue, one pale blue.

Step 3

Head back to the Layers panel and lock the Background layer. Create a new layer above and name it Typography.

Take the Type Tool (T) and create a large text frame in the center of the page. Type in your text, and from either the Controls panel at the top of the workspace or the Character panel (Window > Type & Tables > Character), choose your preferred Font. To create a more authentic neon sign effect, I’ve gone for a script font, Burtons Script.

From the Swatches panel, set the Font Color to Dark Pink. Once you’re happy with the size, position, font and color of the text, you’re ready to outline the text. Note that this means you won’t be able to adjust the formatting of the text, so Edit > Copy, Edit > Paste the text frame, moving the copy over to the pasteboard to preserve a copy of your text if you like.neon sign text effect glow light-up indesign typography

Step 4

Select the original text frame and go to Type > Create Outlines, to vectorize the text.neon sign text effect glow light-up indesign typography

Edit > Copy, Edit > Paste the vector, moving the copy over to the pasteboard. We’ll be using this a little later.

With the vector selected, go to Object > Effects > Outer Glow. Set the Mode to Screen, Opacity to about 20%, Noise to 3% and Spread to 70%. Click on the colored square to the right of the Mode menu to open the Effect Color window. Choose Dark Pink from your list of Swatches.

Click OK to exit the Effects window.neon sign text effect glow light-up indesign typography

Step 5

Select the vector and Edit > Copy, Edit > Paste in Place, layering it directly over the first vector.

Go to Object > Effects > Outer Glow and increase the Opacity to 80% and bring the Spread down to about 40%.neon sign text effect glow light-up indesign typography effectsneon sign text effect glow light-up indesign typography

Step 6

You can now start to build up the lighter tones in your neon effect.

Head over to the pasteboard and select the vectorized version of the text you pasted over there back in Step 4. Select it and Edit > Copy it, moving the copy over onto the page and positioning it directly over the top of the other text vectors.

Adjust the Fill of this new vector to Pale Pink.neon sign text effect glow light-up indesign typography

Then head up to Object > Effects > Transparency. Set the Mode to Screen and pull the Opacity down to 70%.neon sign text effect glow light-up indesign typography effects

Click on Outer Glow in the window’s left-hand menu and set the Mode to Screen and Opacity to about 65%. Choose Pale Pink for the Effect Color.neon sign text effect glow light-up indesign typography effects

Click on Drop Shadow at the top of the window’s menu and set the Mode to Multiply, Opacity to about 40% and the Effect Color to Dark Pink.neon sign text effect glow light-up indesign typography

Add a final effect to this vector by clicking on Gradient Feather at the bottom of the window’s menu. Choose Radial for the Type, and then click OK to exit the Effects window.neon sign text effect glow light-up indesign typography gradientneon sign text effect glow light-up indesign typography

Step 7

To make the neon effect really pop, we can add a final layer of light over the top of the text effect.

To do this go to Edit > Paste to drop another copy of the vectorized text onto the page. Position directly over the top of the other vectors, and adjust the Fill to Pale Pink.neon sign text effect glow light-up indesign typography

Go to Object > Effects > Transparency, and set the Mode to Screen and Opacity to 50%.neon sign text effect glow light-up indesign typography transparency

Click on Outer Glow and choose Screen for the Mode and Pale Pink for the Effect Color. Reduce the Opacity to about 50%, and increase the Spread to 40%. Click OK to exit the window.neon sign text effect glow light-up indesign typography

And you’re done! This cool neon text effect will really make your designs pop—why not try using it on a gig or club flyer for extra impact?

neon sign text effect glow light-up indesign typography


Want to pick up some new typography skills? Browse beginner tutorials to find simple tips and tricks to make your type designs look super professional.

The post Create a Neon Text Effect in InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
7390
5 Essential Tools for InDesign Beginners https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/5-indesign-beginner-tools/ Wed, 28 Jun 2017 07:53:04 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=7102 Opening up Adobe InDesign for the first time? As a complete beginner the interface can seem a little intimidating, but you can get started creating amazing designs straight-away using just these five versatile tools. You’ll find all of these beginner-friendly tools in the Tools panel, which is docked to the left-hand side of the InDesign […]

The post 5 Essential Tools for InDesign Beginners appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Opening up Adobe InDesign for the first time? As a complete beginner the interface can seem a little intimidating, but you can get started creating amazing designs straight-away using just these five versatile tools.

You’ll find all of these beginner-friendly tools in the Tools panel, which is docked to the left-hand side of the InDesign workspace.

Image used throughout: Shutterstock


1. The Selection Tools


Top beginner tool number one – the Selection Tool (Shortcut: V, Escape), which is the tool activated by default when you first open up InDesign. You can find it at the very top of the Tools panel. Use this tool to, you guessed it, select things! This is your go-to tool for when you want to move or scale items. Grab text frames, image frames and shapes with this tool to move them elsewhere, or click and drag corners of objects to adjust size.

Top tip: Hold down Shift while using this tool to keep the proportions of an element fixed.indesign tools for beginners get started selection tool type tool page tool shape tools image frame tools

Next is the Direct Selection Tool (Shortcut: A), which is the white arrow sitting below the Selection Tool on the panel, is better suited to adjusting the position of individual points. I tend to use this when editing the anchor-points of shapes or vector elements. Click on the object with the Direct Selection Tool and you’ll notice that small white squares appear around the edges. Click again on one of these white squares to select the anchor-point directly, and drag or use the arrow keys on your keyboard to adjust.indesign tools for beginners get started selection tool type tool page tool shape tools image frame tools


2. The Type Tool


As a beginner to InDesign, you’ll want to get to grips with creating text. InDesign is a publishing program, and as a result is perfectly designed for creating pro-standard typography. The Type Tool (T) is your gateway tool to putting together your very own text-based designs. Select the Type Tool and drag onto the page to create a new text frame, or click into an existing text frame to activate editing. You can also transform any shape into a text frame by simply double-clicking your type cursor onto the shape.indesign tools for beginners get started selection tool type tool page tool shape tools image frame tools

You can also turn any shape or line into a text path by activating the Type on a Path Tool, which you can find inside the Type Tool’s drop-down menu.indesign tools for beginners get started selection tool type tool page tool shape tools image frame tools

Once you have the Type Tool selected InDesign will switch to the Character Formatting Controls panel at the top of the workspace, allowing you to adjust Font, Size, Leading, Tracking, Kerning and other typography settings. By clicking on the paragraph symbol below the ‘A’ at the far-left of the panel, you can also access the Paragraph Formatting Controls panel, which gives you access to options for formatting larger sections of text, including Hyphenation, Alignment and Indentation.indesign tools for beginners get started selection tool type tool page tool shape tools image frame tools

Get to grips with typography basics in InDesign in this quick tutorial.


3. The Frame Tools


The Frame Tools are all marked out by the ‘X’ across their symbol in the Tools panel. These tools are essential if you’re a beginner looking to create image-based designs. Frames are used to insert photos, illustrations or backgrounds into InDesign (which can be done using File > Place). The Rectangle Frame Tool (F) is the most commonly used frame creator, but you can also choose from an Ellipse Frame Tool and Polygon Frame Tool, both accessible from the Rectangle Tool’s drop-down menu.indesign tools for beginners get started selection tool type tool page tool shape tools image frame tools

Simply choose your tool, then click and drag onto the page to create an image frame. Hold down Shift while you drag to create a perfect square, circle or polygon.

Raster images in InDesign are always placed inside frames, allowing you to apply effects to either the containing frame or the image itself, or both. To select the image directly, double-click inside the frame. The edges of the image will be made visible and you can adjust position or scale if you wish. To apply effects to your image frame, head up to Object > Effects on the top menu.

Learn more about working with images in InDesign here.


4. The Shape Tools


Although vector software like Adobe Illustrator and Inkscape are perfectly tuned for designing vector illustrations, you can do a lot of vector work directly in InDesign too. The simplest way to create vector shapes is to use the Shape Tools. These can be found at the bottom of the second section of the Tools panel, just below the Frame Tools. As with the Frame Tools, you can choose from a Rectangle Tool (M), Ellipse Tool (L) or Polygon Tool. Click and drag onto the page to create a shape, holding Shift to create perfect proportions. You can also create simple lines using the Line Tool (\). Using Shift alongside the Line Tool creates perfectly straight horizontal or vertical lines.indesign tools for beginners get started selection tool type tool page tool shape tools image frame tools

Once your shape is created you can edit color using the Swatches panel (Window > Color > Swatches) and adjust the width and style of the stroke of your shape using the Stroke panel (Window > Stroke).indesign tools for beginners get started selection tool type tool page tool shape tools image frame tools

As with image frames you can also apply effects like transparency, gradients and drop shadows using the Effects window (Object > Effects).indesign tools for beginners get started selection tool type tool page tool shape tools image frame tools

You can create more advanced vector designs by using the Drawing Tools, which make a great team alongside the Shape Tools. Use the Pen Tool (P) to create custom anchor-points or the Pencil Tool (N) to create more fluid designs. To have more control over these tools, a graphics tablet is always more helpful than a mouse. Our old friend the Direct Selection Tool (A) can be used to select and move individual anchor-points, so don’t worry if your drawing didn’t turn out quite as well as you hoped on the first go.indesign tools for beginners get started selection tool type tool page tool shape tools image frame tools


5. The Page Tool


Our final essential beginner tool is the Page Tool…it’s hands-down one of the most useful tools, and has been a lifesaver of mine many a time. Ever wanted to switch a document to landscape? Or quickly change an A3 page to Letter size? The Page Tool allows you to quickly change the orientation and/or size of pages. Select the Page Tool (Shift+P) and click onto the page you want to change.indesign tools for beginners get started selection tool type tool page tool shape tools image frame tools

The Controls panel at the top of the workspace will adjust, showing you options for size, orientation and how you would like the content on the page to be repositioned. I think one of the handiest options in InDesign must be the Scale option from the Liquid Page Rule menu. This allows you to keep the proportions of your content intact, and scales it up or down to suit the new page size. All elements, including images and text, will be resized to fit. When you’re short on time and somebody wants the document at a different size, this can save hours of work.


Discover more advice for InDesign beginners on our Tutorials page. Or why not seek out inspiration about typography, layout design and much, much more right here.

The post 5 Essential Tools for InDesign Beginners appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
7102
Create an Engraved Stone Text Effect in InDesign https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/stone-text-effect/ Tue, 27 Jun 2017 16:13:30 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=7368 Who’s got the time to do lengthy typography tutorials? Or the money to buy expensive Photoshop actions? Here at InDesignSkills we’re all about making your life easier, while picking up some awesome new design skills along the way. Read on to discover an incredible stone text effect you can create directly in InDesign in under […]

The post Create an Engraved Stone Text Effect in InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Who’s got the time to do lengthy typography tutorials? Or the money to buy expensive Photoshop actions?

Here at InDesignSkills we’re all about making your life easier, while picking up some awesome new design skills along the way. Read on to discover an incredible stone text effect you can create directly in InDesign in under 5 minutes.

engraved-stone-quick-typography-text-effect-indesign-adobe


How to Create an Engraved Stone Text Effect


Looking to channel Game of Thrones in your designs? This engraved stone effect brings drama and ancient appeal to text, making it a fantastic match for advertising and poster work.

Step 1

We’ll set up all of the effects here on a landscape A3 page (go to File > New > Document), though of course feel free to adapt the page size to suit your own purposes.

Expand the Layers panel (Window > Layers) and rename Layer 1 as Background. Use the Rectangle Frame Tool (F) to create an image frame that extends across the whole of the page.

For this effect you’ll need to find a stone background image, preferably one that’s not too dark, to allow the shadows to stand out. Here I’ve used this grey stone background image from Shutterstock. Go to File > Place, choose your image, and click Open, allowing it to fill the whole image frame.engraved stone quick typography text effect indesign adobe background

With the frame selected, go to Object > Effects > Gradient Feather. Set the Type to Radial and allow the gradient to extend from darker around the outside of the image to lighter at the center.engraved stone quick typography text effect indesign adobe gradient

Step 2

Lock the Background layer and create a new layer above, renaming it Typography.

Use the Type Tool (T) to create a large text frame on the center of the page, and type in your text.

From either the Controls panel running along the top of the workspace or the Character panel (Window > Type & Tables > Character) choose a Font for your text (here I’ve used Simplo Bold) and set the text in All Caps.engraved stone quick typography text effect indesign adobe simplo

Step 3

Select the text frame and Edit > Copy it, preserving a copy on the pasteboard.engraved stone quick typography text effect indesign adobe

With the text frame selected go to Type > Create Outlines to convert the text to a vector format. Then go to File > Place, choose your stone background image as before and Open it, allowing it to fill the outlined text.engraved stone quick typography text effect indesign adobe outline text

Step 4

Now you can start adding effects to your text, to add depth, shadow and highlights.

Select the vector text and go to Object > Effects > Transparency. Set the Mode to Multiply.engraved stone quick typography text effect indesign adobe transparency

Then click on the Bevel and Emboss option in the window’s left-hand menu. Set the Style to Inner Bevel and Technique to Smooth. Play around with the Size, Depth, Angle and Shadow and Highlight Opacities until you’re happy with the effect.engraved stone quick typography text effect indesign adobe effects

To give the impression that light is being cast from above over the stone, you can add an Inner Shadow. Click on this option in the window’s menu. Adjust the options until you’re happy with the depth, direction and strength of the shadow.engraved stone quick typography text effect indesign adobe effects

Click OK to exit the Effects window.engraved stone quick typography text effect indesign adobe

Step 5

If you want to make your effect even more graphic and strong you can add stronger shadow effects at the top and bottom of the type.

To do this, Edit > Paste in Place your earlier text frame on top of the existing type effect.

Use the Eyedropper Tool (I) to pick up one of the darker shades from the surrounding background image. Double-click the picked-up color which is now visible at the bottom of the Tools panel. Click into one of the CMYK text boxes, and then choose Add CMYK Swatch. From the Swatches panel (Window > Color > Swatches) you can now apply the swatch to the text color.engraved stone quick typography text effect indesign adobe swatches

Select the text frame and go to Object > Effects > Transparency. Set the Mode to Multiply.engraved stone quick typography text effect indesign adobe transparency

Click on the Gradient Feather menu option, and apply a Linear gradient at a 90 degree angle, extending from darker at the top of the text, to lighter at the bottom.engraved stone quick typography text effect indesign adobe gradient

Select the text frame and Edit > Copy, Edit > Paste in Place. Go to Object > Effects > Gradient Feather and click on the Reverse Gradient button to the right side of the Gradient Stops slider.engraved stone quick typography text effect indesign adobe gradient

And you’re done! This high-impact stone text effect has a cinematic feel—why not try using it on a poster for extra drama?

engraved-stone-quick-typography-text-effect-indesign-adobe


Want to give your typography skills a refresh? Head to the beginner tutorials page to find fun and simple tips and tricks to give your text the wow-factor.

The post Create an Engraved Stone Text Effect in InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
7368
How to Create Vertical Text in InDesign https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/vertical-text-indesign/ Thu, 27 Apr 2017 07:16:53 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=7082 Vertical text is a fantastic technique for giving posters and other layouts a dramatic typographic look. This quick tutorial will show you how to create and format vertical text in InDesign. Try it out for your next design project to really give your layouts the wow factor. How to Create and Format Vertical Text Step 1. […]

The post How to Create Vertical Text in InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Vertical text is a fantastic technique for giving posters and other layouts a dramatic typographic look. This quick tutorial will show you how to create and format vertical text in InDesign. Try it out for your next design project to really give your layouts the wow factor.

Final-vertical-text-poster


How to Create and Format Vertical Text


Step 1.

1

I’ve prepared a single-page document in InDesign, set to a standard ‘Architectural D’ poster size, 610 mm (24 in) in Width and 914 mm (36 in) in Height, with a 5 mm Bleed around the edges of the page.I’ve also placed an image of a ballet dancer onto the page, and locked this layer, creating a new layer above from the Layers panel (Window > Layers). When creating your own vertical text effect, you may also want to edit this on its own layer, so you don’t mistakenly move around any other elements sitting below.

1.1

Image of a ballet dancer from Shutterstock

Step 2.

Once you have your page and layers prepared, you can get started with creating your vertical text effect.

2

From the Tools panel select the Line Tool (\) and, holding down Shift, drag your mouse down from top to bottom, creating a vertical line.

Step 3.

Select the Type on a Path Tool (Shift+T), which you can find in the Type Tool’s drop-down menu in the Tools panel.

3

Click once onto the top of the line to convert the line into a text path. Now you can type in the text you want to appear vertical.

Using the Type Tool (T), you can highlight the text and apply formatting like font, size and color from the Character Formatting Controls panel (running along the top of the workspace) and the Swatches panel (Window > Color > Swatches). The font used here is Charlevoix Pro.

3.1

You can also remove the automated black color of the line by selecting the line with the Selection Tool (V, Escape), and choosing [None] from the Swatches panel.

Step 4.

vertical text indesign typography quick tutorial

Open the Paragraph panel (Window > Type & Tables > Paragraph), highlight the text with your type cursor and set the alignment to Justify All Lines. This will pull the text across to fill the full length of the line. You can adjust the height of the line by dragging the horizontal lines which appear at the top and bottom of the line when the Selection Tool is active.

Step 5.

To switch the text to a vertical orientation, head up to Type on the top menu and choose Type on a Path > Options.

vertical text indesign typography quick tutorial

Under Effect, choose Stair Step. From the Align options choose Center. Click OK to exit the window.

Step 6.

Now your text is aligned vertically you can tweak the formatting to suit your layout.

vertical text indesign typography quick tutorial
vertical text indesign typography quick tutorial

Here, I’ve adjusted the kerning between certain characters to reveal the dancer’s face on the poster and create a more interesting typographic effect. You can adjust this from the Character panel (Window > Type & Tables > Character).

vertical text indesign typography quick tutorial

I’ve also created a faded effect to the text by repeatedly copying and pasting the vertical text line, and reducing the opacity by going to Object > Effects > Transparency.

vertical text indesign typography quick tutorial

I also applied a gradient (Object > Effects > Gradient Feather) running at a 0 degrees angle to enhance the fade effect.

vertical text indesign typography quick tutorial

Building a complete layout around your vertical text effect can be really fun—try teaming vertical text with rotated type and standard left-to-right text to create contrast and interest. Alternatively, creating a layout solely with vertical text can look amazing, and is a technique that was often employed by the Swiss School, who were interested in the qualities vertical text brought to grid-based layouts.


Want to update your typography skills? Our beginner tutorials page is a great resource for fun and easy-to-follow typography tips and tricks.

The post How to Create Vertical Text in InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
7082
Creating Beautiful Drop Caps in InDesign https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/drop-cap-indesign/ Mon, 06 Feb 2017 18:49:20 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=7008 A drop cap adds a professional flourish to any layout, whether you’re designing a magazine, poster or book. This fundamental typographic skill isn’t difficult to master—once you know the basics you can develop your drop cap designs and create jaw-droppingly beautiful results. Read on to find out how to create a simple drop cap in […]

The post Creating Beautiful Drop Caps in InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
A drop cap adds a professional flourish to any layout, whether you’re designing a magazine, poster or book. This fundamental typographic skill isn’t difficult to master—once you know the basics you can develop your drop cap designs and create jaw-droppingly beautiful results.

Read on to find out how to create a simple drop cap in InDesign, and how to take your designs to the next level with stunning scale, color and graphics…


1. How to Set Up a Simple Drop Cap


Step 1

With your InDesign document open, you should first prepare a text frame on your layout using the Type Tool (T). Fill the frame with the paragraph of text you would like to add a drop cap too.drop cap adobe indesign typography magazine design

Highlight with your type cursor the first letter of the paragraph, or simply place your cursor somewhere into the paragraph.

From either the Paragraph Formatting Controls panel running along the top of the workspace or from the Paragraph panel (Window > Type & Tables > Paragraph), locate the Drop Cap Number of Lines option (indicated by an uppercase ‘A’ in the corner of a sequence of lines).drop cap adobe indesign typography magazine design

By clicking the arrows up or down, or by manually typing in a number, InDesign will set the drop cap to extend a specified number of lines, increasing the size of the character as it does.

You can also adjust the number of characters included in the drop cap by increasing the value of the Drop Cap One or More Characters, an option which you can find in the bottom-right corner of the Paragraph panel. This is perfect for when you want to pull out a whole word or phrase as part of your drop cap effect.

Step 2

A trio of simple tweaks will help you to get the most out of your drop cap and give it a professionally polished look:

First, go to Window > Type & Tables > Story, and check the Optical Margin Alignment box. This shifts any straggly serifs or apostrophes to outside of the text frame, giving the whole paragraph, including your drop cap, a cleaner appearance.drop cap adobe indesign typography magazine design

Is your drop cap crowding some of your paragraph text? Here, the tail of the ‘R’ is overlapping some of the body text. You can rectify this by placing your cursor between the drop cap letter and the first letter of the body text (here, between the ‘R’ and ‘o’ of ‘Romanticism’). Then, from either the Character Formatting Controls panel at the top of the screen or the Character panel (Window > Type & Tables > Character), increase the Kerning value, until the drop cap is separated sufficiently from the paragraph text.drop cap adobe indesign typography magazine design

Finally, you can shift the baseline of the drop cap to allow it to be more nicely framed by the surrounding body text. Highlight the drop cap with your type cursor, and then increase the Baseline Shift from the bottom-left option in the Character panel.drop cap adobe indesign typography magazine design

And there we have it! A simple, super professional drop cap which looks fantastic. Try pulling out the drop cap in a contrasting color using the Swatches panel (Window > Color > Swatches) to add even more drama to the effect.drop cap adobe indesign typography magazine design


2. How to Create an Advanced Drop Cap Effect


Step 1

You can give your paragraph’s text frame more of a creative look by creating a custom shape for the text to fill. You can create a range of shapes using the shape or drawing tools in InDesign, or use Adobe Illustrator to create something more unique.

Here I’ve used the Arc Tool and Line Segment Tool in Illustrator to create a curved rectangle shape.drop cap adobe indesign typography magazine design

I then Edit > Copy the shape, return to InDesign and Edit > Paste the vector shape directly onto the page.drop cap adobe indesign typography magazine design

Right-Click (Windows) or Ctrl-Click (Mac) > Content > Text to transform any vector shape into a text frame.drop cap adobe indesign typography magazine design

Step 2

Fill your text frame with text, making sure to remove the first letter of the paragraph (so here, I type ‘omanticism’, dropping the first ‘R’).drop cap adobe indesign typography magazine design

Create a second square text frame using the Type Tool (T), and type your intended drop cap character into the text frame (here, ‘R’).

Enlarge the character to your preferred size, and move into position over the top-left corner of the body text frame.drop cap adobe indesign typography magazine design

Step 3

Highlight the drop cap letter, and then head up to Type > Create Outlines. The character will be vectorized.drop cap adobe indesign typography magazine design

Then, with the vector drop cap selected, go to Window > Text Wrap. Set the text wrap option to Wrap Around Object Shape and tweak the Offset values to push the text away a little from the very edge of the letter.drop cap adobe indesign typography magazine design

Step 4

If your letter has any completely or partially enclosed areas, like the round counter of the top of the ‘R’ or the gap left behind the sweeping tail of the bottom of the ‘R’ here, you will need to ensure the body text is pushed out of these areas. This will add to the overall look of the drop cap and improve the readability of the paragraph.

To do this, take the Ellipse Tool (L) and drag over the drop cap letter, roughly filling any gaps.drop cap adobe indesign typography magazine design

With the ellipse shape selected return to the Text Wrap window and set the option to Wrap Around Bounding Box.drop cap adobe indesign typography magazine design

Select the shape and Edit > Copy, Edit > Paste if you need to push text out of any other gaps. Rescale and rotate the ellipse to fit the area best.drop cap adobe indesign typography magazine design

You might now need to move your drop cap letter (along with any ellipse shapes) up or down a little until the paragraph text flows around the shape evenly.drop cap adobe indesign typography magazine design

Step 5

Your advanced drop cap effect is basically finished, and if you choose to keep it set in a classic black color that can look very elegant.

However, you can also jazz up your drop cap with color by switching the Fill Color of the letter shape in the Swatches panel. This is a great way of making your drop cap the focal point of your layout.drop cap adobe indesign typography magazine design

Another creative technique is to fill your drop cap with an image, making it into an even more interesting feature of your design.

This is really quick and simple to do. Simply Right-Click (Windows) or Ctrl-Click (Mac) on the letter shape, and choose Content > Graphic. InDesign will now treat the letter as an image frame.drop cap adobe indesign typography magazine design

Then go to File > Place and choose an image. Patterns and landscapes look lovely, but close-up portraits of models and still-life shots can also look really impactful. Once you’ve chosen your image, click Open.drop cap adobe indesign typography magazine design fill with image

And there we have it! Drop caps are a fantastic technique for adding elegance and creativity to your magazine, stationery and book layouts.drop cap adobe indesign typography magazine design fill with image

Whether you opt for a simple style using InDesign’s inbuilt Drop Cap function or create your own custom design you’ll find that drop caps really are the cherry on the cake of a professional typographic layout.


Want to update your typography skills? Our beginner tutorials page is a great resource for fun and easy-to-follow typography tips and tricks.

The post Creating Beautiful Drop Caps in InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
7008
InDesign Basics: Creating Arrows https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/indesign-arrow/ Thu, 26 Jan 2017 17:45:12 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=6990 Whether you’re creating a newsletter, infographic or chart in InDesign, arrows are an essential graphic for directing the reader’s gaze and embellishing data-based content. Here you’ll learn how simple it is to create stylish arrows in a range of styles directly in InDesign. 1. Creating Arrows Using the Stroke Panel The first step of creating an […]

The post InDesign Basics: Creating Arrows appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Whether you’re creating a newsletter, infographic or chart in InDesign, arrows are an essential graphic for directing the reader’s gaze and embellishing data-based content.

Here you’ll learn how simple it is to create stylish arrows in a range of styles directly in InDesign.


1. Creating Arrows Using the Stroke Panel


The first step of creating an arrow is to create a stroke. Let’s take a look how…

Step 1

With the InDesign workspace open and a new document created go to the Tools panel and select the Line Tool (\).

indesign arrows stroke arrowhead

To create a line at a perfect horizontal or vertical angle, hold down Shift, and drag your mouse onto the page from side to side or top to bottom. 

Step 2

Go to Window > Stroke to open the Stroke panel (if you have your workspace set to the default Essentials setting, you will find the Stroke panel docked on the right side of the workspace).

In this panel you can adjust the Weight of the stroke, making it thicker or slimmer. indesign arrows stroke arrowheadStep 3

indesign arrows stroke arrowhead

From the Stroke panel’s drop-down menu you can select Show Options, which will expand the panel.

indesign arrows stroke arrowhead

In the bottom section of the panel you’ll find options for styling the Start and End of your stroke. Click on the Start drop-down menu and you’ll see a range of arrowhead options for applying to the start point of your stroke. Here I’ve opted for SimpleWide.

indesign arrows stroke arrowhead

Applying a different style to the End of your stroke can create a stylish look. Here I’ve opted for Circle to give the arrow a sort of retro, mid-century look.

indesign arrows stroke arrowhead

You can also adjust the Type of your stroke, which adjusts the style of the stroke’s line between the arrowheads. Here, I’ve chosen Left Slant Hash and also increased the Weight of the stroke to create a chunkier, more graphic arrow style.


2. Editing Your Arrows Further


Now you have a basic arrow shape you can start to develop the arrow using color and effects.

Step 1

indesign arrows stroke arrowhead

You can adjust the color of your arrow from the Swatches panel (Window > Color > Swatches). Click on the Stroke (X) hollow square symbol at the top-left of the panel to adjust the color of the arrow (you won’t need to apply any Fill Color).

indesign arrows stroke arrowhead

You can also have flexibility over the position of your arrow by using the Selection Tool (V, Escape) to move the arrow, or hover over one end to Rotate it

indesign arrows stroke arrowhead
indesign arrows stroke arrowhead
indesign arrows stroke arrowhead

Right-Click (Windows) or Ctrl-Click (Mac) to access other transform options, such as flipping the arrow vertical or horizontal, or rotating the arrow to precise degrees.Edit > Copy, Edit > Paste the arrow to build up designs, and team with typography set in text frames created using the Type Tool (T) to demonstrate data concepts.

Step 2

indesign arrows stroke arrowhead
indesign arrows stroke arrowhead
indesign arrows stroke arrowhead

You can add more interesting effects to your arrows using the Effects panel (select the arrow, then go to Object > Effects). From here you can add a Drop Shadow.…..more specialist texture effects, like Satin, Bevel or Emboss……or create a graduated effect by applying a subtle Gradient Feather to the arrow.

Looking to refresh your InDesign skills? Our beginner tutorials page is a great resource for fun and easy-to-follow InDesign lessons.

The post InDesign Basics: Creating Arrows appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
6990
How to Create a Table of Contents in InDesign https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/table-of-contents-indesign/ Fri, 28 Oct 2016 17:25:37 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=6750 InDesign has a designated tool for automatically creating contents lists, the Table of Contents (TOC) function. If you’re working on a lengthy document this can be a fantastic time-saver. To explain how it works, we’ll walk you through the process of creating a Table of Contents for a short book. 1. Prepare Your Page Numbers Before you begin putting together the table of contents, you […]

The post How to Create a Table of Contents in InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
InDesign has a designated tool for automatically creating contents lists, the Table of Contents (TOC) function. If you’re working on a lengthy document this can be a fantastic time-saver.

To explain how it works, we’ll walk you through the process of creating a Table of Contents for a short book.

indesign table of contents TOC page numbers sections book design magazine design


1. Prepare Your Page Numbers


Before you begin putting together the table of contents, you need to make sure you’re happy with your page numbering. InDesign will use your page numbering information to make your table of contents, so it’s important to get it accurate.

You may have already introduced page numbers into your InDesign document by placing markers onto the Master pages. If not, and you don’t know where to start, make sure to check out this quick tutorial first.

The page markers will reflect the page number as listed in the Pages panel (Window > Pages), and not necessarily the page number you want it to be. So this is the first thing to address before you put together a table of contents.

Step 1

I’ve created a document in InDesign, made up of facing spreads, for the inside pages of The Great Gatsby.indesign table of contents TOC page numbers sections book design magazine design

My document has three chapters, with each new chapter page defined by a chapter heading, graphic and half-page text frame.

At the moment the first page of Chapter One is on page 7 of the document, which the marker has rendered as a ‘7’ on the page. I want to change this and make this page show up as page 1 of the document.indesign table of contents TOC page numbers sections book design magazine design

Expand the Pages panel (Window > Pages) and Right-Click (Windows) or Ctrl-Click (Mac) on the page you would like the numbering section to start from, in my case Page 7. Then click on Numbering & Section Options.indesign table of contents TOC page numbers sections book design magazine design

Step 2

In the window that opens, select Start Page Numbering at: and type in 1. Under Style choose 1, 2, 3, 4… and then click OK.indesign table of contents TOC page numbers sections book design magazine design

A warning message will flag up, reminding you that by making this change you will have created a duplicate of pages 1-6 in your document. We can rectify that, so just click OK.indesign table of contents TOC page numbers sections book design magazine design

Step 3

In my book document, I have designed it so that no page numbers appear on the introductory pages of the book. This is quite common for novels, with numbered pages only beginning on the first page of the first chapter.

Irrespective of whether the page numbers are visible or not, to avoid duplicate page numbers in the document I can set these first few pages to have a different numbering system.

Right-Click (Windows) or Ctrl-Click (Mac) on Page 1 in the Pages panel > Numbering & Section Options.indesign table of contents TOC page numbers sections book design magazine design

Again, select Start Page Numbering at: and type in 1. Under Page Numbering, choose a different Style for the numbers—roman numerals are usually a good choice for introductory pages. Then click OK.indesign table of contents TOC page numbers sections book design magazine designindesign table of contents TOC page numbers sections book design magazine design

Now you have two separate numbered sections in your book. Once you have decided on all the numbering for your document (for example, you may also want to have a different numbering system for the final pages of the book, as part of an index or bibliography) you’re almost ready to create a table of contents.


2. Set the Style of Your Contents Title


There’s one more ‘prep’ stage before you create a Table of Contents and that’s to create a Style for the title of your contents list.

Step 1

You can do this either from the Paragraph Styles panel (Window > Styles > Paragraph Styles) or from inside the Table of Contents function directly. Let’s do the latter, so we can take a look at the TOC window.

Go to Layout > Table of Contents.indesign table of contents TOC page numbers sections book design magazine design

In the Table of Contents window that opens you’ll notice a Title text box at the top-left of the window. This is where you can set the text for the title of your contents. A simple ‘Contents’ is pretty failsafe, but you might want to customise this to fit your own project, such as ‘In This Issue’ or ‘List of Entries’.indesign table of contents TOC page numbers sections book design magazine design

Step 2

To the right of this text box is a Style drop-down menu. From here you can either choose a pre-created Paragraph Style or create a New Paragraph Style. In this case let’s create a new Style.indesign table of contents TOC page numbers sections book design magazine design

I’m going to name it ‘Contents Style’ (or something like ‘Contents Title’ might also be a good fit), and set the Font to Aleo Light, Size 12 pt to match the formatting I’ve used for headers in my book design.indesign table of contents TOC page numbers sections book design magazine design

Clicking on Indents and Spacing in the left-hand menu allows me to tweak the Alignment of the Style to Center. Then I click OK.indesign table of contents TOC page numbers sections book design magazine design

Back in the Table of Contents window there is a Styles in Table of Contents section in the center. You can see that we can’t create a new Paragraph Style for the body of the Table of Contents directly in this window. We’ll need to create them first, then return to the TOC window to add them to the Include… list. So click OK for now.indesign table of contents TOC page numbers sections book design magazine design


3. Set the Style of the Body of Your Contents


Styles are one of the most useful functions in InDesign, but are often underused. Creating a Paragraph Style allows you to reproduce the exact formatting of your text elsewhere in your document, so it’s a great timesaver when you’re creating text-heavy documents like books.

We can create a new Paragraph Style for only the chapter headings in the book, and then tell InDesign to only use these styled items of text to create the contents list.

Step 1

Click to select the Chapter One heading text frame in the body of your document. Open the Paragraph Styles panel (Window > Styles > Paragraph Styles) and click on the Create New Style button at the bottom of the panel.indesign table of contents TOC page numbers sections book design magazine design

Step 2

Double-click on the new Paragraph Style 1 name in the Styles panel to open up the Options window. Rename the Style as something like ‘Contents Headers’ and click OK.indesign table of contents TOC page numbers sections book design magazine design

Step 3

Scroll through your document, clicking on each new chapter heading and then clicking on the ‘Contents Header’ Style to apply it.indesign table of contents TOC page numbers sections book design magazine design

If you’ve already formatted all your chapter headings in the same way this won’t affect the look of the text, but it will tell InDesign that all the chapter headers now have their own distinct style which sets it apart from other content in the document.indesign table of contents TOC page numbers sections book design magazine design


4. Create your Table of Contents (TOC)


Now that you have your numbering system and Styles in place, you’re ready to create your contents list.

Step 1

Go back to Layout > Table of Contents. As before, set the Title and title’s Style, choosing the original Style you created for this (e.g. ‘Contents Style’).

Then from the selection of Other Styles below, click on the new Style you just created, the ‘Contents Header’ Style.indesign table of contents TOC page numbers sections book design magazine design

Click the Add button in the center of the window to add it to the Include Paragraph Styles list.indesign table of contents TOC page numbers sections book design magazine design

By clicking the More Options button you can customise your TOC as you like, defining how the Page Numbers appear, how these are styled and whether there appears any symbol, such as dashes or dots, Between Entry and Number.indesign table of contents TOC page numbers sections book design magazine design

Explore the options, and customise as you like it, before clicking OK.

Step 2

A small text preview will appear next to your cursor, indicating that the cursor is loaded with the created table of contents and is ready to place.

Navigate to the page of the document where you would like the contents to be and click once onto the page to create the contents list in a new text frame.indesign table of contents TOC page numbers sections book design magazine design

Step 3

Now you can tweak the formatting of the contents if you like, using the Paragraph panel (Window > Type & Tables > Paragraph) to adjust alignment.indesign table of contents TOC page numbers sections book design magazine design

Or use the Character panel (Window > Type & Tables > Character) to adjust the Font Size, Leading or Font Weight (e.g. Light, Bold) of the text.indesign table of contents TOC page numbers sections book design magazine design

Format the rest of your contents page as you would for the rest of your book, and there you have it! A simple, quick-to-create table that shows all the page numbers of your chapters accurately without needing to manually type them all up.indesign table of contents TOC page numbers sections book design magazine design


Delve deeper into book design with our selection of publishing tutorials and inspirational articles for book fonts and book cover designs.

The post How to Create a Table of Contents in InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
6750
InDesign Basics: A Quick Guide to Master Pages https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/indesign-master-pages/ Fri, 07 Oct 2016 18:19:52 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=6687 Master pages sound scarier than they are—the principle behind them is actually very simple, and they’re incredibly useful for adding consistent design elements to long documents. Here we break down the basics of Masters, and share some tips on how to get the most from one of InDesign’s handiest features. 1. What is a Master Page? […]

The post InDesign Basics: A Quick Guide to Master Pages appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Master pages sound scarier than they are—the principle behind them is actually very simple, and they’re incredibly useful for adding consistent design elements to long documents.

Here we break down the basics of Masters, and share some tips on how to get the most from one of InDesign’s handiest features.


1. What is a Master Page?


The basic principle of a Master page is this:

Whatever you place onto the Master page will be visible on all the pages of your document that have the Master applied to them

You can edit the Master, and add elements to it that you want to appear across multiple pages, such as page numbers, running headers and borders. Masters are indispensable when creating multi-page documents like magazines, books, reports and brochures, allowing you to add design elements across a number of specified pages, creating a sense of consistency and professionalism in your document.indesign master pages masters magazine design

You can also create multiple Master pages, each with different design elements. A good example for when it would be appropriate to use multiple Master pages is when you’re designing a book that’s split into chapters. You might have one Master page for the opening page of a chapter, and another Master for the pages that sit within the chapter. You can also add different Masters for index pages and contents pages, which may require different page numbering systems or headers.


2. Where Do I Find the Master Pages?


When you create a new document in InDesign, the software automatically creates two new Master pages for the document, which are visible at the top of the Pages panel (Window > Pages).indesign master pages masters magazine design

One of these Masters is called, by default, the ‘A-Master’, and depending on whether you’ve set the document up with single pages or facing spreads, will be made up of one or two pages.

The A-Master is automatically applied to all the pages in your new document, which means that anything you put onto the A-Master will show up on all pages of your document.

The Master page above the A-Master in the Pages panel is, in fact, not really a Master. It’s called [None], and by dragging this down onto a page icon in the panel below you can wipe the page of any applied Master.


3. How Do I Edit a Master Page?


Masters are quick and simple to edit—simply double-click on one of the Master page icons in the Pages panel to bring it up on screen. You can now edit the Master as you would a normal page. Let’s walk through the steps of editing an A-Master for a magzine, and look at how to add simple features like page numbers, running headers and background color.

Step 1

In this document, I want to create a Master that will add a few consistent elements to the pages of articles in the magazine. To do this, I double-click on the A-Master icon in the Pages panel (Window > Pages). This is a two-page Master as the document has been set up with facing pages; clicking on either the left or right page of the Master will bring up the full spread on screen.indesign master pages masters magazine design

Step 2

Now you’re ready to start editing your Master!

Think about the elements that will remain consistent across a group of pages. You can only edit these elements on the Master, and they will all sit behind the page content, so try to focus on elements that make up the background and basic template of your page.

For the A-Master for this magazine I’m going to add background color, page numbers and running headers. First, I take the Rectangle Tool (M) and drag onto the Master to create a rectangle that fills the entire left-hand page. Using the Swatches panel (Window > Color > Swatches) I give the shape a black color fill.indesign master pages masters magazine design

I Copy > Paste the rectangle and place the pasted shape on the right-hand page of the Master.indesign master pages masters magazine design

By keeping the color in separate shapes on each page I can apply only the left- or right-hand page to a spread in my magazine. If I was to extend a single shape across the whole of the spread, the color would be applied to both pages of a spread automatically.

Step 3

I can also add page numbers to my A-Master. To do this, I zoom into the bottom left-hand corner of the left page, and use the Type Tool (T) to create a text frame. Placing my type cursor into the frame, I head up to Type > Insert Special Character > Markers > Current Page Number. As this is the A-Master InDesign flags this up as an ‘A’ (this will adjust to the correct page number in the pages of my magazine).indesign master pages masters magazine design

I can format the page number using either the Character window (Window > Type & Tables > Character) or the Formatting Controls panel running along the top of the workspace.

Then I Copy > Paste the page number’s text frame and manouver it over onto the right-hand page of the Master. I switch the text to Align Right using the Paragraph window (Window > Type & Tables > Paragraph).indesign master pages masters magazine design

Step 4

Using the Type Tool (T) I create a long text frame at the top of the right page, adjusting this to read the issue’s date, and then format the text to adjust the size, font and color. I rotate the frame 90° (Right-Click [Windows] or Ctrl-Click [Mac] > Transform > Rotate).indesign master pages masters magazine design

I Copy > Paste this text frame, moving it over to the top of the left page, and adjusting the text to read the magazine’s title. Then I rotate it 180°.indesign master pages masters magazine design


4. How Do I Apply a Master to Pages in my Document?


By clicking on one of the page icons in the lower part of the Pages panel I am taken back to my document. I can see that the pages have all been updated with the edits I made to the A-Master. This looks great on some of the article pages…indesign master pages masters magazine design

…but I don’t want to have this Master applied to all the pages. I then have two choices. I can either click and drag down the [None] Master page icon in the Pages panel, dropping it onto pages which I don’t want to have a Master.

Or I can create a new Master page to apply to different pages. For example, I might want to create a second Master which has the same page numbers and headers, but has a white background and black text instead.

To create a new Master you can go to the Pages panel’s drop-down menu and choose New Master.indesign master pages masters magazine design

This opens up a New Master dialogue box. From here you can set the specs for your new Master. If you want to create a new Master that contains all the elements of an existing Master and you simply want to build on this you can choose the appropriate Master from the Based on Master menu.indesign master pages masters magazine design

However, as here I want to create a Master with similar elements to the A-Master but I want to be able to edit them too, I can simply create a copy of the Master by selecting both pages of the A-Master (hold down Shift while you do this) and dragging it down onto the Create New Page icon at the bottom of the Pages panel.indesign master pages masters magazine design

From here I can edit this new B-Master, such as removing the colored background and editing the text to a black color.indesign master pages masters magazine design

To apply this B-Master to other pages in the document, I select either the left or right page of the B-Master in the Pages panel and drag and drop it onto the relevant pages.indesign master pages masters magazine design


5. Pro Tips for Using Masters


Master pages can be as simple or complex as you like. If you want your document to look extremely consistent, you can edit the Master to include elements that will help your whole document feel even more uniform. Here are just a few things you can do with Master pages that will help take your designs to the next level:

  • You can add linked text frames to your Master. This is particularly handy for typesetting long, text-heavy documents like books. Place a series of linked text frames on the Master page, but don’t fill them with text. When you return to the document’s pages, you’ll be able to feed text into the Master’s text frames without needing to add new text frames to each new page.
  • The elements sitting on your Master page don’t necessarily need to sit behind the content of your pages. By placing some or all of the elements on your Master page onto a separate, top layer in your document (Window > Layers) you can ensure that page numbers and headers will always sit on top of other content.
  • You can create as many Master pages as you like. For long documents some designers will use a wide range of Masters, treating them as templates for specific sections of a book or magazine.
  • You can delete Masters by selecting the Master and either Right-Clicking (Windows) or Ctrl-Clicking (Mac) > Delete, or dragging the Master down onto the trash can icon at the bottom right of the Pages panel. indesign master pages masters magazine designYou will be prompted with a warning message if the Master is applied to pages in your document. indesign master pages masters magazine designIf you go ahead with the deletion, InDesign will apply the [None] Master to the affected page(s).indesign master pages masters magazine design

Want free InDesign templates? Of course you do! Find a range of ready-to-edit templates for book covers, business cards and more.

Find more InDesign tutorials here, and make sure to check out our edit of the best design inspiration to keep your ideas flowing.

 

The post InDesign Basics: A Quick Guide to Master Pages appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
6687
Beautiful Free Fonts for Business Cards & Resumés https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/free-fonts-business-cards-resumes/ Fri, 29 Jul 2016 11:44:02 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=6516 If you’re designing a business card or wanting to refresh the look of your resumé or CV, you won’t want to miss our curated selection of the very best fonts for professional stationery. Striking the balance between professional and creative in your typefaces can be tricky, but these fonts do just that and more. Scroll through to […]

The post Beautiful Free Fonts for Business Cards & Resumés appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
If you’re designing a business card or wanting to refresh the look of your resumé or CV, you won’t want to miss our curated selection of the very best fonts for professional stationery. Striking the balance between professional and creative in your typefaces can be tricky, but these fonts do just that and more.

Scroll through to discover our pick of the best serifs and sans serifs for your project. And the best part? All of them are free to download!


SERIFS 



Ahellya


Elegant and graphic, with a slightly Art Deco twist. Just look at those gorgeous numbers—perfect for making your phone number look more interesting and stylish. A fantastic choice for minimal, elegant business cards.

best free fonts business cards resume cv professional serif ahelya


Atzur


Looking for a classic serif with a little edge? Atzur borrows from ancient humanist typefaces and 1960s type styles to create a distinctly modern serif.

best free fonts business cards resume cv professional serif atzur


Bitter ht


A little bit slab and chunky, this typeface will make your CV look punchy and masculine.

best free fonts business cards resume cv professional serif bitter ht


Gotu


Professional with a twist, this will look just as good on headers as it will in body text. Set in a Rich Black color swatch for maximum impact.

best free fonts business cards resume cv professional serif gotu


Kraskario


A very subtly contemporary serif, this has an uber-professional style that would suit more formal professional stationery. Architects, lawyers and high-end agencies, look this way.best free fonts business cards resume cv professional serif kraskario


Lemour Serif


Borrowing from classic serifs like Times New Roman and Caslon, this typeface has a beautifully legible style that’s extremely versatile. Choose if you’re looking for something more traditional than cutting-edge.best free fonts business cards resume cv professional serif lemour


Lora


Some of the most versatile professional fonts will have a more conservative regular weight that prioritises legibility, and a more unique bold weight to bring interest to headers. Lora does just that, which makes it a perfect all-round candidate.best free fonts business cards resume cv professional serif lora


SANS SERIFS 



Aller


If you want to use a sans serif font on your business cards or resume, you have to find a type style that has a slightly formal edge. Anything too rounded, spaced out or novel will risk throwing your stationery into unprofessional territory. Strike the balance right and you can end up with professional designs that look ultra-modern and forward-thinking. Aller is a lovely pick, with just the right dosage of graphic formality and pleasing curves.best free fonts business cards resume cv professional sans serif aller


Jura


Jura really does blur the lines between serif and sans serif, but we think its modern, clean design just about nudges it into the sans serif category. If you’re looking for a traditional style that looks completely modern and minimal, this is the typeface to choose.best free fonts business cards resume cv professional sans serif jura


Lato


Borrowing from Greek and Roman type styles, this font is a more informal and accessible style for using on your resume. That curvy ‘a’ is so friendly, who could refuse you an interview?!best free fonts business cards resume cv professional sans serif lato


Proza Libre


A very contemporary take on classical type styles, Proza Libre has a calligraphic look that will look simply beautiful on business cards and letterheads.
best free fonts business cards resume cv professional sans serif proza libre


Sen


Want to prioritise legibility and clarity over anything else? Sen is the perfect choice, and has a fresh and quirky style that’s brimming with personality.
best free fonts business cards resume cv professional sans serif sen


Sofia Pro


Sofia Pro has been an InDesignSkills’ team favorite for a while now, due to its simple, legible beauty. We love the quirkiness of the dropped baseline of the numbers and the completely minimal style of both the lower- and uppercase characters.best free fonts business cards resume cv professional sans serif sofia pro


Three


Looking for something a little more playful? This typeface is inspired by Saul Bass type styles and has a distinctly 1960s feel. The slightly stretched look of the characters gives the font a compressed design which will add a fun edge to business cards and CVs. Perfect for creative freelancers or informal design agencies.best free fonts business cards resume cv professional sans serif three


Still on the hunt for the perfect font for your next project? Discover our pick of the best fonts for magazine design and the loveliest typefaces for book covers. Or get your next lightbulb moment as you browse thousands of inspiring design examples.

The post Beautiful Free Fonts for Business Cards & Resumés appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
14514
How to Place One Image into Multiple Frames in InDesign https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/one-image-multiple-frames-indesign/ Thu, 19 May 2016 10:05:13 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=6334 This is the sort of cool effect you’ll see in high-end magazines and on poster designs. Spreading one image across multiple image frames creates a stunning collage effect that you can add to your own layouts or upload to social media. You can achieve the effect directly in Adobe InDesign—here we show you how! 1. The One-Image/Multi-Frames […]

The post How to Place One Image into Multiple Frames in InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
This is the sort of cool effect you’ll see in high-end magazines and on poster designs. Spreading one image across multiple image frames creates a stunning collage effect that you can add to your own layouts or upload to social media.

You can achieve the effect directly in Adobe InDesign—here we show you how!


1. The One-Image/Multi-Frames Effect


This effect is beloved by professional designers for adding interest and creativity to photos.

collage effect multiple frames single image indesign effect

Once you know the basics of creating the effect, you can build up the design to create incredibly intricate collage effects.

collage effect multiple frames single image indesign effect

First, let’s start out simple…

Step 1

Open up Adobe InDesign and create a New Document.

Set the Page Size to A3, Portrait orientation. Deselect Facing Pages. Keep everything else set to its default values and click OK.

collage effect multiple frames single image indesign effect

Step 2

Expand the Layers panel (Window > Layers) and double-click on the default Layer 1 name to open the Layer Options panel.

Rename the layer Guides and click OK.

collage effect multiple frames single image indesign effect

Create a new layer so that it sits above Guides, and rename it Images. Lock the Images layer and stay on the Guides layer for now.

collage effect multiple frames single image indesign effect

Step 3

You now need to choose a suitable photo for your design. Any high-resolution photo will do, but try and look for interesting details in the image—generally, portraits and close-up shots will work better for this effect than landscapes, which tend to lack strong detail.

I’ve gone for this image of a flamingo.

collage effect multiple frames single image indesign effect flamingo

Take a look at the photo—is it more portrait or landscape, or even square? My photo is square, so I make a mental note of that, and head back to my InDesign document.

Take the Rectangle Tool (M) and drag to create a shape that’s either roughly portrait or landscape to match your photo (it doesn’t need to match the exact dimensions or proportions). I hold down Shift to create mine, to create a perfect square shape.

Center the shape on the page.

collage effect multiple frames single image indesign effect

Step 4

Now it’s time to think about the kind of shape effect you want to create. Let’s start here with a basic example, using squares to create a ‘windowpane’ effect.

Return to the Layers panel and lock the Guides layer. Unlock the Images layer above.

Take the Rectangle Frame Tool (F) and, holding Shift, drag onto the page to create a square, and sit it inside the a corner of the rectangle guide.

collage effect multiple frames single image indesign effect

Go to File > Place, navigate to your chosen photo, and click Open.

collage effect multiple frames single image indesign effect

Double-click inside the image frame to directly select the photo and, holding down Shift, resize the image until it matches the proportions of the guide shape.

collage effect multiple frames single image indesign effect

Step 5

Select the image frame and Edit > Copy, Edit > Paste.

collage effect multiple frames single image indesign effect

Place the pasted frame somewhere inside the guide shape, like in the top-right corner as I’ve done here. You can either resize the image frame to meet the edge of the first image frame, choose to leave a little gap between the frames or even overlap.

collage effect multiple frames single image indesign effect

Whatever you go for, the guide shape is your constant. So, double-click inside the pasted image frame to select the photo and pull it into the same position as the guide shape sitting below.

collage effect multiple frames single image indesign effect

You’ll start to see that the images are beginning to look correct, gradually making up a whole image.

Step 6

Repeat the process of copying and pasting image frames, and resizing the pasted frame if needed…

collage effect multiple frames single image indesign effect

…then grabbing the image inside the frame and adjusting its position so it sits within the guide shape.

collage effect multiple frames single image indesign effect

Once you have filled the whole area of the guide shape with image frames, you should see your whole image has taken shape.

collage effect multiple frames single image indesign effectcollage effect multiple frames single image indesign effect


 2. Creating Advanced Designs


Step 1

Once you’ve experimented with the effect using simple shapes you can start to get more creative. Circular image frames are accessible from InDesign’s Tools panel (Ellipse Frame Tool), and look great when layered over each other in a venn diagram style.

collage effect multiple frames single image indesign effect

To recreate this design, as before create a square shape on the Guides layer below.

Use the Ellipse Tool to create a circular image frame which has the diameter of one quarter of the guide shape. Place in the corner of the shape and File > Place.

Repeat the process described above, copying and pasting circular image frames until you’ve filled the area of the guide shape.

collage effect multiple frames single image indesign effect

To add an overlapping effect to the circles, go to Object > Effects > Transparency and set the Mode to Multiply.collage effect multiple frames single image indesign effect

You can build up this collage effect to create designs that are simple and striking…

collage effect multiple frames single image indesign effect

…or intricate and ornate. The only limitation is your imagination!

collage effect multiple frames single image indesign effect

In this tutorial you’ve learned how to create a collage-style effect in Adobe InDesign using multiple frames to assemble a single image. Awesome work!

Want free InDesign templates? Of course you do! Find a range of ready-to-edit templates for book covers, business cards and more on our Templates page.

Head over to our Inspiration page to browse stunning examples of professional design in magazines, books, stationery and packaging. Learn more about working with photos in InDesign or pick up top tips for improving your InDesign layouts instantly.

The post How to Place One Image into Multiple Frames in InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
6334
The Essential Guide to Print Finishes https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/print-finishes/ Tue, 03 May 2016 18:27:02 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=6249 Want to know your die cutting from your foiling? Confused about the difference between embossing and debossing?  This straightforward guide will introduce you to some of the most popular print finishes, and how you can adapt your digital artwork for them. What are ‘print finishes’?  When you send off artwork to a professional printer, the process might […]

The post The Essential Guide to Print Finishes appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Want to know your die cutting from your foiling? Confused about the difference between embossing and debossing? 

This straightforward guide will introduce you to some of the most popular print finishes, and how you can adapt your digital artwork for them.


What are ‘print finishes’? 


When you send off artwork to a professional printer, the process might not only involve printing your design. After the print job is finished, you might also want to add special effects to your printed product, such as bringing in metallic finishes or cutting your document to give it unusual edges. The printer will be able to create most of these print finishes (also known as post-print effects) in-house, or in some cases, can send your printed items off to a print finishes specialist.

Either way, it’s a great idea to wise up on the post-print effects you can ask for and what they might be suitable for. You’ll end up with a beautiful final print product…and a very happy printer!

Read on to learn more about the five most commonly used post-print effects…


1. Die Cutting 


Die cutting works in the same sort of way as a pastry cutter—the printer will create a custom die (or use a standardized one for popular cutting shapes, such as for rounded corners) and attach this to a die-cutting machine. The printed item is placed in the machine, and the die is pressed onto the item, creating a cut-out shape.

Dies are also used for other print finishes / post-print effects, such as embossing and scoring.

Use this print finish for: Business cards which require rounded corners; invitations and greetings cards with cut-outs, perhaps to allow the inside of the card to be partly visible when closed. Die cutting should be used for jobs which involve a particular cut-out shape to be repeated across a large batch of items, as the cost of producing a custom die can be high. For more flexibility, you should check out laser cutting instead (see below).

post-print effects graphic design print design die cutting die cut

Design: Ryan Romanes


2. Laser Cutting 


Laser cutting is another method of cutting out shapes and edges, but instead uses laser technology to cut your printed item. The laser-cutting machine is hooked up to a computer, which directs the output of a high-power laser beam, cutting the material in the process.

Laser cutting is better suited to creating ornate, detailed shapes. Because the process is digital, and does not use manual tools as with die cutting, the margin for error is minimal—perfect for items which require a delicate touch. Laser cutting is a print finish often used in exclusive packaging and luxury stationery.

Use this print finish for: Wedding and event invitations which you want to look extra-special; stationery items that need a luxurious touch; arts and crafts items.

post-print effects graphic design print design die cutting laser cut

Design: Avie Designs


3. Foiling 


This print finish, also referred to as foil stamping or hot foiling, is the process of applying a metallic or colored foil to your printed item. This is done using a heated die placed into a foil stamping machine.

While metallics are more commonly used in the foiling process, producing gold, silver or copper tones, you can also use foiling to apply a particularly pigmented color that might otherwise be difficult to produce effectively through CMYK printing alone—neons or pastels are examples that might benefit from foiling.

Use this print finish for: Any print item to which you’d like to add a metallic or highly-pigmented touch. Foiling often works best in small doses, so pick out a single or pair of elements that you’d like to highlight in foil.

Top Tip: Foiling normally requires vector images and/or outlined fonts of the details that you want to have stamped. Place these on a separate layer or in a separate artwork (e.g. PDF) file to make it clear which elements you would like the foil to be applied to.

post-print effects graphic design print design foiling hot foil metallic

Design: Paper Bow London


4. Varnishing 


Varnishing is the process of applying a liquid coating to specified elements on your printed item. The process can add a tactile, 3D finish to your designs, and comes in a variety of options—matte, glossy, satin or UV. Ultraviolet (UV) varnishing results in a particularly high-gloss, shiny coating. It is created on a special machine that uses ultraviolet light to ‘cure’ the coating and achieve the final effect.

Use this print finish for: Print items that aren’t particularly colorful. Varnishing adds wonderful texture and interest to monochrome or single-color designs. Varnishing also adds an extra tactile dimension to packaging designs, being particularly suited to items which will be held once picked off the shelves.

post-print effects graphic design print design varnishiing uv varnish gloss

Design: Girl&Boy for Inkmedix


5. Embossing and Debossing 


Embossing and debossing are related processes, both created using a metal plate and a counter. The plate is mounted onto a press and the paper item is stamped between the plate and counter. The pressure pushes the paper into the plate, creating the embossed or depressed effect.

Embossing creates a raised impression on the paper, giving the design a three-dimensional appearance.

post-print effects graphic design print design embossing

Design: Pressure Printing Inc (PPI) for Gold Bug

Debossing creates the reverse effect, pushing the paper downwards to create a depression in the stock.

post-print effects graphic design print design debossing

Design: Studio Thomson for Liberty Fabric

Use these print finishes for: Book covers for hardbacks or special-editions—embossing and debossing add an old-fashioned dimension to books which is less “look-at-me” than foil or varnish. Vintage-style stationery will also be enhanced by a touch of embossing or debossing.


Now you know your way around some of the most common print finishes and post-print effects, brush up on your print preparation skills with our two-part beginners guide.

Or head over to our Tutorials page to pick up more tips for creating print-ready design work.

The post The Essential Guide to Print Finishes appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
6249
Typography Secrets: Fonts with the Best Glyphs https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/fonts-with-the-best-glyphs/ Wed, 13 Apr 2016 13:36:30 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=6202 Glyphs are a graphic designer’s best-kept secret—instant images that make fantastic decorative embellishments for designs. The best thing about them? They’re hiding inside some of your favorite fonts. Discover where you can find cool (and often free!) glyph sets…  1. Adobe Caslon Pro  Who knew there were so many gorgeous glyphs hiding away in one of our best-loved typefaces? These […]

The post Typography Secrets: Fonts with the Best Glyphs appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Glyphs are a graphic designer’s best-kept secret—instant images that make fantastic decorative embellishments for designs.

The best thing about them? They’re hiding inside some of your favorite fonts. Discover where you can find cool (and often free!) glyph sets…


 1. Adobe Caslon Pro 


Who knew there were so many gorgeous glyphs hiding away in one of our best-loved typefaces? These intellectual, vintage-style graphics would be perfect for adding to book page designs.

Adobe Caslon Pro:

typography secrets fonts with great best glyphs symbols graphics adobe caslon pro


2. Veneer Extras


These grungy, stamp-style glyphs will add a perfect hip-vintage twist to your print designs.

Veneer Extras (FREE):

typography secrets fonts with great best glyphs symbols graphics veneer extras


3. IM Fell Flowers


Looking for medieval-style romance? You’ve found the perfect glyph font! These two sets of glyphs provide you with stylish, vintage-inspired floral borders and icons.

IM Fell Flowers I (FREE):

typography secrets fonts with great best glyphs symbols graphics im fell flowers 1

IM Fell Flowers 2 (FREE):

typography secrets fonts with great best glyphs symbols graphics im fell flowers 2


4. Floralia


Floral glyphs will always look feminine and elegant, and are ideal for wedding stationery.

Floralia (FREE):

typography secrets fonts with great best glyphs symbols graphics floralia


5. Rhomus Omnilots


Stars, stars…and more stars. Add a celestial edge to your designs with these stylish glyphs.

Rhomus Omnilots (FREE):

typography secrets fonts with great best glyphs symbols graphics rhomus omnilots


6. Adobe Wood Type Ornaments


A set of classic-inspired glyphs from Adobe, including typography elements, borders and crests.

Adobe Wood Type Ornaments:

typography secrets fonts with great best glyphs symbols graphics adobe wood type ornaments


7. Nymphette


An extremely versatile set of scroll elements, borders and dividers, with an elegant, ornate look.

Nymphette (FREE):

typography secrets fonts with great best glyphs symbols graphics nymphette


8. Davys


Quirky, woodcut-style glyph graphics that would look great on book interiors.

Davys (FREE):

typography secrets fonts with great best glyphs symbols graphics davys


9. Zapf Dingbats


No-fuss, simple symbol glyphs with a clean, modern design. Great for digital projects or print designs that have a more contemporary style.

Zapf Dingbats:

typography secrets fonts with great best glyphs symbols graphics zapf dingbats


10. Victorian Free Ornaments


These historical-inspired glyph sets provide beautiful, ornate graphics for adding a touch of Victorian grandeur to borders and dividers.

Victorian Free Ornaments (FREE):

typography secrets fonts with great best glyphs symbols graphics victorian free ornaments

Victorian Free Ornaments Two (FREE):

typography secrets fonts with great best glyphs symbols graphics victorian free ornaments


11. Adhesive Nr. Seven


These grunge-style ribbons and banners look great set behind type on designs that are looking for a bit of added detail. Try them out on menus, posters or flyers.

Adhesive Nr. Seven (FREE):

typography secrets fonts with great best glyphs symbols graphics adhesive nr seven


Can’t get enough typographic inspiration? Discover some of the best fonts for magazine and book design. Or take a tour of our Inspiration page to get your creative juices flowing.

The post Typography Secrets: Fonts with the Best Glyphs appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
14513
Typography Secrets: Fonts with the Best Ampersands https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/fonts-with-the-best-ampersands/ Mon, 11 Apr 2016 13:56:47 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=6173 We’re always on the hunt for bold, beautiful ampersands (‘&’) to add stylish flair to otherwise dull conjunctions. Read on to discover our selection of the best free and classic typefaces whose ampersands are the star of the show… 1. Classic Italic Ampersands  Looking for elegance, formality and a touch of romance? These ampersands are classically beautiful, and will […]

The post Typography Secrets: Fonts with the Best Ampersands appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
We’re always on the hunt for bold, beautiful ampersands (‘&’) to add stylish flair to otherwise dull conjunctions.

Read on to discover our selection of the best free and classic typefaces whose ampersands are the star of the show…


1. Classic Italic Ampersands 


Looking for elegance, formality and a touch of romance? These ampersands are classically beautiful, and will look fantastic adorning wedding invites, book covers or business cards (the InDesignSkills team’s personal favorite is the Fournier Italic ampersand)…

Adobe Caslon Pro Italic ampersand:

typography secrets indesign best great ampersands classic adobe caslon pro italic

IM FELL French Canon PRO Italic ampersand (FREE):

typography secrets indesign best great ampersands classic IM FELL french canon

Goudy Modern MT Std Italic ampersand:

typography secrets indesign best great ampersands classic goudy

Top pick – Fournier MT Italic ampersand:

typography secrets indesign best great ampersands classic fournier


2. Modern Sans Serif Ampersands


On the hunt for something a bit different—more clean, more contemporary? These sans serif ampersands might cut the mustard.

Note of caution: when using a contemporary-style ampersand, make sure that the glyph is still instantly recognizable as such—when a typeface tries to be different it can look too abstract for some purposes.

Lane Narrow ampersand (FREE):

typography secrets indesign best great ampersands modern sans serif lane

Top pick – Museo Sans Rounded ampersand:

typography secrets indesign best great ampersands modern sans serif museo sans rounded

Sofia Pro Light ampersand (FREE):

typography secrets indesign best great ampersands modern sans serif sofia pro

Nikaia ampersand (FREE):

typography secrets indesign best great ampersands modern sans serif nikaia

Molot ampersand (FREE):

typography secrets indesign best great ampersands modern sans serif molot


3. Traditional Ampersands


Sometimes you just need an ampersand that looks traditional, respectable and sturdy—these guys do just that. If you want something that will be universally recognized and suit all manner of purposes, take one of these for a spin…

Baskerville ampersand:

typography secrets indesign best great ampersands classic traditional baskerville

Alegreya ampersand (FREE):

typography secrets indesign best great ampersands classic traditional alegreya

Top pick – Sorts Mill Goudy ampersand (FREE):

typography secrets indesign best great ampersands classic traditional sorts mill goudy

Adobe Garamond Pro ampersand:

typography secrets indesign best great ampersands classic traditional garamond pro

 


 4. Script Ampersands


For an ultra-romantic style, look to flowing script typefaces for some of the most beautiful, French-inspired ampersands (our top pick is the Kuenstler Script ampersand)…

Linotype Zapfino ampersand:

typography secrets indesign best great ampersands script calligraphy romantic zapfino

Mutlu ampersand (FREE):

typography secrets indesign best great ampersands script calligraphy romantic mutlu

Great Vibes ampersand (FREE):

typography secrets indesign best great ampersands script calligraphy romantic great vibes

Top pick – Kuenstler Script ampersand:

typography secrets indesign best great ampersands script calligraphy romantic kuenstler script


Looking for more typographic inspiration? Check out our pick of the best fonts for magazines and books. Or delve into our Inspiration page to discover lightbulb ideas for your design projects.

The post Typography Secrets: Fonts with the Best Ampersands appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
14512
Design a Paperback Book Cover in InDesign: Tutorial https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/book-cover-tutorial/ Fri, 04 Mar 2016 17:52:43 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=6022 In this simple-to-follow tutorial you’ll learn how to create a full paperback book cover in Adobe InDesign, and take away a template for using with other cover projects. As an example, we’ll redesign a paperback cover for War & Peace, and give it a distinctively modern design. 1. Before We Begin…  Before we delve into designing our paperback […]

The post Design a Paperback Book Cover in InDesign: Tutorial appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
In this simple-to-follow tutorial you’ll learn how to create a full paperback book cover in Adobe InDesign, and take away a template for using with other cover projects.

As an example, we’ll redesign a paperback cover for War & Peace, and give it a distinctively modern design.


1. Before We Begin… 


Before we delve into designing our paperback cover for War & Peace, here are a few top tips for creating book covers in Adobe InDesign:

  • It’s always best to design the front of your cover only first, before you create a full cover, with spine and back. This will allow you to visualise the arrangement of type and images, and judge how well elements are centered on the page.
  • Duplicate the front page, and keep the original as a stand-alone front cover—this will be useful for online promo shots, and eBook covers.
  • You should expand the duplicate page using the Page Tool, and expand it to the full width of the cover, including both front and back cover widths and a spine width (we’ll look at this in more detail below).

In this tutorial we’ll look at giving Leo Tolstoy’s War & Peace a modern makeover. I’ve tried to recreate the mood and theme of the book, with collage-style silhouettes of St Basil’s Cathedral in Moscow—one filled with an image of floral-printed china, to represent peace and domesticity; and the other filled with a military-style map of Prussia, to represent war.

Redesigning covers for classic novels is becoming increasingly common in publishing design; allowing publishers to market vintage classics to new, younger audiences. Discover some of the best examples of recently redesigned covers here.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback redesign classic cover war and peace tolstoy front cover

You’ll learn how to set up a paperback (softcover) version of the full cover in Adobe InDesign and create a collage effect with the help of Adobe Illustrator. We’ll bring in a bit of stylish typography too, to give the cover a modern design.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback redesign classic cover war and peace tolstoy full cover

This design style can be adapted to all sorts of book covers—just switch up the silhouette and inside image!

Ready to create your cover? Great! Let’s get started…


 2. Set up the Cover Template in Adobe InDesign


Step 1

Open up Adobe InDesign.

Go to File > New > Document, and set the Intent of the document to Print. Increase the Number of Pages to 2 and deselect Facing Pages. From the Page Size menu choose Custom.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback

Name the custom size Paperback Book and set the Width to 132 mm and Height to 197 mm. Click Add and then OK to return to the New Document window.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback

Step 2

Set the Margins on all sides to 11 mm and the Bleed to 5 mm. Click OK to create the new document.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback

We’ll work on the front cover design on Page 1—it’s always much easier to work on the front cover design alone at first. Then, a bit later, we’ll expand Page 2 of the document into the full cover, complete with spine and reverse, with the help of the Page Tool.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback

Step 3

With the rulers visible (View > Show Rulers) click and drag a guide out from the left-hand ruler and drop it onto Page 1 at X position 66 mm, which marks the center point of the page.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback

indesign tutorial book cover paperback


 3. Give the Cover a Colored Background


Step 1

Take the Rectangle Tool (M) and drag onto Page 1, across the whole page, extending up to the edges of the bleed on the top, right and bottom edges of the page. On the left edge, just extend to the edge of the page, not all the way to the bleed.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback

Step 2

Expand or open the Swatches panel (Window > Color > Swatches). Create a new CMYK Process swatch, C=100 M=97 Y=48 K=56. Click Add and OK.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback

From the Swatches panel’s drop-down menu choose New Gradient Swatch.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback

Name the swatch Blue Gradient and set the Type to Radial.

Move down to the Gradient Ramp and click on the left-hand stop to be able to edit it. Choose CMYK for the Stop Color and set the levels to C=89 M=49 Y=62 K=62.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback gradient swatch

Click on the right-hand stop and adjust the Stop Color to Swatches. Choose your new swatch, C=100 M=97 Y=48 K=56 from the list below. Click OK.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback gradient swatch

Step 3

Apply the Blue Gradient swatch to the Fill Color of the rectangle shape. This will apply a lovely subtle gradient to the background of our front cover.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback gradient swatch


 4. Create Collage-Style Graphics


Step 1

Expand or open the Layers panel (Window > Layers) and double-click on the default Layer 1 name. Rename the layer as Background Color and click OK.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback

Click on the Create New Layer button at the bottom right of the Layers panel to create a new layer. Double-click, and rename the layer as Graphics.

Lock the bottom layer, Background Color by clicking in the blank space to the right of the eye icon, next to the name of the layer in the panel.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback

Step 2

Now we’re ready to start working on our cathedral graphic!

File > Save As your InDesign document, and minimize InDesign. Open up Adobe Illustrator and create a new document.

To make our collage-style cathedral, we need to first create a basic vector silhouette of the cathedral, and then, a bit later, we’ll fill it with a photo image.

You can download a ready-made vector image of St.Basil’s Cathedral here.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback

Step 3

Making sure your silhouette has only a simple black fill and no stroke color, select it, and then go up to Edit > Copy in Illustrator.

Return to your InDesign document and Edit > Paste the vector onto Page 1 of your document. Hold Shift to adjust the scale of the pasted vector.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback

From the Swatches panel (Window > Color > Swatches), set the Fill Color of the vector to [None] to get rid of the [Black] fill.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback

Step 4

Next up, you need to choose an image to ‘fill’ the cathedral silhouette. I’ve chosen a commons image of an antique map of Prussia, which you can download here. Download the image and return to your InDesign document.

With the vector selected go to File > Place and choose the map image. Click Open.

Click on the Fill Frame Proportionally button in the top control panel to size the image to the frame. Double-click inside the vector frame to manually adjust the scale of the image, holding Shift while you do so, to make sure you’re happy with the effect. Make sure the image extends across the whole of the silhouette.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback

Step 5

Select the vector and Edit > Copy, Edit > Paste.

Ctrl-Click (Mac) or Right-Click (Windows) > Transform > Flip Vertical. Position this flipped cathedral at the top of the page, and go to File > Place. Choose a different image to fill this vector with—to represent ‘Peace’—I’ve gone for a photo of a vintage china plate, which you can download here.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback


 5. Add in Typography


Step 1

Create a new CMYK Process swatch, C=3 M=0 Y=19 K=0, and rename it Cream.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback

Step 2

Unlock the Typography layer and use the Type Tool (T) to create a series of text frames on Page 1.

Here I’ve used the Columna Solid typeface for most of the text, with the central ampersand set in Adobe Caslon Pro.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback

Set individual characters in separate text frames to be able to have more freedom with how you place the type on the page. Set some of the text in [Paper] and some in your new swatch, Cream.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback


 6. Expand Your Design into a Full Paperback Cover


Step 1

Unlock all the layers in the Layers panel, then drag across Page 1 to select everything on the page. Edit > Copy, then scroll down to Page 2 of your document.

Edit > Paste in Place to make a copy of the front cover on the page.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback

Now we need to work out the width of the full length of the cover. This will depend on the width of the spine, which in turn will depend on the number of pages inside the book. You can find calculators online for working out the width of a spine depending on the page number and paper weight (gsm), such as the Print on Demand calculator.

Using this I’ve worked out that to accommodate for 1456 pages (the length of War & Peace—yup, it’s a long one!) printed on white offset 80 gsm paper, we will need to have a 73.7 mm spine width.

The equation for the full width of the cover is this:

Front Cover Width (x) + Spine Width (y) + Back Cover Width (x) = Total Width (x + x + y)

So, for ourWar & Peace cover it’s going to be…

132 mm + 73.7 mm + 132 mm = 337.7 mm Total Width

Step 2

Select the Page Tool (Shift + P) and, holding down Option (Windows) or Alt (Mac), drag the left-hand edge of the page out to the left, increasing the page width to the full 337.7 mm. When you let go, the page width will remain at its new width.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback

If you’re struggling to get the width exactly right as you drag, you can simply type in the correct width in the box at the top-left corner of the workspace.

Step 3

From the left-hand ruler pull out a guide to X position 137 mm, to mark out the left edge of the spine.

Pull out a second guide to 168.85 mm, which marks out the center point of the spine.

Finally, pull out a third guide to 68.5 mm, to mark out the center of the back cover.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback

Step 4

Return to the Layers panel and lock all layers except the Background Color layer.

From the Swatches panel, click on the Blue Gradient swatch to select it, then click on the New Swatch button to duplicate it.

Double-click on the duplicate swatch to open up the Swatch Options window.

Rename the swatch Blue Gradient Spine. Keep everything as it is, just move the right-hand stop on the Gradient Ramp to the left, until you reach about 46%. Click OK to save your edits.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback

Use the Rectangle Tool (M) to create a shape that extends across the spine, and up to the bleed on the top and bottom (73.7 mm in Width). Set the Fill Color to Blue Gradient Spine. The gradient on this is a bit tighter, so the lighter tone will not extend too far away from the central part of the spine.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback

Create a second shape using the Rectangle Tool (M), extending it over the whole of the back cover, up to the left edge of the spine, and up to the bleed on the top, left and bottom edges of the page. Set the Fill to Blue Gradient.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback

Step 5

Return to the Layers panel and lock the Background Color layer. Unlock the next layer up, Graphics.

Copy and Paste the cathedral vectors on the front cover, onto the back cover, and arrange them as shown below. You can switch up the fill image of the vectors too, if you like.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback

Paste a couple of vectors onto the spine too—here, I’ve removed the image fill, and given them a pale blue Color Fill, C=57 M=12 Y=21 K=0.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback

Step 6

Lock the Graphics layer and unlock the top layer, Typography.

Zoom into the spine and create a few rows of text frames using the Type Tool (T). Type in the title, allowing one text frame for each line of the title, and mimic the typography formatting used on the front cover but at a smaller Font Size. Set all the text to Align Center and make sure the frames are perfectly centered along the center guide.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback

Use the Ellipse Tool (L), and hold down Shift, to create a circle on the center of the back cover. Select the Type Tool (T) and click into the circle to transform it into a text frame.indesign tutorial book cover paperback

Add a blurb to the back cover, aligning the text centrally. Here, I’ve set the Font to Columna Solid, Size 10.5 pt, Leading 13 pt. Use the swatch colors we created earlier to add a touch of color to the typography.


 7. Export Your Finished Cover


The artwork for your paperback cover is finished, fantastic work!

All that’s left to do now is to export it ready for printing.

Of course, you can also export Page 1 of your document as an eBook cover (check the file format requirements of the eBook store before you upload it), but here I’ll walk you through the steps of exporting this as a print-ready file, which is suitable for sending to a professional book-printer.

Step 1

Go to File > Export. Choose Adobe PDF (Print) from the Format drop-down menu. Click Save.

In the Export Adobe PDF window, choose [Press Quality] from the Adobe PDF Preset drop-down menu, and  adjust the page range from All to Range: 2, just to export your full cover.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback export pdf

From the left-hand menu in the window, click on Marks and Bleeds. Check All Printer’s Marks and, under Bleed and Slug, Use Document Bleed Settings.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback export pdf

Click Export to create your print-ready cover.

indesign tutorial book cover paperback export pdf

In this tutorial you’ve learned how to give a classic book a modern makeover, and set up the full paperback cover in Adobe InDesign. Awesome work!


Want a free paperback cover InDesign template? Of course you do! Find it on our Templates page.

Looking for some book design inspiration? Head over to our Inspiration page to pore over beautiful book covers, and find great ideas for book typography. Find out more about creating inside pages for your books with this straightforward tutorial.

The post Design a Paperback Book Cover in InDesign: Tutorial appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
6022
Adobe Color CC: Become a Master of Color https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/adobe-color/ Fri, 19 Feb 2016 17:57:24 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=5877 One of the fantastic features of Adobe CC is the Adobe Color CC (formerly Adobe Kuler) feature. This helpful online portal allows you to create ready-to-use color themes for your InDesign layouts, and it’s a great little tool for converting colors to CMYK, RGB, Hex and Lab formats. It’s well worth a look even if you’re […]

The post Adobe Color CC: Become a Master of Color appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
One of the fantastic features of Adobe CC is the Adobe Color CC (formerly Adobe Kuler) feature. This helpful online portal allows you to create ready-to-use color themes for your InDesign layouts, and it’s a great little tool for converting colors to CMYK, RGB, Hex and Lab formats.

It’s well worth a look even if you’re using an earlier InDesign version (CS4, CS5 and CS6). But if you’re a user of CC you’ll also be able to import color palettes directly into your InDesign artwork.


How to Use Adobe Color to Create Color Themes


Using the online Adobe Color platform, which you can use to create your own color palettes (or ‘Color Themes‘). You can create themes in the desktop or mobile Adobe Color app, or create themes in InDesign, Illustrator or Photoshop.

Let’s learn how to use the app and apply Color Themes to your InDesign documents using the online Adobe Color platform.


Step 1: Browse Color Themes Manually


If you’re working in InDesign CC, make sure to open InDesign CC up and open your internet browser too. Ensure that you are logged in with your Adobe ID to Creative Cloud.

In your browser navigate to Adobe Color’s online color wheel. You can play around with the wheel, adjusting the Color Rule on the left-hand side to different settings, such as Analogous…

adobe color cc kuler color wheel color palette theme indesign taking color from photo…or Compound, to create different color combinations and find colors that work well together as a group.

adobe color cc kuler color wheel color palette theme indesign taking color from photo

The wheel translates the colors to RGB format by default, but you can adjust the colors to CMYK by clicking on the RGB values just below a selected color to open a drop-down menu. You can also alter the colors in InDesign directly, which we’ll take a look at a bit later.

adobe color cc kuler color wheel color palette theme indesign taking color from photo


Step 2: Browse Color Themes Using a Photo


You can also choose to lift colors from an image, like a more sophisticated version of the Eyedropper Tool in InDesign.

Remaining in your browser, click on the small camera icon at the top right of the screen. You will be prompted to choose and open an image from your computer.

adobe color cc kuler color wheel color palette theme indesign taking color from photo

I’ve chosen a JPEG photo of an exotic toucan. The image has a variety of color tones I’d like to pick up in Adobe Color.

Adobe Color will automatically pick up a palette of different colors from the image. You can also adjust the Color Mood of the theme; in this example the tones are picked out in a Colorful mood…

adobe color cc kuler color wheel color palette theme indesign taking color from photo

…and this is a Muted combination. Hmmm, what else can we do…

adobe color cc kuler color wheel color palette theme indesign taking color from photo

…you can also go for a Custom combination and click to select your own colors from the image.

adobe color cc kuler color wheel color palette theme indesign taking color from photo

I’ve decided I like the Muted color combination best. Once you’re happy with the Color Theme, you can save it by clicking on the Save* button at the top-left of the window. Give the theme a name, here I’ve gone for ‘Muted Toucan Colors‘.

*You’ll need to be logged in with your Adobe ID to Creative Cloud to save the theme.

adobe color cc kuler color wheel color palette theme indesign taking color from photoFrom the menu running along the top-left of the window you can click on My Themes to view your saved theme.

adobe color cc kuler color wheel color palette theme indesign taking color from photo


Step 3: Apply Your Color Themes in InDesign


To take advantage of this, you’ll need to have access to Adobe InDesign CC.

Return to InDesign and File > Open the document you would like to apply color to.

Go to Window > Adobe > Adobe Color Themes to open the Color Themes panel. The panel’s made up of three windows: Create, Explore, and My Themes.

Under Create, there’s a smaller, more simplified version of the color wheel that you can use to create new Color Themes as you work.

adobe color cc kuler color wheel color palette theme indesign taking color from photo

Under Explore, you’re presented with a library of pre-loaded Color Themes from Adobe, which is a great little tool if you’re stuck for color ideas.

adobe color cc kuler color wheel color palette theme indesign taking color from photo

Finally, under My Themes, you will find your pre-saved Color Themes. Here, as you can see, ‘Muted Toucan Colors‘ is waiting, ready for me to use in my document!

adobe color cc kuler color wheel color palette theme indesign taking color from photo

Before you start applying color, you can choose to add a Color Theme to your collection of Swatches in InDesign. Go to Window > Color > Swatches to open the Swatches panel.

Back in the Adobe Color Themes panel, under My Themes, click Actions to the bottom right of your chosen Color Theme to open a drop-down menu. Select Add to Swatches Panel. Your colors will be added to the Swatches panel. Not only that, InDesign CC has also helpfully grouped them into a folder with the title of your Color Theme. Nice and organized!

If you didn’t save the Color Theme in CMYK mode, and you’re putting together a print document, no worries. Simply Control-Click (Mac OS) or Right-Click (Windows) on an individual swatch in the Swatches panel, choose Swatch Options, and select CMYK from the Color Mode drop-down menu. Click OK.

adobe color cc kuler color wheel color palette theme indesign taking color from photo Now you can start applying your new color swatches to elements in your document! 


How to Use Adobe Color to Convert Color Formats


Even if you’re not a CC user, you can still get some great features out of Adobe Color.

One of these is to use Adobe Color to convert color formats quickly and easily. Say you have a CMYK swatch in InDesign, and want to convert that to an RGB, Lab or even Hex Code format (which is suitable for web design). Admittedly, you can convert CMYK colors to RGB values directly in InDesign, but using the Adobe Color app is super quick and easy. As a bonus, you can’t convert to Hex format unless you use the Color Picker feature in Adobe Photoshop.

Simply navigate to the Adobe Color color wheel, and type in your CMYK values underneath one of the swatch tabs beneath the wheel.

Adobe Color will automatically convert the CMYK color to RGB, Lab, HSB and Hex formats. It’s that easy!

adobe color cc kuler color wheel color palette theme indesign taking color from photoThis is a particularly useful feature if you’re designing within the restrictions of a branded color palette, and need to share color formats with web designers or developers quickly and easily.


Craving more InDesign tips and tricks? Discover how to prepare your colored documents for printing, or check out our broad range of InDesign tutorials.

The post Adobe Color CC: Become a Master of Color appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
5877
Open Corrupt InDesign Files: Make Your Computer Say ‘Yes’! https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/open-corrupt-indesign-files/ Thu, 04 Feb 2016 16:00:17 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=5856 There’s nothing more frustrating than trying to open an InDesign file only to have an message flagged up saying the file is ‘corrupted’ and can’t be opened. Do not despair! Read on to find four quick and easy solutions to deal with the problem pronto! Solution 1: Identify If You’ve Added Anything to the Document Recently You might need […]

The post Open Corrupt InDesign Files: Make Your Computer Say ‘Yes’! appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
There’s nothing more frustrating than trying to open an InDesign file only to have an message flagged up saying the file is ‘corrupted’ and can’t be opened.

Do not despair! Read on to find four quick and easy solutions to deal with the problem pronto!


Solution 1: Identify If You’ve Added Anything to the Document Recently


You might need to get your detective’s hat on…It’s likely that there’s something hiding in your InDesign document that has prompted InDesign to flag up the file as damaged. This could be a something like a damaged image or a dodgy font file.

Were you able to open your file without a problem not that long ago? If so, try to think about what else has been added to the document since that point in time. Recently introduced a new font into the document? It’s probably the corrupting culprit.

If you have back-ups on your computer, or have Time Machine set up if you have a Mac OS, you should be able to open a slightly older version of your file.


Solution 2: Check Your Preferences


Your problem might be something to do with corrupt InDesign Preferences.

To get rid of any corruption in your preferences, relaunch InDesign and straight away hold down Control-Alt-Shift(Windows) or Command-Control-Opt-Shift (Mac OS) and click Yes when prompted with the message Delete InDesign Preference files? Usually this will allow you to open your file without a problem. Hooray!


Solution 3: Resave to a Different File Format


INDD (normal Adobe InDesign format) files are more susceptible to being corrupted than IDML (InDesign CS4 and later) or INX (InDesign CS3 and earlier) file formats.

Try to open your corrupted file on a different computer (e.g. try opening the file on a PC if you normally use a Mac, and vice versa; or try opening on a different version of Windows).

If you are able to open it, go to File > Save and resave the file as an IDML or INX file. You’ll normally have no problems with opening the file in this format.

The file will open up as a new Untitled document, and from here you can File > Save your now uncorrupted document to your preferred folder.


Solution 4: Open a Copy of Your File


Being able to open your corrupted file is sometimes as frustratingly simple as opening up a copy.

Open InDesign and go to File > Open. Navigate to your corrupted InDesign file and click to select it. From the bottom of the Open window, choose Open Copy. InDesign will open the file as an Untitled copy. From here, you can File > Save the file as an uncorrupted copy.

We hope that we’ve helped to make your computer say ‘YES!’

open corrupt indesign files computer says no

Track down more helpful tips for Adobe InDesign over at our Beginner Tutorials page.

The post Open Corrupt InDesign Files: Make Your Computer Say ‘Yes’! appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
5856
Type on a Path in InDesign Tutorial https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/type-on-a-path-indesign/ Tue, 19 Jan 2016 08:39:35 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=5766 We are taking a look at how the Type on a Path Tool can give your typography a curved, fluid style that looks fantastic layered over photography. In this series of tutorials, How Did They Do That?, we dissect the tricks used by graphic design pros and share surprisingly simple tips that will make your InDesign work look […]

The post Type on a Path in InDesign Tutorial appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
We are taking a look at how the Type on a Path Tool can give your typography a curved, fluid style that looks fantastic layered over photography.

In this series of tutorials, How Did They Do That?, we dissect the tricks used by graphic design pros and share surprisingly simple tips that will make your InDesign work look ultra-professional, even if you’re a beginner to the software!


Examples of the Type on a Path Tool


We’re going to focus on how the Type on a Path Tool can be used in magazine design. Image + typography might be the consistent formula for selling issues, but this doesn’t mean the formula needs to be conventional. Magazine designers are always on the lookout for new ways to reinvent their covers.

Layering text in interesting, fluid ways over the top of striking photography is an attention-grabbing way to make covers look more artistic and exciting. It’s also a great technique for making the text interact more naturally with the curves, lines and shapes of an image.

indesign curved text type on a path organic fluid typography fraulein magazine cover design

Text is positioned along the curves of Sophie Hicks’ head, from Fraulein Magazine

indesign curved text type on a path organic fluid typography elle indonesia magazine cover design

Graffiti-style headers sit on irregular baselines, from Elle Indonesia

indesign curved text type on a path organic fluid typography milwaukee magazine cover design

A chalkboard-style cover, from Milwaukee Magazine

This technique might look tricky, but it’s anything but. You can recreate the style easily in Adobe InDesign with the Type on a Path and Pen Tools.

It all comes down to a few simple steps…


Step 1: Create a New Layer for Your Typography


Create a basic cover in Adobe InDesign, to a size that you prefer. On the existing layer, use the Rectangle Frame Tool (F) to create a new image frame, and File > Place a photo in the frame.

Look for photos with strong shapes and curves—portraits of people work well, as do aerial photos with plenty of white space in-between items on the photo (this doesn’t have to be actually white, just one plain background color which will allow text to appear legible).

I’ve used this aerial shot of rolls of bread on a wooden board. There’s plenty of curves and lots of space for placing text, without being interrupted with too much detail beneath.indesign curved text type on a path organic fluid typography magazine cover photo

Create a new layer from the Layers panel (choose New Layer from the panel’s drop-down menu), and rename the layer Typography.

indesign curved text type on a path organic fluid typography layers panel

Lock the bottom layer, to avoid moving the photo around by mistake. You can make room for a header, and subtitle at the top of the page.

indesign curved text type on a path organic fluid typography magazine cover


Step 2: Use the Pen Tool (P)


From the Tools panel choose the Pen Tool, or hit P on the keyboard.

indesign curved text type on a path organic fluid typography pen tool

You can use the Pen Tool in two ways. One, by simply clicking onto the page and creating a series of joined straight lines. The second way, which we’re going to use here, is to click and drag onto the page to create a curved line, then click again to create a second curve joined to the first and so on

Move across to the pasteboard, next to the page, to experiment with creating curved lines with the Pen Tool. You can do this quite easily without a graphics tablet, but it might take a little bit of practice to get the curves looking really smooth and fluid.

indesign curved text type on a path organic fluid typography pen tool

Move back onto the page, and use the Pen Tool to draw smooth curves around one section of your selected photo.

You can use the Direct Selection Tool (A) to select the anchor points and handlesof the line, and adjust them by either dragging or using the arrows on the keyboard. You may also find it useful to set the Stroke Color of the line to a bright, contrasting color for now, to make it easier to see.

indesign curved text type on a path organic fluid typography pen tool


Step 3: Use the Type on a Path Tool (Shift+T)


Once you’ve created your line, head back over to the Tools panel. From the Type Tool drop-down menu, choose the Type on a Path Tool (Shift+T).

Hover your cursor over one edge of the line and click once. The curved line will be transformed into a type path. You can now type in text, and apply formatting in the same way as you would for text in a text frame.

Remove the color of the Stroke and set it to [None].

Here, I’ve used two fonts to create a bold, uppercase effect, set in a white, [Paper], color—Aachen Std

indesign curved text type on a path organic fluid typography type on a path tool

…and Return to Sender.

indesign curved text type on a path organic fluid typography type on a path tool

Repeat the process, using the Pen Tool (P) to draw curved lines around parts of the photo, and then transform them into text paths using the Type on a Path Tool (Shift+T).

indesign curved text type on a path organic fluid typography type on a path tool

Format the text using the Formatting Controls panel at the top of the workspace, or from the Character panel (Window > Type & Tables > Character).indesign curved text type on a path organic fluid typography type on a path tool magazine cover designVary the Font Size, Font and Color to create an eclectic, interesting look.

indesign curved text type on a path organic fluid typography type on a path tool magazine cover design

Great work! Try applying the technique to different photos and layouts—this effect also looks great on posters and cards.


Craving more pro design tips? Discover how to design a movie poster, or how to create an impressive 3D effect for magazine design.

The post Type on a Path in InDesign Tutorial appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
5766
A Quick Guide: Creating & Publishing EPUBs https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/how-to-create-epub-files/ Wed, 13 Jan 2016 08:20:42 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=5721 Creating and publishing your own eBooks and eMagazines is so much fun, and can be financially rewarding too! If you’re new to the EPUB game, this article will take you through the process of getting started—from which software to use to design your EPUB, to where to sell your work. 1. What is an EPUB? An EPUB (Electronic Publication Format) is […]

The post A Quick Guide: Creating & Publishing EPUBs appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Creating and publishing your own eBooks and eMagazines is so much fun, and can be financially rewarding too!

If you’re new to the EPUB game, this article will take you through the process of getting started—from which software to use to design your EPUB, to where to sell your work.


1. What is an EPUB?


An EPUB (Electronic Publication Format) is a broad term which applies to a range of different digital publications. The most commonly known and commonly used EPUB format is the eBook, which can be read on EPUB-compatible devices, like readers and tablets.

EPUB eBook eMagazine digital publishing design

Just like a web page, the structure of an EPUB is based on HTML, and the EPUB can be viewed on a number of digital devices, including tablets, laptops, desktop computers and specialist eReader devices.

If you’re looking to create your first EPUB, there’s something important you need to be aware of—that EPUBs come in two different formats, called Reflowable and Fixed Layout.

A reflowable EPUB contains ‘live text’, which you can select, highlight and search.

You can also change the size of the text and even the typeface in a reflowable EPUB. This will force the lines of text to expand and break onto other lines; to ‘reflow’.

Most text-heavy publications, like novels and textbooks, will be set in a reflowable EPUB format.

EPUB eBook eMagazine digital publishing design text-heavy reflowable

A fixed layout EPUB is just that—the layout is fixed and doesn’t behave responsively when the reader views it.

This actually works really well for more complex eBooks and eMagazines, that perhaps contain a lot of images and have intricate layouts that would suffer if they had a reflowable digital format. The final result may appear a bit more like a PDF (though take note that a PDF is different to an EPUB).

EPUB eBook eMagazine digital publishing design fixed layout eleanor rogers snowboard magazineDesign: Eleanor Rogers

Both reflowable and fixed layout EPUBs are in line with the most recent specification for EPUBs, which is 3.0.1. So, if you export your EPUB to one of the above formats, you’re ready to go ahead and sell your eBook on a commercial eBook or eMagazine site.

But how do you know which of the two EPUB formats is right for you?

If you’re designing a visual-heavy EPUB, like a magazine or photo book, a fixed layout EPUB format is probably going to give you the best result. Your layout arrangements and effects, such as transparencies and gradients, will remain intact.

If you’re typesetting a novel, a reflowable format is probably going to be best; readers will be able to blow up the size of text to help make it more legible; and they’ll also be able to search the book to find particular words, passages or chapters.


2. How Do I Create an EPUB?


EPUBs are designed using a layout software of your choice, that’s suitable for exporting to an EPUB format.

The field of digital publishing is relatively young, and as a result there’s no single market leader in digital publishing software. That’s great for you, as this gives you lots of choice, and depending on your budget and skillset you can choose a software that’s going to suit your needs perfectly.

Here are some of the popular options for creating EPUBs and eMagazines, some of which are paid-for and some free:

Adobe InDesign

An (obvious) favorite of the InDesignSkills team, this print publishing giant has been adapted for designing EPUBs (look to the most recent CC version of the software for the most updated EPUB adaptation), and you can export existing designs to both reflowable and fixed layout formats.

EPUB eBook eMagazine digital publishing design Adobe InDesignEPUB eBook eMagazine digital publishing design Adobe InDesign

InDesign CC is subscription-based, with different payment options for schools, individuals and businesses, but if you’re looking for complete control and professionalism in your EPUB design, InDesign certainly won’t disappoint. It also interacts fluidly with other Adobe software, like Photoshop and Illustrator, allowing you to move content easily between the programmes.

Adobe Digital Publishing Solution

EPUB eBook eMagazine digital publishing design Adobe Digital publishing Solution

Adobe has also created this software, which is aimed directly at digital publishers.

Perfectly suited to creating apps and EPUBs, DPS allows you to design complex layouts for digital devices without the need for coding.

BlueGriffon

EPUB eBook eMagazine digital publishing design Adobe Bluegriffon

BlueGriffon is another great software choice for creating EPUBs, and is probably best suited to more traditional, text-heavy publications. It’s a WYSIWYG editor, like Sigil, and works for Windows, Mac, and Linux.

BlueGriffon is a paid-for subscription-based programme.

Sigil

EPUB eBook eMagazine digital publishing design sigil free

A great choice if you’re on a tight budget, Sigil is completely free to download and use.

It’s an open-source EPUB creation software package for Windows, Mac, and Linux. This software is great if you’re going to be creating more traditional EPUBs, with less interactive content, and it also gives you direct control over the code, which is a handy option to have.

Apple iBooks Author

EPUB eBook eMagazine digital publishing design apple ibooks author mac itunes app

For all you Apple lovers out there, this is a great little free app, aimed at designers wanting to create EPUBs for iPads and Macs.

iBooks Author is an easy-to-use, intuitive and stylish app for creating EPUBs.


3. How Do I Add Interactivity to my EPUB?


Interactive elements, such as video content and animation, add an extra-special touch to EPUBs. They can liven up educational eBooks, and keep eMagazine readers engaged with an extra level of content to explore.

There are now so many ways to integrate more interactive content into your EPUB designs.

Once you have your basic EPUB layout in place you can add animations (try out Adobe Edge Animate), interactive engagement and eLearning content (Adobe Captivate is perfect for creating quizzes and tests) and videos.

EPUB eBook eMagazine digital publishing design interactive content adobe edge animate

Adding touch-sensitive page-turning to your EPUB can also make the reader’s experience more immersive, and imitate that real-life page-turning action.


4. Where Can I Sell My EPUB?


Once you’ve designed your EPUB, you’re ready to share it with the rest of the world!

Some EPUB softwares are designed to link you directly with an eBook store, such as Apple iBooks Author, which encourages you to upload your completed EPUB for sale on the Apple iBooks Store.

Other major eBook stores* that you can check out are:

*A word of caution—different eBook stores may require different sizes and resolutions for your EPUB cover, so be sure to check out the store’s requirements before uploading.

EPUB eBook eMagazine digital publishing design kobo store

Once you’ve picked your design software, created your EPUB, added a dash of interactivity, and sized your cover for your eBook store of choice, you can officially crown yourself as an EPUB expert!

Whether you’re aiming to be the next eBook sensation, or just looking to dip a toe into the world of EPUB design, it’s certainly an expanding and exciting world to be a part of.


Read up on tips for creating books in Adobe InDesign, or discover our dedicated book design section to find even more inspiration for your next project.

The post A Quick Guide: Creating & Publishing EPUBs appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
5721
InDesign Magazine Layouts: Working With Photos https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/3-magazine-layout-tutorials/ Wed, 25 Nov 2015 17:45:28 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=5574 Dramatic photography can look fantastic on InDesign layouts; pick up the techniques you can use to make the most of your images. Discover these simple tips for enhancing your photographic layouts by playing with scale, color and typography. Tip Number 1: Don’t Be Afraid to Go Black-and-White Sure, full-color photos can look amazing, but if you’re looking […]

The post InDesign Magazine Layouts: Working With Photos appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Dramatic photography can look fantastic on InDesign layouts; pick up the techniques you can use to make the most of your images.

Discover these simple tips for enhancing your photographic layouts by playing with scale, color and typography.


Tip Number 1: Don’t Be Afraid to Go Black-and-White


Sure, full-color photos can look amazing, but if you’re looking for something all-together cooler in your layouts, don’t be afraid to use black-and-white photography.

Greyscale images make a superb backdrop for punchy typography, which looks great on magazines, posters and flyers.

working with photos layouts indesign photography graphic design black-and-white photo

To recreate the layout design shown here, just follow the steps below.

Step 1

First up, create a New Document in InDesign (go to File > New > Document) and create your page or spread at the size you would like. Use the Rectangle Frame Tool (F) to draw a frame and expand across the whole page.

Step 2

Download a ready prepared black-and-white image like this one of a desert road, or open up a color photo in Adobe Photoshop and use the Black & White Adjustment available in the Layers panel to desaturate the image of color. Resave the image, and then return to InDesign.

Step 3

With the rectangle frame selected, go to File > Place to drop your black-and-white image inside the frame; then choose Fill Frame Proportionally from the top control panel to fit the image nicely in the frame.working with photos layouts indesign photography graphic design black-and-white photo

Step 4

Expand or open the Layers panel (Window > Layers) and lock Layer 1. Create a new layer on top of this by choosing New Layer… from the panel’s drop-down menu.

You can experiment with your typography on this layer, without worrying about shifting the position of the photo frame below.

working with photos layouts indesign photography graphic design black-and-white photo layers panel

To mimic the style of the text pictured here, download and install the free font Sanchez. Using the Type Tool (T) set each individual letter of the heading in its own separate text frame. Set the Font to Sanchez Regular, and vary the size of the letters to give a sense of movement.

working with photos layouts indesign photography graphic design black-and-white photo

For this particular photo it makes sense that the letters would decrease in size towards the horizon to give the impression of distance, but you might find that a different arrangement will work better for your particular photo choice.

Step 5

Acidic, neon colors work so well against black-and-white photos. Here, I’ve used a zesty, pure yellow. Create a new CMYK swatch from the Swatches panel (Window > Color > Swatches) and set the values to C=0 M=0 Y=83 K=0.

To recreate the hazy effect used across the heading, drag your mouse across the page to select a number of text frames and Right-Click (Windows) or Ctrl-Click (Mac OS) > Group. Then with the group selected, go to Object > Effects > Transparency. Under the Transparency settings set the Mode to Overlay.

working with photos layouts indesign photography graphic design black-and-white photo overlay transparency

Move down the left-hand menu in the Effects window and select Gradient Feather. Adjust the angle and harshness (by adjusting the slider stops) of the gradient.

working with photos layouts indesign photography graphic design black-and-white photo gradient feather

Then click OK once you’re happy with the result.

working with photos layouts indesign photography graphic design black-and-white photo


Tip Number 2: Take a Closer Look…


Playing with the scale of your photos can make a huge difference to the impact of your layout.

If you have a very high-quality image, like this one

working with photos layouts indesign photography graphic design horse

…try zooming into the details to give the photo a more interesting focus. Getting really close-up to the details of a photo is a fantastic way of getting the reader to notice the quality and beauty of a particular photograph.

working with photos layouts indesign photography graphic design horse zoomed in close-up

To edit the scale of images in InDesign, first File > Place your image into an image frame; then double-click inside the frame to directly select the image. Hold down Shift while you drag the corners outwards to maintain the proportions of the photo.


Tip Number 3: Make Photos and Type Interact 


It’s all very well placing text beside or on top of a photo, but sometimes it can look, well, a little dull.

Look out for photos which allow you to place text on top in an interesting, interactive way.

Take this example layout. With the woman positioned centrally on the layout, we have plenty of room to get creative with text. To the left side, the text is set in Adobe Caslon Pro Regular and has a conventional horizontal format.

working with photos images indesign layouts photography animated typography

To the right, to exaggerate the snow being blown from her hands, letters in Adobe Caslon Pro Italic are set in individual text frames and rotated slightly to create a jaunty, animated appearance.

working with photos images indesign layouts photography animated typography

A gradient (Window > Effects > Gradient Feather) applied to the letters as a group adds to the overall effect.

working with photos images indesign layouts photography animated typography


Ready to start using photos in your layouts? First discover breathtaking photo layout inspiration here, or get back to basics with our InDesign images tutorial.

The post InDesign Magazine Layouts: Working With Photos appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
5574
Business Card Sizes: All the Standard Sizes You Need https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/business-card-sizes/ Wed, 11 Nov 2015 17:10:30 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=5406 The size of business cards can vary depending on where in the world you are printing your cards. Read on to find the definitive list of standard sizes for the USA, Australia and Europe, with helpful visual guides. 1. USA Business Card Size A standard US business card size is 89 mm (3.5 in) in Width and […]

The post Business Card Sizes: All the Standard Sizes You Need appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
The size of business cards can vary depending on where in the world you are printing your cards.

Read on to find the definitive list of standard sizes for the USA, Australia and Europe, with helpful visual guides.


1. USA Business Card Size


A standard US business card size is 89 mm (3.5 in) in Width and 51 mm (2 in) in Height.

business card size usa indesign

If you go to create a New Document in InDesign (File > New > Document) you’ll find that a US Business Card custom page size is included by default under the Page Size menu. Helpful!

business card size usa indesign

Make sure to reduce the width of your Margins (between 6 and 8 mm usually looks fine for a US card), and add a Bleed when you set up your document if your card’s going to have a colored background.

business card size usa indesign


2. Australia Business Card Size


A standard Australian business card size is 90 mm (3.543 in) in Width and 55 mm (2.165 in) in Height. This can vary a little depending on your printer, so make sure to check in advance the preferred size used by your supplier of choice.

business card size australia indesign


3. United Kingdom (UK) and Western Europe Business Card Size


UK and Western European (Ireland, France, Spain, Portugal, Belgium, Germany, The Netherlands, Italy, Austria, Switzerland, Luxembourg and Slovenia) business cards tend to be more on the square side of the business card spectrum. Sizes can vary across suppliers, but the most commonly used standard size is 85 mm (3.346 in) in Width and 55 mm (2.165 in) in Height.

business card size uk indesign


Can’t wait to get started with designing your own business cards?

First up, get your creative juices flowing with this inspirational selection of awesome business card designs, then head over to our InDesign Tutorials page to swot up on setting up your card in InDesign.

The post Business Card Sizes: All the Standard Sizes You Need appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
5406
Typography Skills: Hanging Punctuation https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/hanging-punctuation/ Tue, 27 Oct 2015 13:46:41 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=5428 Use this simple InDesign trick to sharpen up your text on posters, magazines and books. This easy-peasy tip is the secret weapon of professional typographers, and will impress your designer friends without a doubt! 1. What is Hanging Punctuation? There are a couple of tricks up the sleeve of a professional graphic designer or typographer to make […]

The post Typography Skills: Hanging Punctuation appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Use this simple InDesign trick to sharpen up your text on posters, magazines and books.

This easy-peasy tip is the secret weapon of professional typographers, and will impress your designer friends without a doubt!


1. What is Hanging Punctuation?


There are a couple of tricks up the sleeve of a professional graphic designer or typographer to make their text formatting look particularly spectacular, and Hanging Punctuation is one of them.

Hanging Punctuation refers to the shifting of small punctuation marks, such as apostrophes and commas, and elements of characters, such as pokey serifs, to outside the normal boundaries of a block of text.

Without applying hung punctuation, paragraphs of text can appear visually uneven, and not seem completely symmetrical or straight. Typographers know that hung punctuation is a subtle but incredibly effective technique for achieving an ultra-professional look in their designs.


2. InDesign to the Rescue: Optical Margin Alignment


You can achieve the hung punctuation effect with next-to-no effort by using InDesign’s handy Optical Margin Alignment function.

Take a look at this magazine spread for the article Spirit of Adventure.

indesign hung punctuation optical margin alignment messy paragraphs typography

Hmm, OK, it’s looking alright; but that apostrophe at the start of the first paragraph sure is taking up a lot of space.

Head up to Window on InDesign’s menu, and go to Type & Tables > Story. This opens up a little-know panel called the Story panel, and in this panel we have an option called Optical Margin Alignment.

indesign hung punctuation optical margin alignment messy paragraphs typography

Just take a look at the difference it makes. Here, we have no Optical Margin Alignment applied.

indesign hung punctuation optical margin alignment messy paragraphs typography

Ta-dah! With the text frame selected and the Optical Margin Alignment checkbox ticked, that great big apostrophe is shifted to outside the boundary of the text frame, and the whole body of text on the rest of the article is subtly shifted; with punctuation marks and serif elements pushed to sit outside the line of the text.

indesign hung punctuation optical margin alignment messy paragraphs typography

Doesn’t it look so much nicer?

indesign hung punctuation optical margin alignment messy paragraphs typography

And it’s as simple as that!

indesign hung punctuation optical margin alignment messy paragraphs typography

Try to get in the habit of applying Hanging Punctuation to any design where you’re dealing with longer paragraphs of text—guaranteed it will make a world of difference to the quality of your typography.

To pick up some more typography tricks and access our library of InDesign articles and tips why not pay a visit to our InDesign tutorials page?

The post Typography Skills: Hanging Punctuation appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
5428
Choosing Font Sizes for Books: Get Your Typesetting Size Right https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/book-font-size/ Wed, 30 Sep 2015 16:33:40 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=5201 If you’re new to ‘typesetting’ books (the process of arranging type on the inside pages), you might feel a bit daunted by the task. Before you begin, you need to decide how big your font sizes should be. Let us guide you through the recommended sizes for typesetting books, and make sure nobody’s going to […]

The post Choosing Font Sizes for Books: Get Your Typesetting Size Right appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
If you’re new to ‘typesetting’ books (the process of arranging type on the inside pages), you might feel a bit daunted by the task. Before you begin, you need to decide how big your font sizes should be.

Let us guide you through the recommended sizes for typesetting books, and make sure nobody’s going to need to strain their eyes.


1. Why Does Font Size Matter?


Typesetting is an unsung hero in the publishing world. When you read a book that has high-quality typesetting, you probably won’t even notice it. Good typesetting will make the book more legible, easy-on-the-eye and be superbly suited to the genre and context of the book.

Font size is the most crucial factor in typesetting a book, but it can be tricky to get it just right. The ‘ideal’ font sizes listed at the bottom of the article are given as part of a recommended range. Whether you lean towards the smaller or larger end of the range will depend on some of the following factors. Take note, and choose your type size in accordance:

Q: Is the book long or short?

A publisher might want to be economic with the number of pages if a book is going to be long. If that’s the case, edge towards the smaller end of the size scale. You can also reduce the size of the Margins on your pages to squeeze more text onto the page.

If the book’s short, a publisher might want to increase the number of pages to make the book look fatter, and therefore appear to be of higher value to a browser. Increase your font size (and your Leading [the space between lines of text]) if this is the case.

typesetting books best font size for books

Q: Who is the Readership?

Who is the book aimed at? This ties in with the genre of the book as well. Will the audience be intellectual (literary and classic fiction), or will they be looking for a quick, absorbing read (‘airport’ fiction, romance, thrillers, young adult fiction)? Are they adults or children (children’s books will often need a much larger font size)?

Some genres go hand-in-hand with a particular font size. It seems like an unspoken rule that more intellectual fiction requires a smaller font size, and therefore more concentration (or eye-strain, whichever way you see it) to read it. Nonetheless, a very slightly smaller font size communicates intelligence and seriousness, and will suit modern literary fiction and classic novels equally well.

Larger font sizes are more digestible, and will be more suited to typesetting 50 Shades of Grey than a Franz Kafka reprint.

So make sure to consider your readership, and the sort of font sizes they will be expecting to encounter.

typesetting books best font size for books

2. The Perfect Font Size for Books


Of course, everybody has different preferences for book font size, and quality of eyesight can be a factor in shaping these preferences.

But assuming most people will fall in the middle of the spectrum (neither eagle-eyed nor poor-sighted) these font size ranges for headings and body text should cut the mustard each and every time…

Body Text:

Minimum 10 pt — Maximum 12 pt

Chapter Headings (‘A’ Headings):

Minimum 14 pt — Maximum 16 pt

Sub-titles (‘B’ Headings):

Minimum 12 pt — Maximum 14 pt

Make sure to think about your Leading too—as a general rule, try to make it a little more generous than the Auto leading value in InDesign.

typesetting books best font size for books

Once you’ve decided on your perfect font size, you’ll need to find the perfect font too! Discover our pick of the only 5 fonts you’ll ever need for books or brush up on your skills for creating books in InDesign.

The post Choosing Font Sizes for Books: Get Your Typesetting Size Right appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
5201
Which File Format?: A Guide to INDD, IDML, INX and Everything In-Between https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/open-indesign-files-in-earlier-versions/ Tue, 15 Sep 2015 11:48:29 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=5154 It’s all very well if your boss, colleague or printer asks for an ‘InDesign file’. But what should you send them if they’re using a different version of the software? Use this guide to navigate the murky waters of InDesign file formats, and wise-up on the difference between INDD and IDML, and the right way […]

The post Which File Format?: A Guide to INDD, IDML, INX and Everything In-Between appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
It’s all very well if your boss, colleague or printer asks for an ‘InDesign file’. But what should you send them if they’re using a different version of the software?

Use this guide to navigate the murky waters of InDesign file formats, and wise-up on the difference between INDD and IDML, and the right way to down-save or up-save your files.


1. The Dual Nature of InDesign File Formats


When you create and save a file in Adobe InDesign, you’ll notice that the file has been given the extension .indd. INDD is the extension given to all InDesign files created in the standard way in any version of the design software, whether that’s InDesign CS3, CS4, CS5, CS6 or CC.

If you navigate to an InDesign file in your Finder (Mac OS) or Windows Explorer, you’ll also notice that the InDesign file has been classified in an additional way, under Kind. This indicates which version of InDesign the file was created in; in this case we can see that the file has been created in InDesign CC 2015.

indesign file format indd idml cc can't open indesign file

It is this Kind categorisation that prevents you from opening a CC file in say CS5 or CS6. If you try to open it up, an error message will flag up, informing you that the file is not of a supported file type and cannot be opened in an older version of InDesign.


2. How to Open your Files in any Software Version


Adobe wants to encourage all InDesign users to gravitate to CC, the newest subscription-based version of the software. But this may not be the right choice for everybody—some designers are loyal to older versions of InDesign because of their familiarity with the programme, others might be discouraged by the cost of a subscription-based service.

And guess what? That’s absolutely fine, because you can open any InDesign file in any other version of InDesign if you save the file in the right way.

indesign file format indd idml cc can't open indesign file

If you want to be able to open a file created in an older version of InDesign in a newer version you should have few problems with opening INDD files just as they are. But to down-save (open a file in an older version to the original) or up-save if you’re having problems opening the original file you need to save your work as an IDML file (or INX file for opening in CS3, see below).

An IDML (InDesign Markup) file is a ‘legacy’ file format. Saving your InDesign file as an IDML file allows users of different versions of InDesign to open up the file without a problem.

Saving a CC or CS6 file for opening in CS4, CS5 or CS5.5:

To save your INDD InDesign file as an IDML file, open up the file in InDesign, and go to File > Save As. Select InDesign CS4 or later (IDML) from the drop-down Format menu, and click Save.

indesign file format indd idml cc can't open indesign file

You now have an IDML version of your original InDesign file.

indesign file format indd idml cc can't open indesign file

Saving a CS5 or CS5.5 file for opening in CS4:

With your INDD file opened up, go to File > Export. Choose IDML from the drop-down Format menu and click Save.

Saving a CS5, CS5.5 CS6 or CC file for opening in CS3:

Unfortunately you can’t save back directly from CS5 for opening in CS3. To do this you will have to down-save to CS4 first.

With the INDD file open in CS5 or later choose File > Export. Choose IDML from the Format drop-down menu and hit Save.

Open the IDML file in InDesign CS4. From here, go to File > Export and this time choose InDesign Interchange (INX) as the file Type (Windows) or Format (Mac OS). Click Save to create your INX file, which is now suitable for opening in InDesign CS3.

IMPORTANT: To share your work with others, you should be sure to send a copy of your original INDD file along with the IDML file. The IDML file is linked to the original INDD file; and the IDML file acts as a sort of key which is able to unlock the INDD file.

The best way to share your compatible files with others is to first Package your InDesign file, and then save the IDML file into the packaged folder.

To send the file over email or large file transfer, simply compress the packaged folder (containing both the INDD and IDML files) and attach.

To learn more about using InDesign and develop your design skills pay a visit to our beginner InDesign tutorials page.

The post Which File Format?: A Guide to INDD, IDML, INX and Everything In-Between appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
5154
Why Does My Printer Hate Me?: This Advice Will Make Them Love You… https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/indesign-printing-help/ Fri, 31 Jul 2015 13:59:06 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=5004 If you’re picking up frosty vibes from your (un)friendly neighbourhood printer, it’s probably because you’re providing them with print files that simply don’t cut the mustard. These are some of the most common head-wringing printer problems when they encounter client files, and tips on how to get them sorted out. In no time at all, […]

The post Why Does My Printer Hate Me?: This Advice Will Make Them Love You… appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
If you’re picking up frosty vibes from your (un)friendly neighbourhood printer, it’s probably because you’re providing them with print files that simply don’t cut the mustard.

These are some of the most common head-wringing printer problems when they encounter client files, and tips on how to get them sorted out. In no time at all, you and your printer are going to be best buds!


1. You’ve cropped everything to the trim edge…


You may think you’re being helpful getting everything tidied up and looking nice and neat, but if you’re cropping all your images and background colour to the edge of the page (the ‘trim’ edge), that means you won’t have a Bleed on your final print file. A bleed extends content past the edge of the page, which minimises the visibility of trimming errors at the end of the print process.

So why does my printer hate me??

The printer will have to either get you to re-export the file with a bleed, or access the native (original InDesign) file and manually extend everything past the trim edge themselves. Which takes time…and money.

What can I do about it?

Include a bleed in your artwork, and make sure you include it when you go to export your document to a print-ready file (e.g. PDF). This quick tutorial will give you the details: How to prepare a bleed in your InDesign documents.

bleed trim indesign


2. You’ve set the document at the wrong size…


So you’ve created a stunning business card design, and placed it in the middle of a letter-sized page. When you gave it to the printer they audibly groaned. What gives?

So why does my printer hate me??

You should always size your documents to their final print size. So if you’re creating a business card in InDesign, set the page size at a business card size; don’t place your design in the centre of a larger page. Or even worse – NEVER set a number of repeated designs on one large page. Nightmare.

What can I do about it?

Use the New Document window in InDesign (File > New > Document) to set the right size for your document from the outset; or use the Page Tool (Shift+P) to resize pages flexibly as you work.

Read this tutorial to master the New Document window.

indesign best fonts for marketing stationery branding laura solana architect


3. You’ve included random Spot Colors or RGB Swatches…


You’ve sent your printer your original InDesign file, which they process and print. But then the print bill comes back…and it’s much more than expected. But why?!

So why does my printer hate me??

It seems pretty likely that you’ve included some unwanted Spot Colors in your design. This means that they have to be pulled onto a different printing plate, which adds time and money to the job. If your printer really doesn’t like you they might go ahead and print regardless; but if they’re nice they might suggest you sort out your colours pronto. If you’ve also included any RGB Color Swatches in your design, this is going to make the final printed result really unpredictable as well.

What can I do about it?

Get savvy about all things colour-related with our beginner’s guide to colour in print design. Adjust all your colour swatches to CMYK (not RGB), and only include Spot Colors if you really, really have to.

CMYK color colour indesign


4. You’ve exported your file as ‘Printer’s Spreads’…


So you’ve arranged the pages in your print-ready file in the order they will be printed and bound, not necessarily in the order they will be read. Helpful right?

So why does my printer hate me??

Afraid to say, that’s not helpful at all. You should always export your file as Reader’s Spreads (i.e. the order the pages would be read by the reader). Don’t sweat about getting your file in the order it’s going to be bound (e.g. a page near the front of a book or magazine sitting opposite a page near the end of the document); the printer will sort that out in the way they know best.

What can I do about it?

Export your InDesign document in the order of pages as you created it originally; no need to do anything fancy. And always export your file as pages, not spreads. If you’re worried about the printer not understanding how you want everything to be printed, provide them with a rough mock-up.

Feel ultra-confident about preparing your work for print with our handy two-part guide.

threading text linking text frames text boxes indesign skills book


5. You’ve sent the printer your InDesign file…


Why send a print-ready PDF when I can send my original InDesign file, right? OK, well, that’s fine as long as they have the relevant version of the software to be able to open your file. But hold on, your file is just that – just a file on its own.

So why does my printer hate me??

If you send the printer your ‘native’ (InDesign) file the printer will have the freedom to export the file to a print-ready format that suits their purposes. But that’s no use if you just send the printer your InDesign file in isolation. If you’ve not packaged your file, and provided the full folder of packaged Links and Font files, the printer won’t be able to see your InDesign document as you intended it. It will be riddled with errors and blurry images, and simply not fit-for-purpose.

What can I do about it?

When you’ve finished working on your InDesign file make sure that you package it (File > Package).

Read up on our straightforward guide to packaging your documents and make your printer a very happy bunny.

indesign color metallic bronze bete et fete

Take these tips to heart and you and your printer will be the best of friends guaranteed!

The post Why Does My Printer Hate Me?: This Advice Will Make Them Love You… appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
5004
Five Ways to Improve your Layouts Instantly… https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/improve-indesign-layout/ Tue, 21 Jul 2015 13:58:12 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=4945 You began creating your layout in InDesign with so much enthusiasm, but despite your hard work it’s still looking, well, a bit ‘meh’. Panic not! Here are 5 ways to spice up your designs super quickly and easily, and make them look instantly more attractive, polished and professional! 1. Make your Margins Wider Never underestimate the transformative […]

The post Five Ways to Improve your Layouts Instantly… appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
You began creating your layout in InDesign with so much enthusiasm, but despite your hard work it’s still looking, well, a bit ‘meh’.

Panic not! Here are 5 ways to spice up your designs super quickly and easily, and make them look instantly more attractive, polished and professional!


1. Make your Margins Wider


Never underestimate the transformative power of a generous margin around the edges of your page(s). It really is the simplest tip for making layouts look instantly more visually appealing, and giving text and graphics more breathing space.

Adjust your margins in InDesign by going to Layout > Margins and Columns, accessible from the top menu. Try increasing your existing margins by an extra 5 mm, and see your layout look more attractive pronto!

indesign tips to improve layouts designs margins


2. Limit your Colour Palette


Colour has the power to transform the mood of your designs, but introducing too much colour can make a layout appear cluttered and messy. Try to limit your use of colour to no more than three colour swatches to a page—you’ll be amazed how bold and punchy your design can become!

Another colour tip to make your posters and brochures look ultra-dramatic and to draw attention to headers and logos is to use just one colour on an otherwise monochrome layout. In the example below, white and black tones allow the red text to really pop and draw the eye.

Edit colour in InDesign using the Swatches panel (Window > Color > Swatches). Learn more about using colour in InDesign with our handy beginner’s guide to colour.

indesign tips to improve layouts designs margins


3. White Space is your New Best Friend!


Whenever you design your layouts remember this mantra: less is (almost) always more (I say almost because ornate layouts can look lovely in the right context; see Tip 5 below…). Even layouts that have a lot going on—text, graphics, colour, the lot!—will always benefit from a bit of breathing space.

This is what graphic designers call ‘white space’, which is effectively space on the page that’s empty of visual content. It doesn’t necessarily need to be white in colour; just a blank bit of background with nothing on it. This helps focus the eye on the content you want to draw the viewer’s attention to, and it makes the layout much less stressful to look at.

Introduce more white space on your layout by cutting down on the quantity of content or resizing elements to create more room on the page. Try to stick to a maximum of two main focal points on the layout, like in this example, where the image and header are the only things seeking your attention.

indesign tips to improve layouts designs white space


4. Tweak your Typography…


…Is your text looking a little lacklustre? Adding a Drop Cap to the start of your opening paragraph or increasing your Leading (the space between lines of text) may be subtle changes, but they can work wonders for improving your designs. Setting your headings and sub-headings in different Weights (Bold, Italic, Light, Black etc) can also create visual separation in text-heavy layouts.

Another tip used by design professionals is to apply Optical Margin Alignment to paragraphs of text. This creates ‘Hung Punctuation’, shifting punctuation marks outside the boundaries of a text frame, creating a more uniform block of text. InDesign will also subtly move any overhanging serifs on letters, so your text looks more perfected and polished.

You can find the Optical Margin Alignment option in the Story panel in InDesign (Window > Type & Tables > Story).

indesign tips to improve layouts designs typography text drop cap story panel optical margin alignment


5. Get Fancy with a Border!


Minimal layouts can look beautiful—clean, uncluttered and easy on the eye. But what if your layout’s looking more bare than minimal? Sometimes, a little touch of something fancy can lift your layout and transform it into something special.

The easiest way to give your layouts a touch of the ornate is to introduce a Border. Borders frame your content, drawing the eye inwards, just as a picture frame helps to focus the eye on the image it contains.

Create a border in InDesign by using the Rectangle Tool (M), accessible from the Tools panel. Use your margin lines as guides for getting the border perfectly sized; then adjust the look of the border using the Stroke panel (Window > Stroke) and Corner Options (Object > Corner Options). Here, I’ve used a ‘Thin-Thick-Thin’ Stroke Type and a ‘Fancy’ Corner Shape.

indesign tips to improve layouts designs border

Take note of these five tips when you create your own layouts—you’ll be amazed how a few subtle tweaks can transform your designs! And remember, above all, have fun with creating layouts. Design is meant to be fun; so feel confident with experimenting and breaking the rules (in moderation!).

Enhance your layout designs with some fresh font inspiration for magazinesbooks, or print design; or check out our beginner InDesign tutorials page for more tips and tutorials!

The post Five Ways to Improve your Layouts Instantly… appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
4945
Crash Course: How to Format Text Part 2 https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/how-to-format-text-2/ Thu, 02 Jul 2015 11:27:50 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=4877 In Part One of the crash course we looked at what typography was and how you can format your type using the Controls panel in InDesign. In this, the second part, we’ll delve further into the world of typography and look at the ‘Big Four’ – the four special typographic effects you can apply to […]

The post Crash Course: How to Format Text Part 2 appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
In Part One of the crash course we looked at what typography was and how you can format your type using the Controls panel in InDesign.

In this, the second part, we’ll delve further into the world of typography and look at the ‘Big Four’ – the four special typographic effects you can apply to your InDesign layouts to make them really stand-out…


1. Leading


Leading is the unsung workhorse of typography. If you’re looking at a paragraph of type and thinking “That looks great, but I can’t put my finger on why it looks so great”, it’s probably because the designer has applied some generous Leading to the text.

Leading is the word used to describe the space allocated between the lines of text in a block of type. Take a look at this example – at the top you’ve got a body of text with a default amount of leading applied, but the text on the page below that has a more generous leading. And it’s clear to see which one looks more clear and legible…

typography indesign leadingtypography indesign leading

Leading is super simple to edit in InDesign; you can find the option to adjust it in the Character Formatting Controls panel, below the Font Size option:

typography indesign leading


2. T r a c k i n g


Tracking is the second of the typography ‘Big Four’ you should make a note of. Tracking defines the space between all characters (letters) in a section of text.

Upping the Tracking of type can make it instantly more legible, attractive and high-impact, without needing to increase the Font Size or adjust the Font Weight (e.g. to Bold or Black). Take a look at these two example chapter headings from the typesetting for an edition of Moby Dick. The lower example, with its increased Tracking, looks a bit more interesting, no?

indesign typography tracking letter spacing

You can find the option to adjust Tracking in InDesign, up in the Character Formatting Controls panel (when you have the Type Tool (T) selected), just along from the All Caps section. It’s symbolised by a two letters, ‘AV’ and a double-ended arrow. Hover over the icon and you’ll see that InDesign reminds you that this is for increasing or decreasing Tracking. 

indesign typography tracking letter spacing

By default, when you create any new text, the Tracking will be set to 0. But you can pick from a range of options for the spacing of your letters. You can reduce the space by picking from the negative values, giving the text a more compressed appearance, or you can choose to increase the spacing.


3. Kerning


Kerning is a much more subtle typographic technique, but it can really transform your type, and elevate it to a super-professional level. Kerning increases the space between individual characters, and it’s a great technique for evening out text that looks a little off-balance. It’s a particularly useful feature for transforming logos and headings.

Take a look at this example and play a game of ‘spot-the-difference’! If you think the lower heading looks a little more even and symmetrical you’d be right – a little bit of kerning between a couple of the letters has helped space out some of the characters that were a bit closer together.

indesign typography kerning

To adjust Kerning in InDesign, set your type cursor between the two letters, head back up to the Character Formatting Controls panel and find the Kerning option just above the Tracking option. Click the arrow to the right of the text box to increase the space between the two letters by 10 units at a time.

indesign typography kerning


4. Drop Caps


Another really cool typography feature in InDesign which can really pull your designs together is the option to apply a Drop Cap to your text.

A Drop Cap pulls out the first letter or few letters of a paragraph to a larger size, in units of lines of text. You can find the Drop Cap Number of Lines and Drop Cap One or More Characters options in the Character Formatting Controls panel, just along from the alignment and indent settings.drop cap controls panel indesignA Drop Cap is a great technique for drawing attention to the start of a large body of text, and gives books, magazines and brochures a formal, elegant appearance. In this example, I’ve set the Drop Cap Number of Lines to 4.

drop cap indesign

For a quirkier typographic effect, you can increase the Drop Cap One or More Characters to pull more characters into the Drop Cap. Here, I’ve increased the Drop Cap One or More Characters to 4.

drop cap indesign

PRO TIP: Give your Drop Cap more breathing space by pushing the rest of the text further away from the Drop Cap. Set your cursor between the Drop Cap letter and the first letter of the remaining text, and increase the Kerning to move all the text adjacent to the Drop Cap.

Refresh your knowledge of typography basics with Part One of this tutorial or find some font inspiration for magazines, books, or print design to get started with using your typographic skills!


To learn more about using InDesign and expanding your skillset pay a visit to our beginner InDesign tutorials page.

The post Crash Course: How to Format Text Part 2 appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
4877
Crash Course: How to Format Text Part 1 https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/how-to-format-text-1/ Thu, 02 Jul 2015 11:25:10 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=4830 ‘Typography’ is a term used to describe how text can be formatted and arranged to make it look attractive and appealing; and it’s at the heart of every great print design. Adobe InDesign just happens to be perfectly adapted to help you create beautiful, eye-catching typographic effects. In the first part of this two-part tutorial, we’ll […]

The post Crash Course: How to Format Text Part 1 appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
‘Typography’ is a term used to describe how text can be formatted and arranged to make it look attractive and appealing; and it’s at the heart of every great print design. Adobe InDesign just happens to be perfectly adapted to help you create beautiful, eye-catching typographic effects.

In the first part of this two-part tutorial, we’ll give you a crash course in the basics of typography in InDesign, and find out:

  • What ‘Typography’ actually is, and how you can create it in InDesign
  • How you can format your text using the Character and Paragraph Formatting Controls panels

1. What is ‘Typography’ and How Do I Create it in InDesign?


InDesign is designed to give you flexibility and professional control over your typography.

What do we mean by ‘typography’? Well, typography is a term we use to describe text that has been specially formatted to create a particular look—typography can transform text from dull and illegible to beautiful and clear to read.

Here, the designer has transformed the text on this magazine cover to give it a playful, lively and 3D appearance. Check out more examples of creative typography in print design here.

Magazine: Harper’s Bazaar España; Publisher: SpainMedia

indesign inspiration playful text typography harper's bazaar spain

InDesign is designed to give you flexibility in formatting your typography. Because it’s a publishing design application, InDesign’s main focus is on helping you to create layouts, and text is a fundamental element of any layout. Master the basics of typography and there’s no limit to what you can produce in InDesign.

To create typographic effects in InDesign, you first need to select the Type Tool (T) from the Tools panel, and drag onto the page to create a text frame.

typography indesign type tool

Place your type cursor into the frame to type some text, or import a Word document. Now you’re ready to apply formatting, and transform your text from simple type to extraordinary typography!


2. Get Familiar with the Character Formatting Controls panel…


…Let’s take a good look at the Controls panels which are going to allow us to apply formatting to text. You can find these up at the top of the InDesign workspace.

Just below the Application Bar, where you can see the InDesign logo, is the Controls panel. With just the default Selection Tool active, the Controls panel just shows navigational options, such as the position of your cursor on the page.

If we go over to the Tools panel, which is docked on the left-hand side of the Workspace, and click the ‘T’ symbol to select the Type Tool (T), and then click and drag on the page to create a text frame, you’ll notice that the Controls panel has suddenly changed.

typography indesign character formatting controls panel

Now there’s a small ‘A’ symbol to the far left of the panel. This indicates that the panel is now showing all the Character Formatting Controls. This includes all the options you need for formatting type.

typography indesign character formatting controls panel

So if I click into a text frame I’ve created and type in the word ‘Foodie’ and then highlight the word, I can start to play around with the look of the text using what’s available to me in this control panel.

First up, you can change the Font of the text. Click on the little arrows symbol to the right of this box, which should have Minion Pro set as its default, and you’ll find a long drop-down menu of all the fonts you have installed on your computer.

Let’s scroll down to ‘G’ and pick Gill Sans. And then just below the menu of fonts, or from the drop-down menu next to the font itself in the font list, we can also pick the Weight of the font – such as Bold, Italic, Light, SemiBold, etc.

typography indesign gill sans font

We can adjust the Size of the text from up here too, which is measured out in points, by either selecting a value from the drop-down menu or by manually typing in a size directly into the box. 

typography indesign font size


3. Expand your Typographic Know-How with the Paragraph Formatting Controls panel…


Now take a look at the far left of the Controls panel, where you can see the ‘A’ symbol. Below that there’s a little paragraph icon. Click on that and the Controls panel shifts again. Now we’re viewing the Paragraph Formatting Controls panel.

typography indesign paragraph formatting controls panel

This panel has everything you need to use to format a whole paragraph of text. There are some things that are repeated here with the Character Formatting Controls panel, things like Font and Font Size options are still here, but they’ve been shifted over to the right side of the panel. Back over to the left-hand side, we’ve got all these new options to play with.

typography indesign paragraph formatting controls panel

There are lots of new options that apply to larger sections of text. So if I just click my type cursor into this ‘New equipment and fittings for the home’ section of text in a text frame I created earlier, from the Paragraph Formatting Controls panel we can adjust things like the Alignment of the text, from this first section of the panel, and also apply things like Indents from the next section along.

typography indesign paragraph formatting

Further along, you can also see a little check-box next to ‘Hyphenate’ which you can uncheck if you don’t want InDesign to split your words with hyphens, and instead tell it to push whole words onto the following line.

typography indesign hyphenate

Basically whatever you set here, up in the Controls panel, will apply to just the paragraph of text that you have either highlighted or positioned your cursor into.

To recap, if you want to format isolated pieces of text, whether that’s several characters, words or phrases, you can use the Character Formatting Controls panel options, which will appear automatically when you select the Type Tool from the Tools panel.

typography indesign character formatting controls panel

If you want to format larger portions of text, like whole paragraphs, and be able to effect things like Alignment of text and Indents, you should click the paragraph symbol in the panel to switch to the Paragraph Formatting Controls panel. 

typography indesign paragraph formatting controls panel

Get friendly with both of the Controls panel, and you’ll be able to format your typography really quickly and easily!

typography indesign magazine cover

Check out Part Two of this tutorial to find out why you should get friendly with the Big Four of Typography: Leading, Tracking, Kerning and Drop Caps.


For more useful InDesign tutorials and tips pay a visit to our beginner InDesign tutorials page.

The post Crash Course: How to Format Text Part 1 appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
4830
InDesign Secret: How to Get Rid of Excessive Overset Text https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/remove-overset-text/ Thu, 25 Jun 2015 14:32:20 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=4865 Nobody wants to spend ages manually selecting and deleting unwanted overset text that might run into a huge number of words. Read on to find out how you can quickly and easily delete excessive text without compromising your sanity… 1. The Tip That Will Banish Overset Text from your Documents… We’ve all been there—perhaps opened up […]

The post InDesign Secret: How to Get Rid of Excessive Overset Text appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Nobody wants to spend ages manually selecting and deleting unwanted overset text that might run into a huge number of words.

Read on to find out how you can quickly and easily delete excessive text without compromising your sanity…


1. The Tip That Will Banish Overset Text from your Documents…


We’ve all been there—perhaps opened up a document from a third party to find huge amounts of overset text errors or simply made the mistake of importing too much text in the first place. Rather than spending the time manually accessing and deleting the overset text…(I mean, seriously, who has time to highlight and delete pages upon pages of text?)…you can use a simple keyboard shortcut to select all the text sitting past where you place your type cursor.

First up, you may want to find out how much overset text you’re dealing with here; which is when the InDesign Story Editor feature comes in handy.

But you may just want to get rid of that text asap, and give your InDesign Preflight the green light. If that’s the case, take the Type Tool (T), then place your cursor at the end of the section of text you want to keep. Then use this keyboard shortcut to select all the remaining text, even text that isn’t visible on the document:

indesign delete overset text unwanted text too much text in text frame

Use Ctrl if you’re using a Windows system, and Cmd if you’re on a Mac OS. If you can’t find an ‘End’ key on your mac keyboard, hold down the down arrow for a few seconds instead, to select all the text to the end.

Then simple hit Delete to banish the text forever, and make your Preflight panel very happy!

Discover more about threading text in InDesign efficiently through your InDesign documents, and how to create a book in InDesign. Looking for more tutorials and tips? Head on over to our InDesign tutorials page.

The post InDesign Secret: How to Get Rid of Excessive Overset Text appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
4865
InDesign Basics: Proof your InDesign work with Preflight https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/preflight-indesign/ Tue, 02 Jun 2015 08:25:34 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=4737 You’ve spent ages perfecting your InDesign document, and you’re just about ready to send it to print. Hold press! You should always perform a final proof of your work by using the Preflight panel. In this quick tip, we’ll take a look at: Why you should proof your InDesign documents How you can use the Preflight panel […]

The post InDesign Basics: Proof your InDesign work with Preflight appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
You’ve spent ages perfecting your InDesign document, and you’re just about ready to send it to print. Hold press! You should always perform a final proof of your work by using the Preflight panel. In this quick tip, we’ll take a look at:
  • Why you should proof your InDesign documents
  • How you can use the Preflight panel to perform a technical proof of your work


1. Why do I need to proof my InDesign work?


It’s amazing how many errors can become glaringly obvious on a printed document, compared to just glancing over it when it’s up on screen. But sadly there’s no ‘Undo’ button when your printed items get delivered. Proofing your InDesign work before you send it to print is an essential step in minimizing the number of errors, both in terms of content and on a technical level.

Before you even look into performing a Preflight, which we’ll take a more in-depth look at here, you should check for spelling errors by conducting a spell check. You can also get some more stats about the text content in your document by seeing what you can find out from the Info panel.

OK, so what is Preflight? It sounds like something you might have to do before an aircraft takes off, and it is really the same idea, but instead for preparing a design document to ‘take off’ from the screen to go to the printing press.

indesign preflight proof print

Before you can export your InDesign document to a print-ready format, you need to make sure that everything is going to print in the way that you want it to. The Preflight panel is going to flag up any technical issues that might cause a problem when you want to package your InDesign file, export it, or send it to a printer.


2. How do I perform a ‘Preflight’?


Preflight is an essential part of the InDesign proof process, and is especially important for addressing technical errors, like missing images, missing fonts or overset text.

Let’s see the Preflight panel in action…

…Here we have an open InDesign document. And at first glance, all looks fine. But then, if I take a look down at the bottom left of the screen, I notice a little red circle, next to some text reading ‘3 errors’. As long as there is a red circle here, this means that there are errors in the document that need to be addressed before I send the document to print.

indesign preflight errors red

If I double-click on the red circle, I will open up the Preflight panel. You can also access the Preflight panel from the top menu, under Window > Output > Preflight.

First up, at the top left of the panel you can see a check box for turning Preflight On and Off. As a rule, you should always have Preflight set to On. This means that InDesign will actively flag up technical errors as you work, and update them to ‘No errors’ as you resolve them.

indesign preflight panel errors red

In the main part of the panel is the Error window. In this window, Preflight lists the errors it’s found, and categorises them into different groups. At the top here, there’s one Links error, for example.

If I click on the grey arrow to the left of the text, the error message expands, to reveal it’s a missing link. Clicking the grey arrow again the name of the missing link is revealed. If you double-click the name of the link, InDesign will take you directly to it in your document. Handy!

indesign preflight panel errors red text

Click to select the name of the link in the Preflight panel, then expand the Info window at the bottom of the panel. InDesign is trying to help you out here, so it tells you what the specific problem is, and how you can resolve it.

It’s telling me to head over to the Links panel and use the Relink button to find the missing file. With the missing link highlighted – it will be flagged up with a red question mark if missing – I click on the Relink button, symbolised by a chain link, at the bottom of the top section of the Links panel.

indesign preflight missing link image

From here, I can track down the missing link, and click Open to relink it. Find out more about working with images in InDesign here.

That’s the missing link resolved, and I can see in the Preflight panel that the missing link error has vanished, and I’m left now with just two errors to deal with.

indesign preflight text error

These remaining errors are something to do with Text, and I can find out more by again clicking the grey arrows to reveal the specific error, and then the specific location of the text error. What we’ve got here is two instances of overset text, where text is overspilling a text frame.

indesign preflight text error overset text

If I double-click on the Text Frame name, I’m taken directly to the text frame with the overset text.

indesign preflight text error overset text

I then take my cursor and drag the frame down to extend it, until the text error disappears from the Preflight panel.

indesign preflight text error overset text

After resolving all the errors flagged up in the Preflight panel, the Preflight circle turns green and a message comes up at the bottom of the panel reading ‘No errors’. That’s when you know your Preflight is complete, and you’re ready to prepare your document to send to print.

indesign preflight no errorsThe Preflight panel is a simple, one-stop solution for addressing technical errors in your InDesign layouts. Taking just 5 minutes to run a Preflight before you prepare your document for sending to a colleague or sending to print will make a huge difference to the final quality of your work. And you won’t be biting your nails when that print delivery box arrives!

Click to find out more about conducting a spell check of your InDesign work and how to add a bleed to your print designs. Looking for more tutorials and tips? Head on over to our InDesign tutorials page.

The post InDesign Basics: Proof your InDesign work with Preflight appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
4737
How to Prepare Your InDesign Work for Print: Part 2 of 2 https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/prepare-for-print-two/ Wed, 20 May 2015 15:01:34 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=4598 Have confidence exporting and sending your InDesign work to print with Part Two of our essential guide. Consider everything listed here and in Part One, and there’s no need to fear sending your work to the press. Here in Part Two we’ll take you through: Why you should export to ‘Reader’s Spreads’ How to accommodate for trimming […]

The post How to Prepare Your InDesign Work for Print: Part 2 of 2 appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Have confidence exporting and sending your InDesign work to print with Part Two of our essential guide.

Consider everything listed here and in Part One, and there’s no need to fear sending your work to the press. Here in Part Two we’ll take you through:

  • Why you should export to ‘Reader’s Spreads’

  • How to accommodate for trimming and binding

  • Choosing paper weights and finishes

  • How to export and package your InDesign work

  • Asking for a proof and providing a mock-up

  • How to pick the right printing method for the job


1. Why you should export to ‘Reader’s Spreads’, not ‘Printer’s Spreads’


If you’re creating a document with multiple pages, such as a book, for sending to print, you might notice from existing examples of printed books that a page in the first chapter of a book is often physically connected to a page in the last chapter, forming a single spread.

The printed book has been put together by the printer using ‘Printer’s Spreads’. This is when the printer rearranges the order of the pages in order for the book to be bound.

Your job, however, is not to export your ‘print-ready’ file set up as Printer’s Spreads. It’s much simpler, both for you and the printer, if you set up your document as ‘Reader’s Spreads’, i.e. how the reader would actually view the document, page 1, then page 2, then page 3 etc.

threading text linking text frames text boxes indesign skills book

Let the printer do their job (they’re pretty good at it, after all) – they will be able to arrange your print-ready file in the way that will work best for them to print and bind.

As a bonus, you’ll spare everyone a whole load of confusion at the press when you try to explain why page 2 is sat opposite page 15 (even more confusing if you haven’t included page numbers on your design!). This little parrot is just really confused about your attempt at Printer’s Spreads…

preparing indesign files for print color

So don’t even go there – just export the file in the same page order that you’ve been working on in InDesign.

You should also include any blank pages that feature in your multi-page document, whether it’s a few pages at the beginning of a book, or the reverse side of some pages in an annual report. Sure, they don’t contain anything that needs to be actually printed, but including them in your exported file will help your printer understand the structure of the document, and accommodate for any blank pages you want included in the final print product.


2. Accommodate for trimming and binding


Once your design is printed, it will be trimmed. The excess parts of the paper (including the Slug and Bleed) will be cut away, leaving your final layout intact, up to the trim edge.

You should be aware that trimming errors can and do happen (printers are only human after all), but you can minimise the visibility of any slight trimming errors by doing two things. Firstly, as we mentioned over in Part One, you should include a Bleed.

A bleed is an extra space around the perimeter of your layout that extends past the edge of the page(s). You should always include a bleed if any elements (e.g. images, colored backgrounds) on your layout will cross the edge of the page (also known as the trim edge).

bleed trim indesign

The second thing you can do to minimise trimming errors is to make your Margins lovely and wide. Margins that are narrow will appear even more narrow if the trim is out by a millimetre or two. So make sure you give your document generous margins (at least as wide as the InDesign default width of 12.7 mm). If in doubt, make them wider – while also minimising the visibility of a poor trim job, wide margins will also give your layouts room to breathe and make them look instantly more attractive.


3. Choose the right paper weight and finish


When you first start to draft your design on the computer, consider what sort of material your design will be printed on. Different paper weights and finishes can dramatically effect your final print result, and you should have a good idea of the sort of ‘look’ you’d like to achieve before you commit the work to print.

Inspiring Book Design - Republica 2

Design by Rita Neves

Firstly, you should choose a suitable Paper Weight (and I don’t mean a nice weighty stone that keeps your desk papers together). Paper comes in a large range of different ‘weights’, measured in GSM (Grams per Square Meter), which will effect how thick the paper feels. Thicker papers tend to be of better quality (and are therefore usually more expensive). You should feel confident selecting an appropriate paper weight that’s going to suit the item you’re printing (and your budget!).

Here are our recommendations for paper weights:

  • If you are printing a newspaper a low GSM would be suitable, something between 35 and 55 GSM.
  • Flyers or low-market brochures might need a slightly heavier paper, around 110 to 160 GSM.
  • Magazine covers tend to be on the heavier side, from around 180 GSM for a mid-market title, edging up to over 250 GSM for a high-end glossy.
  • For a sturdier card weight, like a business card, you should be looking at upwards of 350 GSM to give a luxurious, weighty feel.

 

preparing indesign files for print

You also should know a bit about Paper Finishes. Your printer will ask you to provide a combination of paper specifications for the job – your desired weight and finish. Finishes fall into two main categories – Coated and Uncoated.

Uncoated paper is a suitable choice for printing letterhead, stationery or lower-quality leaflets and flyers. The feel of the finish is smoother and stronger than standard copy paper.

Coated paper falls into two sub-groups – matte-coated and gloss-coated. Matte-coated gives a smooth, unglossy finish and can give your print documents a modern, pared-back look. Gloss-coated paper is smooth and with a slightly reflective finish, giving your documents a glossy, high-end look. Because the ink sits on the surface of the coating, rather than absorbing into the paper, colors appear more vibrant and rich.

This parrot would love to be printed on gloss-coated paper if possible:

preparing indesign files for print color


4. Exporting and Packaging your InDesign files


Once you’ve completed your InDesign work, and feel ready to go to print, you can export your design as a print-ready file. In theory this print-ready file is suitable for going straight to press.

It’s a wise idea to get in touch with the printer first and see if they have a preferred format for print-ready files. Most printers would probably prefer a Press Quality PDF (Portable Document Format) version of your design, but they might also accept files in other CMYK-compatible formats, such as high-resolution (minimum 300 dpi) JPEG or TIFF files.

To export your InDesign document, go to File > Export on the main menu and choose Adobe PDF (Print) from the Format drop-down menu in the Export window.

export indesign file for print

In the Export Adobe PDF window that opens, choose [Press Quality] from the Adobe PDF Preset menu.

export indesign file for print

You should also make sure to export your print-ready file with the Bleed included. If you’re exporting to a PDF format, you can check the option in the Export window to include a bleed.

You can also choose to include Printer’s Marks in your exported print-ready file, which includes trim and crop marks, center marks, and page information. These can be really useful to the printer when preparing your work for the press.

export indesign file for print

If your printer has requested the original InDesign, or ‘native’, files, this is because this gives the printer the freedom to re-export the file if they need to make any minor technical adjustments. You will need to Package your InDesign file before you send it. Check out this quick and simple tutorial on how to package your files.


5. Provide a mock-up and ask for a print proof


You can’t expect your printer to be a mind-reader; they can only work from what they have been given, in terms of the print-ready or native (e.g. InDesign, Photoshop etc.) files, as well as from your instructions given over email, phone or face-to-face in person. Before you commit to the print run, there are two things you can do that will really help your printer to complete the job in the way you want it to.

The first thing you can do is to create a physical mock-up of the document you are sending to print and share this with your printer. This is especially useful if your document has multiple pages or complicated elements like folds and die cuts, that might not be immediately obvious looking at the print-ready digital file only.

There’s no problem with your mock-up being a bit rough-and-ready, printed at home or at the office – just make sure it shows the final layout of the document clearly, and be sure to incorporate essential info like page numbers, for example. It might also be useful to indicate where pages should be printed on one side or both sides.

Once you’ve shared you mock-up with the printer, and handed over your print-ready file(s), ask if the printer can give you a professional print proof for checking and sign-off, before proceeding with the full print-run. Most printers will offer a proof at no extra cost to the agreed quote for the full print run, and you’d be amazed at how many errors and mistakes can be suddenly glaringly obvious when down on printed paper! Rectify the file if you need to, get a second proof if you have the time, and give the go-ahead for the full print-run only when you’re happy.

preparing indesign files for print


6. Pick the right printing method for the job!


Before you select the printer you’re going to use to print your designs, you should know a little about the main print services commercial printers use. The print process can differ depending on the printer, with some championing more traditional offset printing and others singing the praises of digital printing. Commercial printers generally fall into two camps (though some offer both services): Digital Printing or Offset Litho Printing.

Offset printing is a very common commercial printing process, suitable for high volumes. The image to be printed is burned onto a plate and then transferred (offset) from the plate to a rubber blanket, before transferring to the printing surface. Image quality in offset printing is high and the process is cost-efficient at high volumes, so it’s a popular and usually pretty safe choice.

preparing indesign files for print

Digital printing is less mechanical, so it takes less time to prepare for printing. As a result, turn-around times for print jobs are quicker, and printing at low-volumes is also better-value. The jury’s still out on whether image quality is quite as good as that offered by the offset printing process.

Either printing method could be suitable for your job, depending on your project’s requirements. Shop around your local area and check out what different printers are offering, in terms of price and quality, for each print method.


7. You’re ready to print…


…In this two-part tutorial (find Part One here) we’ve taken a look at some of the key things you need to think about when preparing your InDesign documents for print. Use the following as your essential checklist when you prepare and send an InDesign document for print.

  • Remember to include a Bleed in your InDesign document
  • Optimise colour for printing by using CMYK (and Spot Colours) only
  • Check the legibility of type by printing a sample and asking others to read it
  • Ensure all the images used in your design are high-resolution (more than 300 DPI)
  • Export your InDesign file as ‘Reader’s Spreads’
  • Accommodate for trimming errors by including a Bleed and increasing the width of margins
  •  Think about which paper weight and finish will suit your print project
  • Export and package your InDesign work ready for sending to the printer
  • Provide the printer with a mock-up for multi-page or folded documents and ask for a print proof
  • Pick the right printing method for the job (Digital or Offset Litho)

 

If you check off every item in this list you’re guaranteed to have no nasty shocks when the printer drops off that delivery box. And you’ll make this colourful, print-friendly macaw very, very happy…

preparing indesign files for print color

Check out Part One of this tutorial to find out more about preparing your InDesign work for print. For more handy InDesign tips and tricks head over to our beginner InDesign tutorials page.

The post How to Prepare Your InDesign Work for Print: Part 2 of 2 appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
4598
How to Prepare Your InDesign Work for Print: Part 1 of 2 https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/prepare-for-print-one/ Wed, 20 May 2015 11:07:14 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=4576 Preparing your InDesign work for print can be a daunting task, especially as there’s no ‘Undo’ button to press once your printed result arrives in the delivery box. But there’s no need to panic! We’ll take you through the only checklist you’ll ever need for preparing and sending any InDesign document to print. In the […]

The post How to Prepare Your InDesign Work for Print: Part 1 of 2 appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Preparing your InDesign work for print can be a daunting task, especially as there’s no ‘Undo’ button to press once your printed result arrives in the delivery box.

But there’s no need to panic! We’ll take you through the only checklist you’ll ever need for preparing and sending any InDesign document to print. In the first part of this two-part tutorial we’ll look at:

  • Why you should never forget about the Bleed!

  • How to optimise colour for printing

  • How to maximise the legibility of text

  • How to print your images at the highest quality possible

Check out Part Two of this tutorial to find out about exporting your work to ‘Reader’s Spreads‘, choosing paper weights and finishes and selecting the right printing method for the job.


1. Don’t forget the Bleed!


It’s a printer’s worst (and without a doubt most common) nightmare – receiving a ‘print-ready’ file from a customer that doesn’t have a bleed. Don’t be that customer!

Be nice to your friendly neighbourhood printer and be sure to include a bleed (and export it) when you set up your document on the computer.

indesign skills basics tutorials bleed inside edge pdf

Familiarise yourself with what a bleed is, how to set one up on your InDesign work, and how to export your print-ready file with a bleed included, by clicking here.


2. Optimise your colour for print


Every macaw worth his salt knows that colour is at the heart of the print process.

preparing indesign files for print color

A combination of coloured inks (even if your document is only in black and white) creates your printed result. Get familiar with the main rules for printing colour, and you’ll feel much more confident about creating layouts that look as good on printed paper as they do on your computer screen.

First up, always remember to render your InDesign work in CMYK, not RGB.

CMYK color colour indesign

You should (almost; see comments on Spot Colors below) always set colour in your print layouts in a CMYK colour mode. CMYK refers to the four inks that are used in four-color printing, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Key (Black). Each colour in your design will be printed using a combination of these four inks.

You should never set your print documents in an RGB color mode (even if you’ve been working in an RGB file, make sure to convert the file on export to CMYK). RGB (which is rendered through interaction of Red, Green and Blue light) is only suitable for layouts that will be viewed online or in digital format on screen.

RGB color colour indesign

Though you will almost always print using CMYK, you should also be aware of when it’s appropriate to include Spot Colours in your print-ready files. Spot, sometimes termed ‘Solid’, colors, are created by an ink, either pure or mixed, that is printed on a single print run.

dalmatian spot color indesign print

What this means is that if you choose to include a Spot color (e.g. a Pantone color, or metallic or fluorescent inks) in your print design, the printer will have to prepare a completely separate plate for the spot color to be printed.

Including Spot colours in your artwork can have its advantages – the final colour result is often much more accurate (more spot-on!), with less colour variation. On larger print runs using Spot colours can even be more economical (if you’re dealing with three or less than three colors). However, on short print runs including Spot colors in your designs can be pricey; make sure you get a quote from your printer before you incorporate a Spot color into your design.


3. Maximise the legibility of text


This parrot doesn’t have fantastic eyesight.

preparing indesign files for print color

He struggles to read text set at a small 10 pt size, and he’s certainly not alone. Even if your eyesight is fantastic, others may struggle to read small-size text without some difficulty.

What this ill-sighted parrot demonstrates is that you must aim to get your text sizing right! A common issue you may encounter when sending your work to print is that the size of text appears too big or too small. Type Size is really important to get right, as illegible documents, however good-looking, will be immediately off-putting to a reader.

Also consider choosing appropriate font sizing to suit both the document type and the audience for the document. Who will be reading my brochure/poster/book? Will they be expected to spend more time reading it (e.g. a book layout) or will it only be attracting a quick glance (e.g. a flyer or poster)?

If you’re creating layouts for a book, it’s probably OK to size type a little on the smaller side (pick up some tips on how to create book layouts in InDesign with this tutorial), but you might need to amp up the size of text on a flyer, to make sure you catch and hold the attention of a casual reader.

indesign skills tutorials inserting word document into indesign

The best way to make sure you’re using the right font size is to print out a sample of the layout at actual size, and ask a few colleagues or (patient) friends to look it over. How many people in your sample found the size OK to read? If fewer than 90% of your sample had difficulty with the type size, change it!

Related to the size of text, and equally important, is also the Weight of the typeface – is it too thin and faint when printed? Do you need to set that sentence in Bold to make it stand out? Can you draw the eye to something important or different by applying an Italic weight, for example?


4. Ensure your graphics are printed in high-resolution


Every macaw (and I mean every macaw) wants their photos to be printed in crisp and clear high-resolution. Including these two. They’ll get pretty angry otherwise…

preparing indesign files for print color

If you’re including graphics in your print layout, whether that’s photos or illustrations, you have to make sure they are of high enough resolution to print. Low-resolution images produce blurry, pixelated print results. High-resolution graphics, by contrast, will look sharp and clear when you go to the printing press.

You should be aware from the start, when you begin to put together your layouts in InDesign, that different image formats can appear very different on the printed page.

Photographs often cause the most misery when producing print layouts – this is because they are Bitmap graphics, not vectors. Bitmap graphics (e.g. JPEG, TIFF, PNG, PSD) are made up of a number of tiny pixels. If you resize a bitmap graphic, and then resave it, some of the quality of the original image can be lost (particularly problematic with JPEG images), which results in a more pixelated image. You should make sure that your bitmap images have a high rate of DPI (see comments on DPI below) before you include them in your print designs.

Vector graphics, like Illustrator (AI) and EPS file formats, are made up of scalable objects, and as a result will not lose their quality if resized.

The final word on image format is as long as the quality of the image(s) is high (the DPI is high [more than 300 DPI as a rough guide]), there’s no reason why both bitmap and vector graphics can’t work equally well in your print layouts.

magazine layout design indesign typography

You must also learn to recognise the difference between image size and image quality. Say a colleague or client has sent over a JPEG image that they want you to use in your design, and from what you can see, the file size is OK – between 3 and 5 MB. But then you open up the file and see that the image appears pixelated and, frankly, a bit rubbish. What gives?

The picture of the parrot on the left is the same file size as the image of the parrot on the right, but the DPI for the left-hand image is higher, which results in a crisper, clearer image.

pixelated parrot print indesign

Even though the file size of the image is usually a good indicator of quality, the quality of a bitmap image is not determined by the size of the file, or even the dimensions of the image. Quality is determined by DPI (Dots per Inch). DPI describes the resolution number of dots per inch that make up the colors and tones of an image.

You should always aim for a high DPI count for any image you’re hoping to use in a print layout. If your options are exhausted, and you have to use a slightly blurry or pixelated image, with a lower DPI, consider first upping the DPI manually in Photoshop and then setting it a reduced scale in your design. Remember that pixelation and blurring will appear much more obvious on the printed page than it will on screen.

Check out Part Two of this tutorial to find out more about preparing, exporting and sending your InDesign work to print. For more useful InDesign tips and tricks pay a visit to our beginner InDesign tutorials page.

The post How to Prepare Your InDesign Work for Print: Part 1 of 2 appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
4576
InDesign Tips: How Do I Print True Black? https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/how-to-print-black-black/ Fri, 24 Apr 2015 14:26:02 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=4494 Ever printed your InDesign document only for the ‘black’ colour to come out looking a little washed-out? Get familiar with ‘true’ black in InDesign and feel confident in creating dark and dramatic black tones for your print designs. Here, we’ll give you an overview of: What ‘Rich Black’ is and why you should use it for your […]

The post InDesign Tips: How Do I Print True Black? appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Ever printed your InDesign document only for the ‘black’ colour to come out looking a little washed-out? Get familiar with ‘true’ black in InDesign and feel confident in creating dark and dramatic black tones for your print designs.

Here, we’ll give you an overview of:

  • What ‘Rich Black’ is and why you should use it for your print designs

  • How to create a ‘Rich Black’ and adjust it for warmer or cooler tones


1. Why Does My ‘Black’ Look Washed Out?


You’ll notice that InDesign provides you with a default [Black] swatch in the Swatches panel (Window > Color > Swatches) when you create any new print document.

rich black true black print indesign swatches

You’ll also notice that when you colour text or other elements in your InDesign document with this [Black] CMYK swatch and send the document to print, that the result can come out looking…well…a little more grey than black.

This is because the default [Black] swatch provided in the Swatches panel isn’t actually a true black at all – it’s just 100% of the Key (Black) pigment from the CMYK spectrum, and O% of Cyan, Magenta and Yellow.

rich black true black print indesign swatches

Nobody wants their blacks to look less than dark, dramatic and high-contrast! Sorry, grey cat…

rich black true black print indesign

To remedy your washed-out black, you need to create a New CMYK Swatch, something printers and industry-insiders know as a ‘Rich Black’.

A Rich Black is a much darker, truer black that looks like the depths of space, the dead of night, or indeed this very black cat…

rich black true black print indesign cat


2. How Do I Create a ‘Rich Black’?


To create a Rich Black, you simply need to increase the levels of Cyan, Magenta and Yellow when you create a new CMYK swatch, and keep the level of Key (Black) at a level of 100%.

To create a new CMYK Swatch, open up the Swatches panel (Window > Color > Swatches) and click to select one of the existing color swatches (any will do). Click on the New Swatch icon at the bottom of the panel, or select New Color Swatch… from the panel’s drop-down menu.

rich black true black print indesign swatches

In the Create New Swatch window, first up the level of K to 100%.

rich black true black print indesign swatches

Now you have to decide what kind of Rich Black you want to create. That’s right – there’s no single set value for a Rich Black swatch. You can create a warmer or cooler Rich Black depending on the levels you set for Yellow (warmer) and Cyan (cooler).

Try out these different Rich Black settings to create different subtle tones in your printed result:

  • Cool Rich Black: C=60 M=50 Y=40 K=100
  • Warm Rich Black: C=40 M=60 Y=60 K=100

rich black true black print indesign swatches

Different printers will often have different preferences for processing Rich Black. So if you’re still unsure what to use, just get in touch with your printer and ask after their recommendation for CMYK levels of Rich Black.


3. OK…That’s simple enough. Anything else I should know?


Yes! You should never use the [Registration] swatch provided in the InDesign Swatches panel as a substitute for black.

Why? Because [Registration] is 100% of everything – Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Key – and will cause a lot of problems for printing if you use it on your finished document.

The [Registration] swatch is only used on Registration Marks, which are visible when you export your InDesign document as a print-ready PDF file.

Stick with a Rich Black, and you’ll be sure to create darkly dramatic, high-contrast print results every time! Look how happy this cat is now that he knows you’ll be able to print text and graphics in a lovely true black color…

rich black true black print indesign cat

Find out more about understanding and working with colour in InDesign and how to prepare your documents for print by adding a Bleed to your print designs.

To discover more handy InDesign tips and tutorials head over to our beginner InDesign tutorials page.

The post InDesign Tips: How Do I Print True Black? appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
4494
InDesign Basics: How to Conduct a Word-Count https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/word-count-in-indesign/ Fri, 03 Apr 2015 15:28:12 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=4474 If you’re creating a text-heavy document, it’s really useful to be able to perform a word-count, either of the whole text or sections of text in your InDesign document. Here, we’ll take a look at: How you can use the Info panel in InDesign to conduct a word-count How you can find out other information about your […]

The post InDesign Basics: How to Conduct a Word-Count appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
If you’re creating a text-heavy document, it’s really useful to be able to perform a word-count, either of the whole text or sections of text in your InDesign document. Here, we’ll take a look at:
  • How you can use the Info panel in InDesign to conduct a word-count

  • How you can find out other information about your InDesign document using the Info panel


1. What is the Info panel?


The Info panel is going to give you a lot of info about your document, unsurprisingly…

…Let’s get the panel opened up. To do this, go to the Window option on the menu bar and select Info from the drop-down menu.

It’s about a third of the way down. Or, you could just tap F8 on the keyboard to open it up.

word count indesign info panel

So here it is – the Info panel.

word count indesign info panel

It’s a tiny little panel but it’s quite powerful, and from this you can do a number of useful tasks to do with text, which can be particularly useful if you’re working with a text-heavy document like a book or a magazine, and you might need to check some details either to pass on to a colleague or to the publisher. 


2. How Do I Use the Info panel?


You can conduct a word-count, a character-count, a paragraph-count and also a line-count from the Info panel.

At the moment, the panel’s looking a bit empty, but that’s because you’ve not got any of the text in the document selected.

word count indesign info panel

Let’s just show you how the Info panel works. To demonstrate, I’m going to navigate to the first page of a magazine document in InDesign (Learn how to create a magazine from scratch with our series of tutorials here).

Select the Type Tool from the Tools panel (or hit T on the keyboard). You can either highlight the text in a text frame, or if you just want to make a count of all the text that’s sat in the text frame, and might be linked to other text frames, you can just simply sit your cursor somewhere in the text in the frame.

So here I click once into the ‘Fresh Autumn Flavors!’ sub-heading, and the Info panel pauses for a moment before the lower half of the panel fills with information about the text in that frame. The Info panel’s telling us that there are 21 characters in this frame, 3 words, 3 lines, and 2 paragraphs.

word count indesign info panel

So that may not be so useful if you’re just looking at a sub-heading, but if we want to find out the word count of a much larger piece of text that can be much more useful.

Now if I take our Type cursor and just highlight all the text in the first column on this page of the magazine document, beginning with the text ‘JO JAN travels to Maine…’, we will just get text counts for the highlighted text only appearing in the Info panel.

In this first column we’ve got about 140 words, and 3 paragraphs.

word count indesign info panel

But if we just place the cursor anywhere in that text frame, or in one of the text frames it’s connected to, we’ll get a full text count for all the text that sits in those linked frames, and it will include text that’s flowing over onto other pages as well. Here we can tell that the article has 837 words, for example. 

word count indesign info panel

Now imagine if you’ve got a scenario where you need to be keeping within a specified word count for a long document, like a book, for example. Just by placing your Type cursor in one of the text frames in the document and opening the Info panel, you’re equipped to find out the total word count of the document instantly (depending on whether all the text frames are successfully threaded to each other).

The Info panel is a useful little InDesign function to be aware of. It can be especially useful when you come to the editing stages of a text-heavy document – it’s good to know that you can retrieve quite a bit of detail about the quantity of text by simply going to Window > Info.

Click to find out more about creating InDesign documents or How to add a bleed to your print designs. To find more useful InDesign tips and tricks pay a visit to our beginner InDesign tutorials page.

The post InDesign Basics: How to Conduct a Word-Count appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
4474
InDesign Basics: The Beginner’s Guide to Color https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/beginners-guide-to-color/ Wed, 25 Mar 2015 15:57:57 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=4402 Having a basic understanding of color is the key to confidently creating documents for print or digital in InDesign. In this bitesize beginner’s guide we’ll take a look at: The basics of color theory, including the three main color models – RGB, CMYK and Spot Color How you can change and manage InDesign’s color mode 1. What is RGB Color and When […]

The post InDesign Basics: The Beginner’s Guide to Color appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Having a basic understanding of color is the key to confidently creating documents for print or digital in InDesign. In this bitesize beginner’s guide we’ll take a look at:
  • The basics of color theory, including the three main color models – RGB, CMYK and Spot Color
  • How you can change and manage InDesign’s color mode

1. What is RGB Color and When Do I Use It?


‘RGB’ stands for Red, Green and Blue. RGB color is rendered through the emission of light from the screen of a digital device.

RGB color colour indesign

The light generated by your device’s screen, so whether that’s a desktop or laptop computer, a tablet, or an eBook reader, is made up of red, blue and green light, which combine in different ways to create different colors.

Because RGB color is created via colored light, not colored ink, it is optimised for digital and web design, not print design. So, you should only be looking to use an RGB Color Mode when creating designs for digital publishing (e.g. eBooks) or for online use (e.g. web banners).

Skip to the end of the page to find out how you can adjust InDesign’s Color Mode…


2. What is CMYK Color and When Do I Use It?


CMYK color is very different to RGB color, as CMYK is based on a combination of coloured inks, not light.

‘CMYK’ stands for Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Key (which is Black). These four colours are the base inks which can be combined to create a huge spectrum of different colors.

CMYK color colour indesign

Because CMYK is based on a combination of colored inks, it’s ideally suited for creating documents for print.

So basically, whenever you’re working on a document you think at some point will be printed in some way or another, whether that’s at home, in-office or through a commercial printer, you should always be working in a CMYK Colour Mode.

When you set colours in your InDesign document to CMYK color swatches, you create a Process Separation. What does this mean? This means that all the CMYK colours on your layout will be printed onto one plate during the printing process, in one single print run. Because CMYK color can be printed in one go, on a single print run, this keeps the printing process efficient and the cost of the print job low (depending on the print volume).


3. What is a ‘Spot’ Color and When Do I Use It?


What can be mind-boggling is that CMYK is not the only type of colour model that is suitable for printing. You can also use something called Spot Colors in your print designs.

OK…so what’s a Spot Color? When you define a color in your InDesign document as a Spot Color, the color will be pulled onto a separate printing plate and the color will have to be printed during a separate print run. This is called a Spot Separation.

So, when would you want to use a Spot Color?

This can be useful if you want to ensure that a particular color is going to be printed very accurately, without any variation, and if this is what you’d like to achieve you can set the Spot Color as a Pantone Color.

Pantone is an international color-matching system, that gives standardised colour pigments a unique number. Pantone colours are more complex than CMYK colors, and can be made up from a combination of 13, rather than only 4 (for CMYK), base pigments. As a result you can source more unique and special colors from the Pantone catalogue.

pantone RGB CMYK Spot color colour indesign

You can also use a Spot Color in your designs when you want to print a special kind of ink, like metallics or flourescents, which don’t feature in the range of CMYK options.


4. OK…But When Should I Use CMYK and/or Spot Colors in InDesign?


Let’s simplify the CMYK and Spot Color systems, and break down when you would use either of the models or a combination of both on your InDesign work…

…If you’re creating an InDesign layout that uses more than three colours you shouldn’t normally need to use any Spot Color, unless like we’ve just talked about, if you want to create a particularly special color effect with a Pantone, metallic or fluorescent. In most cases, you should be looking at just setting your color in CMYK.

This is because the printer would have to perform a separate, additional print run for each Spot Color you apply to the document. This adds time and money to the print job. So if you’re creating something in full-color, you can feel confident that setting your whole document in CMYK is the best way to go.

CMYK color colour indesignIf you do want to use a Spot Color in your design and keep your printing costs down, the best thing to do is create a black and white document which just uses one single pop of color, which you can set as a Spot Color. And because you’re not printing a full-color layout, that’s going to keep the print job more economical, particularly if you’re printing in large volumes.

If you’re still feeling a little confused about color – that’s OK, it is a bit confusing – just remember that 9 times out of 10 CMYK color is the way to go!

And the other key thing to remember is that you should never print in RGB color, unless you want some very unpredictable results. And you should only really need to use Spot Colors in special instances.


5. How Do I Adjust the Color Mode in InDesign?


When you first create a new document in InDesign, you can adjust the Color Mode of the document by setting the Intent of the document to Print (CMYK), Web (RGB) or Digital Publishing (RGB).

By choosing Print from the Intent drop-down menu, InDesign automatically sets the Color Mode of the new document to CMYK. All the default colours stored in the Swatches panel are set as CMYK Color Swatches.

new document window intent

However, this doesn’t actually prevent you from creating new Color Swatches that are RGB (not suitable if you’re creating for print) or Spot Color (can be OK, depending on your desired print result) swatches, or prevent you from placing graphics into your InDesign document that have an RGB colorspace.

As you work on your print documents you need to keep an eye out that you’re sticking to CMYK colours. And the best way to do this is to manage colour in InDesign, which you can do from the Swatches panel (Window > Color > Swatches).


Click to find out more about creating InDesign documents or How to add a bleed to your print designs. To find more useful InDesign tips and tricks pay a visit to our beginner InDesign tutorials page.

The post InDesign Basics: The Beginner’s Guide to Color appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
4402
InDesign Basics: How Do I Change the Size of a Page in My Document? https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/resize-page-and-content-indesign/ Tue, 10 Mar 2015 10:25:58 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=4315 Sometimes you need to resize a page in your document pronto, or switch the orientation of a page at the drop of a hat. In this Bitesize Tutorial we’ll take a look at: How you can use the Page Tool to create custom page sizes as you work How the Liquid Layout function can keep […]

The post InDesign Basics: How Do I Change the Size of a Page in My Document? appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Sometimes you need to resize a page in your document pronto, or switch the orientation of a page at the drop of a hat. In this Bitesize Tutorial we’ll take a look at:
  • How you can use the Page Tool to create custom page sizes as you work
  • How the Liquid Layout function can keep the content of your page proportional
  • How Master pages can help you achieve easy-peasy page size changes in your InDesign document

1. Meet your new best friend…the Page Tool


You probably already know how to create a new InDesign document which shares the same page size and orientation throughout. But what happens when you want to resize a single page to, say, provide a pull-out section in the middle of a book? Or you want to rotate a page to allow the viewer to read a single page in landscape, rather than portrait, format?

This is where the Page Tool (Shift + P) comes in handy. The Page Tool (Shift + P) is a really useful little tool that you can find in the Tools panel.

Up near the top of the Tools panel, just the third option down, is the Page Tool. It looks like a white rectangle with a small cursor at the corner. 

page size page tool resize indesign

Click the Page Tool to activate it. Now, here we have a few pages from this layout for Foodie Magazine, just to demonstrate. Now, let’s say the printer has been in touch with me, and wants the back cover of the magazine to be slightly larger than the inside pages of the magazine. This seems pretty unlikely, unless we were going to be creating a hard-bound cover, but let’s just take this as an example.

page size page tool resize indesign

With the Page Tool selected I then click onto the back cover page to tell the Page Tool that this is the page we want to resize. Small white extension marks have appeared around the edge of the page.

page size page tool resize indesign

To resize the page, I need to navigate up to the controls panel running along the top of the workspace. You’ll notice that some new options have appeared. We’ve got some text boxes where we can manually type in a revised Width and/or Height measurement for the page. So you can resize using that method, if you want to create a non-standard size for the page.

To the right of the Height and Width text boxes you can also access a drop-down menu of standard page sizes. So we can adjust the page size to something like A3 or Letter, or we can select a pre-saved Custom Page Size from the options towards the top of the menu if we scroll upwards.

page size page tool resize indesign

Let’s set a custom Width and Height, adding 2 mm to the size on all sides. So I can type in 214 mm for the Width and 301 mm for the Height.

And we are also given the option to adjust the orientation of the page, from the Landscape and Portrait icons to the right of the standard page size drop-down menu.

page size page tool resize indesign

And then, when we’re happy with the revised size of the page we can go back to the usual Selection Tool, by clicking the top black cursor in the Tools panel, and begin to reshuffle and resize the content on the page to fit the page’s new dimensions.


2. Hmm…OK…but how do I keep the content on the page proportional?


Well that’s all fine I guess…but isn’t there a more efficient way of reorganising your page’s content once you’ve resized something?

Well, the answer is yes – there’s this nifty feature called Liquid Layout, which arranges the content on the page according to how you resize it, and to what orientation you set the page to.

We can see a very reduced option for applying Liquid Layout from this top control panel, but let’s open up the full Liquid Layout panel, so we can take a really good look. Go to Window > Interactive > Liquid Layout.

You’ll notice that this panel is greyed out whenever we don’t have the Page Tool selected. Keep the Page Tool selected in order to use Liquid Layout.

page resize indesign liquid layout

The default Liquid Layout Rule is called Controlled by Master. That means that whatever Rule has been applied to a Master, will be applied in turn to the page or pages that Master is applied to.

From the Pages panel I can see that this back cover page has a Master called ‘E-Back Cover’ applied to it. So let’s double-click that Master page to bring it up on screen.

When I select the E-Master with the Page Tool, the Liquid Layout panel tells me that the Liquid Layout Rule is set to Off. So this means when I resize any page with the E-Master applied to it, nothing will happen to the content on the page.

page resize indesign liquid layout

But if I return to the Master and adjust the Liquid Layout Rule to Re-center, for example, you’ll see that I can now the content of the page remains centered on the page as I resize.

page resize indesign liquid layoutpage resize indesign liquid layout

If I choose Scale as the Liquid Layout Rule for the Master, the content will resize, and scale up or down uniformly, as you resize the page.

Note: If I want to permanently change the size of the page I have to hold down the Alt key while I resize. If I don’t the page will just snap back to size.

Pretty neat. This is particularly useful when you have a lot of carefully prepared content on your page, and you don’t want to lose the proportions. 

page resize indesign liquid layout

And that’s how you resize pages in your InDesign documents using the Page Tool. The rule of thumb is:

  • If your page is blank or has very little content, you can just resize using the options available in the Controls Panel at the top of the InDesign Workspace.
  • If your page is content-heavy, open the Liquid Layout panel (Window > Interactive > Liquid Layout); set the Rule of the page to Controlled by Master, and adjust the Master’s Liquid Layout Rule to one of the following options: Scale, Re-center, Object-Based, or Guide-Based, depending on how you want your content to adjust on the page that has that Master applied to it. This will keep give you much more control over the arrangement of elements on the page.

 

Using the Page Tool, and becoming familiar with the Liquid Layout function, in InDesign can really transform the way you approach designing and editing documents. They allow you to be flexible in your work, accommodating changes to page size and orientation without having to rethink the whole layout of the page from scratch.

To find out more about pages and Masters InDesign, check out our detailed look at the Pages panel here. To find more useful InDesign tips and tricks pay a visit to our beginner InDesign tutorials page.

The post InDesign Basics: How Do I Change the Size of a Page in My Document? appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
4315
InDesign Basics: What is a Bleed and When Do I Use It? https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/indesign-bleed/ Mon, 23 Feb 2015 12:09:51 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=4278 If you’re preparing any document for professional printing, it’s a given that you’ll need to allow for a Bleed in your InDesign document. In this quick tutorial we’ll give some answers to these commonly asked questions: What the heck is a Bleed?? When do I need to use a Bleed? How do I add a Bleed […]

The post InDesign Basics: What is a Bleed and When Do I Use It? appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
If you’re preparing any document for professional printing, it’s a given that you’ll need to allow for a Bleed in your InDesign document. In this quick tutorial we’ll give some answers to these commonly asked questions:
  • What the heck is a Bleed??
  • When do I need to use a Bleed?
  • How do I add a Bleed to my InDesign document?
  • How do I export my document, including the Bleed?

1. So…what exactly is a Bleed?


This is a really common question, so don’t worry if you don’t know (or think you know, but aren’t completely sure!).

A Bleed is the area just extending past the edge of the page, past the trim edge. So here in this diagram you can see the edge of the bleed marked out skirting around the outer edge of the page.

bleed trim indesign

A Bleed acts as a margin of error when the document is trimmed, after it’s been printed. So, if you have any content that will cross the edge of the page, such as a coloured background or maybe an image, you should extend it into the bleed to avoid any white lines appearing around the edge of your document. Printers are human after all – trimming errors can happen, and they are just an inevitable part of the print process. This could just be a tiny millimetre-wide margin of error, but if you don’t extend your content into a bleed, it will still be visible.

By including a bleed in your InDesign documents you can help to make your final print product look flawless, and minimise the visibility of any trimming errors.


2. When do I need to use a Bleed?


A Bleed is essential to include if you’re creating any document for print. The rule for applying a bleed in InDesign is as follows:

If you’re creating a single page document you can set a bleed all the way around the document.

But if you’re creating a document with facing pages, that’s going to be bound, like a book, you don’t need to include a bleed on the inside edge. Firstly, because nobody’s going to see it, as the page edge will be sucked into the bind, and second, because if you export the InDesign document as a spread (not as single pages), the bleeds on the inside edges (the inside is the edge of the page that will be bound) will cross onto the opposite page, which is unsightly, like in the example below.

This magazine spread was mistakenly set up with a 5 mm bleed on the Inside Edge, but on exporting the spread as a PDF, it becomes apparent that the content of the inside bleed has spilled onto each opposing page. You can see that the image of the fish has crossed the central page divider, and spilled into the image of the boats.

indesign skills basics tutorials bleed inside edge

 

indesign skills basics tutorials bleed inside edge

If you’re creating a document made up of facing pages, that you’re intending to bind, be sure to set the bleed on the Top, Bottom and Outside edges only. We’ll take a look at how you can set up your bleed in InDesign next.


3. Add a Bleed to your InDesign document


It’s best to set up your InDesign document with a bleed before you start working on your document. You can add a bleed later, by going to File > Document Setup, but it can be fiddly as InDesign will only apply your revised settings to the pages you currently have selected.

The best place to start is right at the beginning of the process, in the New Document window. When you go to File > New > Document to create a new InDesign document (or select New > Document from the Welcome window), the option to apply a bleed to your document is down at the bottom of the New Document window, just above Slug.

bleed trim

In this example, I want to create the inside pages for a paperback book. Because the pages are going to be bound in the center of each spread, I won’t need a bleed on the Inside edge.

I type in 3 mm into the Top Bleed text box, then click the chain icon at the far right of the Outside text box to break the uniform values, and get rid of the bleed on the Inside edge, reducing it to 0 mm. Once I’ve set up the rest of my document I can close the panel and create the new document by clicking OK.


4. Export your InDesign document with a Bleed


Once you’ve finished your InDesign artwork and are ready to export it to a print-ready format, you should ensure that your beautiful bleed is exported along with the rest of the document.

The best way to prepare a print-ready file is to export the document as a PDF. Go to File > Export and select Adobe PDF (Print) from the drop-down menu in the Export window.

indesign skills basics tutorials bleed inside edge pdf

Click Save.

In the Export Adobe PDF window, under the General options, select [Press Quality] from the Adobe PDF Preset drop-down menu.

indesign skills basics tutorials bleed inside edge

From the menu on the left-hand side of the window select Marks and Bleeds to open up a new set of options.

Under Marks, check All Printer’s Marks.

To ensure your carefully prepared bleed is included in the final exported file, check Use Document Bleed Settings under Bleed and Slug.

indesign skills basics tutorials bleed inside edge pdf

Click Export at the bottom right corner of the window to create your PDF file. Your file will now include your predefined bleed, and is ready to send to the printers.

indesign skills basics tutorials bleed inside edge pdf

Adding a bleed to your InDesign documents is essential when creating documents that will be printed professionally. Avoid unsightly trim errors (or even worse a lecture from your disgruntled printer!) by being sure to include a bleed in all your InDesign work. To find out more about setting up documents in InDesign, check out our detailed look at the New Document panel here. To find more useful InDesign tips and tricks pay a visit to our beginner InDesign tutorials page.

The post InDesign Basics: What is a Bleed and When Do I Use It? appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
4278
The Adobe Overview: When to Use InDesign https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/what-is-indesign/ Mon, 16 Feb 2015 15:26:19 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=4187 If you’re new to using Adobe InDesign you may wonder ‘Why should I use InDesign?’ or ‘When should choose InDesign over a different application such as Photoshop or Illustrator?’ In this article we’re going to analyse what Adobe applications have to offer in simple terms, and look at: When to use InDesign for a design project The benefits of combining multiple Adobe applications to […]

The post The Adobe Overview: When to Use InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
If you’re new to using Adobe InDesign you may wonder ‘Why should I use InDesign?’ or ‘When should choose InDesign over a different application such as Photoshop or Illustrator?’

In this article we’re going to analyse what Adobe applications have to offer in simple terms, and look at:

  • When to use InDesign for a design project

  • The benefits of combining multiple Adobe applications to achieve your end result

  • Why we think InDesign is the most versatile and creative Adobe design application available

You may be new to using InDesign and still not feel completely confident that you know when to use InDesign.

Sure, you may have heard that InDesign is the industry-standard software for publishing design – but what does that mean? And what does that blanket term encompass? Let’s break it down into simple, straightforward terms…


When should I use other Adobe applications?


So, say your boss gives you a project that requires some design input. How do you know if you should be firing up InDesign, or looking for a different application to tackle the task? This is a really commonly asked question, because quite simply there are tons of different software options out there for performing design tasks. The range of choices can be overwhelming!

It has to be said that Adobe is king of all that is desktop design. Adobe offers a huge range of applications, which are designed to work together in harmony to produce super professional results.

when should I use InDesign or photoshop or Illustrator adobe

It’s important to know that there are other Adobe applications out there that can support your InDesign workflow. If you have access to Creative Cloud (CC) you will have access to a suite of applications, all of which are fine-tuned to work in-sync with each other.

First up, quite possibly the most used tool by designers is Photoshop. Photoshop is great for editing images. You can play around with filters and masks to dramatically transform and combine raster pictures (image files made up of pixels); it’s also a great tool for playing around with colour.

when should I use InDesign or photoshop or Illustrator adobe

Second up, Illustrator. Illustrator is a fantastic image-editing programme designed to work with vector images, not raster. Vector images are scalable and are made up of lines and anchor points.

when should I use InDesign or photoshop or Illustrator adobe

Photoshop and Illustrator, together with InDesign, make up the trinity of Adobe design applications. If you want to create anything for print, you can get by very well indeed with just these three guys.

Then there’s also Bridge, which, as its name implies, is a bridging tool for use between applications. Bridge helps you preview, filter and organise the contents of your computer, allowing you to easily drop in images into applications while you work.

when should I use InDesign or photoshop or Illustrator adobe bridge

And then on top of these core Creative Suite programmes, there are all these other extra applications which will make your brain spin! Web design applications are being created and enhanced all the time – Dreamweaver is a code-based web-design programme, then there’s Flash for creating flash video files, Fireworks for image editing for web, and Muse, which is Adobe’s newer web-design offering. Adobe have also released applications specifically designed to engage with responsive and mobile web design – Edge Reflow, Edge Animate, Edge Code and Edge Inspect.

adobe dreamweaver flash muse

Then you’ve also got applications that delve into photo management (Lightroom), copywriting and editing (InCopy) and video production and editing (Premiere Pro and After Effects).

Phew! That’s a lot to take in! But all you need to be aware of, for any layout* project you’re tackling, is these four programmes – InDesign, Photoshop, Illustrator and Bridge. Plus of course Adobe Acrobat is essential if you’re producing documents that are going to be print-ready.

*a 2D design intended for print, digital or online, comprising of one or all of the following: text, images and shapes.

adobe photoshop illustrator bridge

Photoshop, Illustrator and Bridge all work intuitively with InDesign. You can use Photoshop to edit images before you place them into your InDesign documents. You can create vectors in Illustrator for adding illustrated content to your InDesign layouts. And you can make use of Bridge as a useful go-between for managing your images.

adobe indesign logo when to use adobe applications


OK…but when should I use InDesign specifically?


It’s great to know you have the option to access all these different applications when you’re working on a design project – it’s like you have a little support network, and with the new release of Creative Cloud 2015 that support base is only going to grow and evolve further. But here’s the big secret that few designers will tell you but many designers know…

…all you need to use is InDesign.

adobe indesign computer mac

You can apply basic editing and effects to images in InDesign. You can also create simple vector illustrations using the Tools available in InDesign.

If you need to create a layout with a combination of text, images and colour, or with either text or images alone, you can cope without a problem by simply using InDesign alone.

So long as you’re not creating images from scratch, 9 times out of 10 you can just use InDesign and not need to use any other programme.

If you want to focus on the quality of your text and typography, and have maximum control over design and content, InDesign is your new best friend. The formatting options are endless, and you can also exercise control over content with things like the Spell Check and Footnotes functions.

Ultimately, if you want to be creative in your designs and not be limited by performing tasks on a computer, InDesign is superb for enabling your creativity.

It’s just like having a pen or pencil in your hand, and a designer’s worktop in front of you – the flexible workplace means you can play around with different looks and layouts really easily.

adobe indesign

And that’s why InDesign is awesome – you can use it in conjunction with other Adobe software, or on its own – either way you’re going to be able to create something both fantastically creative and professionally polished.


So you’re saying I only ever need to use InDesign?


Erm, nope, that’s not exactly what we’re saying…

…This is certainly not a call for you to instantly delete your other Creative Suite applications – just know that InDesign is the most versatile application of the bunch, and as a result can help you tackle a huge range of tasks. If you’re producing layouts for print, digital and even online, Adobe InDesign is your guy.

You should treat other Adobe applications, Illustrator, Photoshop and Bridge, as a support network. Dip in and out of them; using them to edit, create or organise more complex images to incorporate into your InDesign layouts.

adobe creative applications indesign

Develop a broader and more flexible work pattern, using InDesign predominantly for creating, drafting and finalising layouts, and you’ll quickly see your workflow speed improve and your creative potential expand.


Ready to learn more about using InDesign? To find more useful InDesign tips and tricks head over to our beginner InDesign tutorials page.

The post The Adobe Overview: When to Use InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
4187
InDesign Basics: Why Package Your InDesign Files? https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/indesign-beginners-package-files/ Tue, 03 Feb 2015 14:37:10 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=4119 Have you ever received an InDesign file from a colleague or client, only to find that the document is riddled with missing links and fonts? That’s because the sender did not ‘package’ the original InDesign file. Packaging your InDesign documents ensures all your hard work is perfectly preserved if you want to share the file with someone […]

The post InDesign Basics: Why Package Your InDesign Files? appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Have you ever received an InDesign file from a colleague or client, only to find that the document is riddled with missing links and fonts? That’s because the sender did not ‘package’ the original InDesign file. Packaging your InDesign documents ensures all your hard work is perfectly preserved if you want to share the file with someone else. In this tutorial we’ll look at:
  • Why packaging your InDesign work is an important step after proofing and Preflight

  • How to Package your InDesign file


Why should I package my InDesign files?


If you want to send your InDesign document to a colleague, client or to the printers, you should ‘package’ the file so that all the linked elements in your document are retrieved and contained in a ready-to-send folder.

It’s a common error to send on your unpackaged InDesign file via email, large file transfer or USB. The recipient will be able to open and view the file, but the linked images will flag up as missing in the Links panel. Unless the recipient also has all the relevant fonts installed on their computer, the fonts you carefully applied in your original document will also be listed as missing, and will be replaced with a temporary alternative font in InDesign.

This is frustrating for both you and the recipient and may even result in erroneous changes being made to your document. Let’s look at how you can Package your InDesign work and prevent a headache!


Step 1: Proof and Preflight


I’ve prepared the artwork for a magazine cover, in InDesign, for the next issue of Foodie Magazine. Learn how to design layouts for the magazine with our fun series of tutorials.

indesign packaging file package files magazine

I first check the document for errors (check out how to perform a Spell Check on your document here) and perform a Preflight (Window > Output > Preflight); then save the file (File > Save) once I’m happy.

Then I go up to File > Package.

indesign packaging file package files


Step 2: Check for Errors


The Package options window opens. To the left of the window there is a list of options.

indesign packaging file package files

Navigate down through the options and check the box that says Show Problems Only for each option. So here, under Fonts we have no problems. Great!

indesign packaging file package files

But here, under Links and Images two images are flagged up as using an RGB colour space (not CMYK, which would be better suited for print).

indesign packaging file package files

However, this isn’t a problem as the InDesign file will eventually be exported to a print PDF for printing, and all RGB colour will be converted to CMYK. So let’s not take any action on that; and go ahead and click the Package button.


Step 3: Save and Navigate to Your Packaged File


Click OK and select an appropriate place to save the packaged file.

InDesign will package your file in your chosen location. Navigate to the location and you can see that InDesign has placed a copy of the InDesign (.indd) file in the folder, alongside folders for Links and Document Fonts, and a copy of your entered Instructions.

indesign packaging file package files

You can share your packaged folder straight away via USB or Hard Drive; or you can compress the file (e.g. in ZIP format) to send over email or large file transfer.

Great work! Your recipient will be thrilled!

Packaging files is a simple and essential skill that will help to preserve your InDesign work as you intended, no matter how many individuals you share your file with. To find more useful InDesign tips and tricks head over to our beginner InDesign tutorials page.

The post InDesign Basics: Why Package Your InDesign Files? appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
4119
InDesign Basics: The Beginner’s Guide to InDesign Styles https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/indesign-beginners-guide-to-styles/ Fri, 23 Jan 2015 12:15:49 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=4045 In this Bitesize tutorial, we’ll look at how to create Styles and apply them to text and objects throughout your InDesign documents. Styles are a great way to keep your work looking consistent, and can really help to cut down on the time you spend formatting. We’ll cover: How to create Character Styles and Paragraph Styles How to create […]

The post InDesign Basics: The Beginner’s Guide to InDesign Styles appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
In this Bitesize tutorial, we’ll look at how to create Styles and apply them to text and objects throughout your InDesign documents. Styles are a great way to keep your work looking consistent, and can really help to cut down on the time you spend formatting. We’ll cover:
  • How to create Character Styles and Paragraph Styles

  • How to create Object Styles

  • How to apply your saved Styles to elements in your InDesign document


Step 1: Find and Open the Styles panels


You can find all the Styles panels by going to Window > Styles. Here you’ll find five options for applying styles to different elements. When you open a particular Style panel, you’ll notice that they group with other related Style windows.

Character Styles and Paragraph Styles can both be applied to text. A Character Style remembers formatting for single characters, words or phrases. A Paragraph Style will remember the formatting applied to a whole paragraph (a section of text separated from other text by line breaks).

Table, Table Styles and Cell Styles are grouped together in one panel.

Object Styles has its own panel (Window > Styles > Object Styles). You can apply an Object Style to graphics, shapes and frames.

styles paragraph character object indesign skills


Step 2: Create and Apply a Character Style


Once you’ve formatted a letter, word or phrase, you can save your edits as a Character Style, to apply to other parts of your text with ease. In this example, for a magazine layout, I have set the first word of a short extract in a decorative font, LeckerliOne Regular, and set the size to 32 pt and the colour to a dark red CMYK swatch. The text is also aligned center.

Character Style indesign skills styles

Open the Character Styles panel (Window > Styles > Character Styles). Highlight the relevant text and either click on the small square icon at the bottom right of the panel (Create new style) or select New Character Style from the panel’s drop-down menu.

Character Style indesign skills styles

The New Character Style window opens. You can give the style a recognisable name, and scroll through the formatting options from the left-hand menu; editing them further if you want to.

Character Style indesign skills styles

Click OK and the Style appears in the Character Styles panel. Highlight individual letters, words or phrases in the text of your document and simply click on the Style’s name in the panel to apply it.

Character Style indesign skills styles


Step 3: Create and Apply a Paragraph Style


To create a Paragraph Style, first format a single paragraph of text. You can apply a Drop Cap and Indents, as well as Font, Size, Weight, Leading, Tracking and Alignment.

Paragraph Style indesign skills styles

You can then either place your cursor somewhere in the paragraph or highlight the paragraph before selecting New Paragraph Style from the Paragraph Styles (Window > Styles > Paragraph Styles) panel’s drop-down menu.

Paragraph Style indesign skills styles

You’ll notice there are two sets of menus running along the left-hand side of the panel. The top menu lists the formatting attributes already applied to the text, but you can add further attributes from the bottom menu. Check the Preview box to see your edits as you go.

Paragraph Style indesign skills styles

You can also create a Nested Style by selecting Drop Cap and Nested Styles from the left-hand menu. This allows you to ‘nest’ a Character Style within the Paragraph Style, allowing you to define more specific formatting rules for some characters in the paragraph.

Paragraph Style indesign skills styles

When you’re happy with the settings you’ve defined for the Style and given the Style a name, back under the General options, click OK.

You can apply the Style to a paragraph by resting your cursor in a paragraph of text and clicking the name of the Style in the Paragraph Styles panel.


Step 4: Create and Apply an Object Style


You can apply an Object Style to graphics, shapes and frames. Formatting attributes like Fill, Stroke (colour and weight), gradients and transparencies, as well as text wrap settings, can be saved as an Object Style and applied to objects. Open the Object Styles panel by going to Window > Styles > Object Styles.

Object Style indesign skills styles

As an example, this polygon, with a solid white Fill and a decorative dark red Stroke, is being used as a background shape for a magazine layout (the text frame is separate from the polygon, and layered on top).

Object Style indesign skills styles

Select just the shape alone (you can also copy formatting from a text or image frame) and select New Object Style from the drop-down menu in the Object Styles panel.

Object Style indesign skills styles

In the window that opens give the Style a name, here I’ve named the Style ‘Magazine – Polygon’.

The top left-hand menu lists attributes already applied to the shape, but you can add extra attributes from the bottom left-hand menu, such as transparency, drop shadow, bevel etc.

Object Style indesign skills styles

Once you’re happy with the formatting, click OK to add the Style to the Object Styles panel.

Object Style indesign skills styles

You can then apply the Object Style to other objects (frames, shapes) in your document. Click to select the shape you want to edit, then click once on the name of the Object Style in the Object Style panel.

In this example, you can see how the Style applies all the formatting characteristics of the original shape, such as the Fill Colour, Stroke Colour, Stroke Weight and Stroke Type, to this shape created using the Ellipse Tool (L), but the Style doesn’t alter the original shape of the shape/frame.

Object Style indesign skills styles

Get in the habit of using Styles and see your InDesign documents become more polished and the time spent formatting your designs cut dramatically. Build on your knowledge and develop more InDesign skills using our beginner InDesign tutorials page.

The post InDesign Basics: The Beginner’s Guide to InDesign Styles appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
4045
InDesign Basics: ‘Threading’ Text https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/indesign-threading-text/ Sat, 10 Jan 2015 19:37:26 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=3959 In this Bitesize tutorial, we’ll look at how to ‘thread’ text throughout your InDesign documents. Text is placed in InDesign via a single or number of text frames, and threading allows you to flow a passage of text across multiple frames. Learn how to thread text across text frames Cut or Delete unwanted text frames Learn how to troubleshoot problems, […]

The post InDesign Basics: ‘Threading’ Text appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
In this Bitesize tutorial, we’ll look at how to ‘thread’ text throughout your InDesign documents. Text is placed in InDesign via a single or number of text frames, and threading allows you to flow a passage of text across multiple frames.
  • Learn how to thread text across text frames

  • Cut or Delete unwanted text frames

  • Learn how to troubleshoot problems, including overset text, using the Story Editor and Info panel


Step 1: Thread Text Across Frames


Once you have created a text frame and inserted text into it you may find there is too much text to sit in the frame without overflowing. You will see a small red + symbol at the bottom right-hand corner of the text frame.

The first thing to do is to set up a series of text frames to allow the text to flow into. Select the Type Tool (T) and drag to create new frames across the page(s) of your document.

Return to the first text frame and click once on the + symbol to load the cursor with text. A tiny script symbol will appear next to your cursor.

threading text linking text frames text boxes indesign skills

Hover over the next text frame and click once inside it. The text will flow into the frame. Continue this process until all your text is contained within text frames.

A green No errors notice will appear at the bottom left of the screen (from the Preflight panel) once all the text is visible in the document.

threading text linking text frames text boxes indesign skills

To view how the text frames are connected go to View > Extras > Show Text Threads.

In Normal Mode (View > Screen Mode > Normal, or tap W on the keyboard), when you select a text frame, you will see the Threads connecting the frames, showing how the text is ordered throughout the document.

threading text linking text frames text boxes indesign skills book

If you have loaded your cursor with text, but have no text frame prepared to flow the text into, you can click anywhere on the page. InDesign will create a text frame automatically, and channel the text into it. You can then choose to resize the text frame.

threading text linking text frames text boxes indesign skills


Step 2: Delete or Cut Threaded Frames


You may want to delete or cut a text frame from a threaded sequence.

To cut (and optionally paste elsewhere, complete with a copy of the text from that point forward), select the text frame(s) with the Selection Tool (V, Escape) and go to Edit > Cut.

To delete, simply select, as above, and hit the Backspace or Delete key.


Step 3: Help! My Text Has Disappeared!


Sometimes you might encounter problems with threaded text. For example, if you have received a third party InDesign file which includes some text that you know is in the document (or should be) but may not be showing up on screen.

To check the text is definitely there in the document, go to Edit > Edit in Story Editor. The Story Editor function allows you to view all the text content in the document, regardless of whether it’s overflowing any text frames, or is set in an invisible color or opacity. It will also highlight any problems, such as if any of the text is overset (overflowing the text frames).

thread text story editor overset text

You can also open the Info panel (Window > Info) to view how much text is overset. This is shown next to the number of Words, indicated by a + sign.

thread text info panel overset text

So in the document example here, we have 308 words, plus an additional 141 words which are not visible as they are overflowing a text frame.

If you’re concerned about missing any incidents of overset text, particularly in you’re working with a long document, don’t be!

When you go to Export or Package your InDesign file, ready for print or for handing over to a colleague or client, InDesign will flag up a Warning window, notifying you if you have any overset text, and on which page(s) the error occurs.

overset overflowing text overflowing text frame

Simply click Cancel to return to your document; navigate to the indicated pages to rectify the problem.

Next step, find out how to wrap text around images. You can develop more basic skills from our beginner InDesign tutorials page.

The post InDesign Basics: ‘Threading’ Text appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
3959
Typography: Perfect Fonts for Magazines https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/best-magazine-fonts/ Mon, 29 Dec 2014 13:26:30 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=3903 Magazines make the perfect canvas for fantastic typography. Your choice of font can transform layouts from dull to dramatic, and instantly create a sense of atmosphere, style and authority. Discover our recommendations for the best free and premium magazine fonts. 1. If you’re designing a Foodie magazine… Foodie magazines need to look tactile and sensual. Appropriate use of […]

The post Typography: Perfect Fonts for Magazines appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
Magazines make the perfect canvas for fantastic typography. Your choice of font can transform layouts from dull to dramatic, and instantly create a sense of atmosphere, style and authority.

Discover our recommendations for the best free and premium magazine fonts.


1. If you’re designing a Foodie magazine…


Foodie magazines need to look tactile and sensual. Appropriate use of colour, images and typography can work together to create layouts that look good enough to eat.

To give your designs a homely look, like these covers from New Zealand foodie magazine dish, try the delectable Mrs Eaves or Berylium, as a more rustic alternative (and it’s also free to download!).

typography fonts for magazines foodie lifestyle dish magazine
typography fonts for magazines foodie lifestyle dish magazine

2. If you’re designing a Fashion or Lifestyle magazine…


High-end magazines all share one thing in common – they love a beautiful serif font. It makes fashion titles look elegant, timeless and luxurious. Harper’s Bazaar uses Didot, a typeface which has become synonymous with the magazine. For a less costly alternative (much less costly – it’s free!) take Theano Didot for a spin.

typography fonts for magazines fashion harper's bazaar magazine

To imitate the very classy, minimal look used by Interview magazine, try De Vinne or Bodoni.

typography fonts for magazines fashion interview magazine

That’s not to say that all fashion magazines follow the same formula. In this example layout from Marie Claire, a blown-up serif character provides a gorgeous background for no-fuss sans serif text. Try Fuller Sans DT Extra Light for a similar effect, or the free font District Thin.

typography fonts for magazines fashion marie claire

Fashion and lifestyle titles for men use similar typefaces, but are often more experimental with headers and titles, to give the titles more edgy appeal.

Download Ano to imitate the quirky font used for the subtitles at the bottom of this cover for AnOtherMan magazine.

typography fonts for magazines fashion mens AnOtherMan Another Man

3. If you’re designing a Commentary or Journalism magazine…


More formal magazines covering business, political or social commentary, or human interest stories, use typefaces that communicate a sense of authority and impact. Many contemporary newspapers use similar typographic styles too.

For a typeface that looks both serious and cutting-edge, you can’t go wrong with a strong sans serif. Choose one with versatility that can be used equally effectively across slab headings, italic quotations and smaller body text. Bloomberg Businessweek has used Neue Haas Grotesk since 2010. But you can also achieve a similar effect with the ever-popular Helvetica.

typography fonts for magazines bloomberg businessweek
typography fonts for magazines bloomberg businessweek

 Time uses a version of Times New Roman for the magazine title, which is classic and linked to an authoritative tradition of use across broadsheet newspapers.

Be inspired by Time and mix up traditional serif typefaces with more modern serifs and sans serifs. You can see on the cover here that there are two further fonts in use, a thin sans serif for the running header at the top (try out any sans serif font with a light weight, or Verb Cond Extra Light for a closer match) and an elegant serif typeface for the article summary (try Proforma, Elena or FF Scala).

typography fonts for magazines time magazine

4. If you’re designing a Music magazine…


One option for designing a music magazine is to adapt your typeface(s) to the music genre you’ll be covering in your magazine. Pick an elegant serif for a classical music title, or experiment with digital-inspired styles for an electronic music title. Try out Audimat which is free to download.

Founded in 1967, Rolling Stone has stayed true to a rock-n-roll aesthetic, and still maintains a nostalgic typographic style in spite of a couple of moves to update the title’s look in recent years. Mimic the timeless look of the Rolling Stone logo with Royal Acidbath, which is free for personal use.

 

typography fonts for magazines rolling stone

 

Use Parkinson Roman for body text, a classic serif which gives a nod to 1960s type styles.

 

typography fonts for magazines rolling stone

 

For more help choosing the right fonts, have a read of our best book cover fonts article. Or if any fonts you love to use for magazine design weren’t mentioned here – share them with us in the comments below! 

Craving more of the same? Don’t worry, we’ve got more magazine design inspiration here.

Learn how to make your own magazine with our easy 2-part tutorial.

The post Typography: Perfect Fonts for Magazines appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
14511
InDesign Basics: Working with Images https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/place-and-link-images-indesign/ Tue, 23 Dec 2014 13:53:24 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=3831 In this Bitesize tutorial, you will learn how to manage images in your InDesign documents. We’ll look at how images must be placed and linked, rather than embedded, and how you can adjust your images with ease. Learn how to Place images into your InDesign document Learn how to Link images, and rectify Missing Links using the Links and Preflight panels Step 1: Understanding How […]

The post InDesign Basics: Working with Images appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
In this Bitesize tutorial, you will learn how to manage images in your InDesign documents. We’ll look at how images must be placed and linked, rather than embedded, and how you can adjust your images with ease.
  • Learn how to Place images into your InDesign document

  • Learn how to Link images, and rectify Missing Links using the Links and Preflight panels


Step 1: Understanding How Images Work in InDesign


The first key rule to remember is that images are Placed and Linked in InDesign. They are not embedded, as you might do with a Word Document or in Photoshop.

When you Place an image, InDesign remembers the Link to that image’s location in the relevant folder on your computer. This means you can work quickly and efficiently without dealing with a large quantity of heavy images slowing down your workflow. If you move an image to another location on your computer, i.e. another folder or drive, InDesign will be unable to locate the image and will flag up a warning in the Preflight panel (Window > Output > Preflight).

indesign basics tutorial place and link images

You can also spot an error relating to an image, which is missing or has been edited since you placed it, from the Links panel (Window > Links).

You can insert an image into an InDesign document by going to File > Place.

indesign basics tutorial place and link images


Step 2: Working with Frames


The second rule of images in InDesign is to remember that InDesign places images within a Frame. Whether you prepare a frame before placing the image, or you place the image straight into the document (File > Place) InDesign will contain the image within a four-sided frame by default.

You can choose from three Frame Shapes in the Tools panel (Window > Tools), Rectangle (F), Ellipse and Polygon. These are marked out as different to the Shape Tools by a x shape running through the centre of them.

indesign basics tutorial place and link images frames

Select a Frame Tool, and click and drag to create a frame (hold Shift to create a perfect shape).

With the frame selected, go to File > Place and select an image. Click Open.

indesign basics tutorial place and link images frame

You can arrange the image in the frame by double-clicking to select the image itself within the frame (it will be marked by a brown line around the edges) and holding Shift while readjusting.

indesign basics tutorial place and link images frame

Or you can choose from the options available to you in the control panel which appears at the top of the screen. Fill Frame Proportionally is usually a good option to pick; InDesign will resize the image to the size of the frame, and center the content.

indesign basics tutorial place and link images fitting

You can resize the frame of an image with ease at any time, simply by moving the edges of the frame using the Selection Tool (V, Escape).

However, you will notice that this won’t have any effect on the size or location of the image itself. To select the image directly, double-click on the frame. A brown line will appear around the image, and a small hand icon will also appear, indicating that the image itself is selected.

You can adjust the size of the image, its position in the frame and you can also Rotate it manually or by performing the action Right-Click (Windows) or Ctrl-Click (Mac OS) > Transform.

indesign basics tutorial place and link images frame rotate rotation


Step 3: Help! I’ve got an Error in my Preflight panel!


After inserting images, you can go to Window > Links to view the Links Panel and deal with any images that might be missing or images that have been edited since you placed the original file.

These will be flagged up with a ? (which indicates a missing file) or ! (which indicates a changed file) symbol.

indesign basics tutorial place and link images links panel missing link

Click on the name in the panel to select the missing image and select the chain-link icon at the bottom of the panel to locate the missing image on your computer.

indesign basics tutorial place and link images chain link

You will notice that the same ‘chain link’ icon appears at the top left corner of an image frame when the image is successfully linked. Likewise, a ? or ! symbol will appear next to the image frame if the link is broken.

indesign basics tutorial place and link images frame ellipse elipse

 


To find out about wrapping text around images, try reading this article. You can develop more basic skills from our beginner InDesign tutorials page.

The post InDesign Basics: Working with Images appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
3831
How Did They Do That?: Exaggerated Spacing for Epic Movie Posters https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/movie-poster-tutorial/ Wed, 10 Dec 2014 19:13:01 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=3778 In our new series of tutorials, How Did They Do That?, we dissect the tricks used by graphic design pros and share with you the simple tips that will make your InDesign documents look ultra-professional, even if you’re a beginner to the software! In the second installment of How Did They Do That? we’ll look at how to recreate the […]

The post How Did They Do That?: Exaggerated Spacing for Epic Movie Posters appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
In our new series of tutorials, How Did They Do That?, we dissect the tricks used by graphic design pros and share with you the simple tips that will make your InDesign documents look ultra-professional, even if you’re a beginner to the software!

In the second installment of How Did They Do That? we’ll look at how to recreate the epic typography effect beloved by movie poster designers. It’s surprisingly simple to achieve, and will be guaranteed to transform your layouts from dull to dramatic in no time.


Exaggerated Spacing in Movie Poster Typography


Movie posters are a fantastic canvas for designers to get creative. The poster needs to sell the movie, so it needs to look as appealing as possible. It can also be a challenging medium, as the 2D, non-moving, silent poster has to convey the mood, scale and dynamic qualities of a moving image film.

A very common method of introducing an epic vibe to a movie poster is to apply exaggerated spacing to the text. This creates a sense of oblivion, giving an epic feel to posters. This technique works particularly well for the sci-fi and action/thriller movie genres.

gravity movie posters typography spacing leading how did they do that indesign skills
oblivion movie posters typography spacing leading how did they do that indesign skills
skyfall movie posters typography spacing leading how did they do that indesign skills

The technical term for this typographic technique is ‘tracking’, in which the letter-spacing within a whole word or phrase is increased. Tracking gives designers the advantage of making the text more prominent, without compromising on vertical space. So that means images can still take up the bulk area of the poster.

Take this example, of the Maleficent (2014) poster. The actor’s name, ‘Angelina Jolie’, is set at a relatively small size, but the exaggerated tracking, contrasted against a starkly pale background, ensures the text is prominent and enhances legibility.

maleficent movie posters typography spacing leading how did they do that indesign skills

Increasing the tracking of text also makes text appear super stylish. Because the technique is so simple, spaced text won’t look dated, unlike some currently popular design trends. The technique has been used across classic and iconic movie design; it has certainly stood the test of time. Take these iconic examples of typography, for example – the brand identity for Alien (1979) and the opening credits for Fargo (1996).

alien movie posters typography spacing leading how did they do that indesign skillsfargo opening credits sequence movie posters typography spacing leading how did they do that indesign skills

Now let’s learn how to create our own version. This technique will apply particularly well to poster design, but you can also try it out on magazine layouts, brochures and book covers.

This is what we’ll be creating:

final poster design tracking spacing


Step 1: Set up the Layout of your Poster


Open InDesign and set up a New InDesign Document for Print, Width 27 inches (685.8 mm) and Height 40 inches (1016 mm), the North American standard size for a movie poster (also known as the ‘one-sheet’).

Set the Margin on all sides to 35 mm, and introduce a Bleed on all sides of 10 mm. Click OK.

new document window movie poster

Create an image frame which extends across the whole page, using the Rectangle Frame Tool (F). File > Place a photo within the image frame, selecting Fill Frame Proportionally from the control panel running along the top of the screen.

poster image rectangle frame tool

Open the Layers panel (Window > Layers). Double-click on the default Layer 1 title and rename the layer as Image. Click OK. Lock the layer before proceeding.

layer options


Step 2: Pick a Typeface


With the Layers panel still open, click on the Create New Layer square icon at the bottom right of the panel. Rename this second layer Typography. Click OK.

layer options

Now it’s time to pick the typeface you’re going to use on the poster. Both serifs and san serifs will look equally good with exaggerated spacing. To replicate the Maleficent serif, try something with a classic look like Adobe Caslon Pro, Shango Gothic or Trajan Pro. For the sans serif look, favoured by the Gravity poster, try a typeface with a clean, very modern look, like Futura orDrescher Grotesk.


Step 3: Prepare Your Poster Typography


Select the Type Tool (T), dragging to create a long text frame. Rest this between the margins at the top of the poster. Type ‘Epic movie poster’.

With the text frame selected, or the text highlighted, navigate up to the Character Formatting Controls panel running along the top of the screen. Pick your chosen typeface from the drop-down list of fonts. Here, I’ve gone for Futura Medium. Set the Size to 70 pt, Fill to [Paper], All Caps and adjust the text to Align Center.

Top Skills Tip: You could also use the Eyedropper Tool (I) to lift a pale colour from the image, before changing it to a CMYK Swatch if needed.

sub-heading

Now you can start to get playful with the letter-spacing.

You can adjust Tracking directly from the Character Formatting Controls panel when you have the Type Tool (T) selected.

tracking character formatting controls panel

You can also alter Tracking from the Character panel (go to Window > Type & Tables > Character to open the panel).

tracking in character panel

With the text frame selected, set the Tracking to 940.

character panel

sub-heading with tracking

Move down the page to the centre of the poster. Create a second text frame using the Type Tool (T) and type ‘The’. Set the Font to Futura Medium, Size 400 pt, All Caps and Align Center. Adjust the Colour of the text to [Paper].

With the text frame selected (use the Selection Tool [V, Escape]), go to Object > Effects > Transparency. Keep the Mode as Normal, and reduce the Opacity to 30%.

transparency applied to typography effects

Layer another text frame over the top, and type ‘Search’. As before, set the Font to Futura Medium, All Caps, Align Center and adjust the Colour of the text to [Paper]. This time, set the Size of the text to 220 pt and increase the tracking to a generous 800.

spacing on typography tracking

Continue to build up text on the poster – the names of the cast, the date of release, director’s name etc. Remember to contrast the colour of the text against the background. Use dark swatches against the lighter parts of the image.

For contrast, you can also set some of the text in a serif typeface, like Adobe Caslon Pro, or try a more condensed version of Futura (try Futura Std Light Condensed) for the bulkier sections of text.

movie poster typography

Your movie poster is looking stunning!

final poster design tracking spacing

And it’s such an easy effect to achieve, by simply increasing the letter-spacing, tracking, of your typography. Have fun experimenting further with poster typography to create your own epic effects!


Fancy learning another pro effect? Take a look at this ‘How Did They Do That?’ 3D text effect InDesign tutorial.

Or browse all of our awesome quick tutorials for InDesign.

The post How Did They Do That?: Exaggerated Spacing for Epic Movie Posters appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
3778
InDesign Basics: Importing Text from a Word Document https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/import-text-from-word/ Thu, 27 Nov 2014 18:57:01 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=3656 In this Bitesize tutorial, you will learn how to import text from a word-processing document into your InDesign document. There are several methods for importing and managing large chunks of text, and we’ll take a look at the pros and cons for each technique. Learn how to Place text into your InDesign document Learn how to preserve the format of […]

The post InDesign Basics: Importing Text from a Word Document appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
In this Bitesize tutorial, you will learn how to import text from a word-processing document into your InDesign document. There are several methods for importing and managing large chunks of text, and we’ll take a look at the pros and cons for each technique.
  • Learn how to Place text into your InDesign document

  • Learn how to preserve the format of your source text


Option A: The Simple Methods for Inserting Text


There are three principle methods to insert text into your InDesign document, each of which have their advantages and drawbacks. (For help setting up an InDesign document, read this quick tutorial first.)

For each method, you should first prepare a text frame, or series of text frames for the text to be entered into, using the Type Tool (T). You can prepare a series of text frames, and thread them together before you insert any text.

The simplest two methods for inserting text are:

  • To type text directly into the document (which can be manageable for short headings, titles and captions, but is a time-consuming method).
  • To copy text from your source document and Edit > Paste the text into your InDesign document (which will not carry over any text formatting that may have been applied to the source document).

This shows an original source file created in Microsoft Word, and is the opening chapter of the classic novel, Alice in Wonderland. Some text formatting, such as font choice, font size, first-line indents and text alignment have been applied to the document.

1.1

If we simply copy and paste the content from the Pages document into our InDesign document, the formatting will be lost, only the paragraph structure of the chapter will be maintained. The text will adapt to the default style that has been applied to the InDesign text frame.

indesign skills tutorials inserting word document into indesign

This method potentially gives you more control over the formatting of the text, but you have to define Styles etc in InDesign, and this can be time-consuming.


Option B: Import Text from a Word-Processing Application


A third option for inserting large quantities of text is:

  • to import the text from an existing source file, like a Word or Pages document, by using the Place function (this can maintain the formatting of the original document).

This is the preferred method used by InDesign professionals when dealing with long documents, such as books, reports or catalogues.

Before you place the source file, you should be sure to clean the file of any potential ‘junk’ that might disrupt the import of the text. In your word-processing software, you should choose to Accept All Changes if the document has a number of tracked changes or notes.

In InDesign, ensure you have a text frame, or a series of threaded text frames, prepared on your document.

indesign skills tutorials inserting word document into indesign

Then click away from the frames, onto the pasteboard. Go to File > Place.

Navigate to your source file and check Show Import Options at the bottom of the window. Click Open. The Import Options window will appear, allowing you to select which parts of the text you want to import. You can choose whether to import contents, index, footnotes and endnotes, and you can also tell InDesign how to manage formatting.

You can check the box next to Remove Styles and Formatting from Text and Tables to just import the text without any of the formatting applied to it in the source file. This can be a good way of managing the text, as it gives you more direct control over the formatting of the text going forward in InDesign.

The second option is to keep Preserve Styles and Formatting from Text and Tables checked to keep your existing formatting.

indesign skills tutorials inserting word document into indesign

Click OK.

Your cursor will load with a symbol showing the first few lines of the text. Hover over the first text frame and click once. The text will flow into the frame and into any other text frames the first frame is threaded to.

You may get a warning window flashing up detailing any compatibility issues. A common issue , for example, might be a missing font. You can choose to Find Font, and pick a replacement, or just click OK. All text set in a missing font will be highlighted in the Normal Screen Mode.

indesign skills tutorials inserting word document into indesign

A final option for placing text from a source file is to check Customize Style Import, at the bottom of the Import Options window. This option is only viable if you are sure that styles have been set up correctly in the source file.

indesign skills tutorials inserting word document into indesign

Click on Style Mapping to the right of the check box. This function allows you to assign pre-existing InDesign styles to match the styles in your source file.

indesign skills tutorials inserting word document into indesign

Once you have assigned styles, click OK. Then click OK again in the Import Options window.

Click once in the first text frame. Your text flows into the document, formatted according to your instructions.

indesign skills tutorials inserting word document into indesign

Explore more beginner-level InDesign tutorials here.

The post InDesign Basics: Importing Text from a Word Document appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
3656
InDesign Basics: The Pages panel https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/indesign-pages-panel/ Fri, 14 Nov 2014 15:13:53 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=3633 In this Bitesize tutorial, you will learn about a fundamental feature of InDesign – the Pages panel. Learn about the InDesign Workspace Understand Master pages Learn how to navigate through your InDesign document using the Pages panel Step 1: Locate/Open the Pages panel When you click the OK button in the New Document window, InDesign creates a blank document set […]

The post InDesign Basics: The Pages panel appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
In this Bitesize tutorial, you will learn about a fundamental feature of InDesign – the Pages panel.
  • Learn about the InDesign Workspace

  • Understand Master pages

  • Learn how to navigate through your InDesign document using the Pages panel


Step 1: Locate/Open the Pages panel


When you click the OK button in the New Document window, InDesign creates a blank document set up to your specifications. If you’re used to working in a single-page programme, like Illustrator or Photoshop, or even a word-processing programme, like Microsoft Word or Pages, the way that documents are laid out and navigated through in InDesign can seem quite different and may not be immediately intuitive.

Unless you have set your Preferences to open a pre-defined Workspace, InDesign will open the workspace (the collection and arrangement of panels) in Essentials mode. You can view this, or alter the workspace to suit your specific purposes, from the top right of the control panel running along the top of your screen.

pages panel indesign basics

One of the most important, and useful, panels in InDesign is the Pages panel. This will open by default, or you can find it in the Window menu (Window > Pages). You will see that the panel is actually a group of three panels: Pages, Layers and Links.

pages panel indesign basics

The Layers panel allows you to manage layers in your document, just as you would in Photoshop or Illustrator. You can choose to View or Hide layers, and Lock or Unlock them, by clicking in the two square spaces to the left of the layer’s name in the panel.

pages panel indesign basics

The Links panel keeps track of the images you have placed into your document, and to which folders on your computer they are located (‘linked’ to).

pages panel indesign basics


Step 2: Managing Masters from the Pages panel


For now, let’s look more closely at the Pages panel. At the top of the panel you’ll see a section with two default Master pages, one single page named [None], and a second, a two-page spread, named A-Master.

To edit the A-Master, double-click the page icon in the panel to bring it up on screen. You can place elements on a Master page, and these will be applied in turn to all pages in the document that have that Master applied to them.

A letter, e.g. ‘A’, will appear at the top right corner of the relevant page icon in the panel, indicating which Master is being applied to that page. By default, all pages in your new document will have the A-Master applied to them.

pages panel master pages indesign basics

To apply [None] (i.e. no Master) or a Master (e.g. A-Master) to a page, simply click and drag the Master’s page icon and drop onto a page in the lower section of the Pages panel.

To create a new Master, navigate to the drop-down menu accessible at the top-right of the Pages panel, and select New Master. In the New Master window you can give the Master a Prefix, a Name, and state whether it should be based on an existing Master (i.e. pick up the elements on that Master, and update the new Master accordingly, if you make changes to the original Master.)

pages panel master pages indesign basics


Step 3: Navigating and Editing using the Pages panel


The lower half of the Pages panel shows the actual pages making up the document. When you print the document, only these pages will be printed, not the Master pages.

If you checked Facing Pages in the New Document window, the document will always begin on a right-hand page, whether you have an odd or even number of pages. This mimics the layout of a spread-based document, like a book or magazine.

The first page, unless otherwise specified, will be Page 1. You can navigate through your document by double-clicking on the page icons in the panel. The page which is currently up on screen will be highlighted in the panel.

To create a new page, which will be added after the page that is currently selected, click the Create New Page icon at the bottom right of the Pages panel. To delete a page, click the relevant page icon in the panel, and then click the trash-can icon at the bottom right corner of the panel.

pages panel master pages indesign basics

Explore more super quick InDesign tutorials like this.

The post InDesign Basics: The Pages panel appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
3633
Create a Magazine: Part 2 of 2 https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/create-a-magazine-two/ https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/create-a-magazine-two/#comments Wed, 29 Oct 2014 17:51:49 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=3479 In Part Two of this two-part tutorial, Create a Magazine in InDesign, we’ll build on the Masters we created in Part One, and get creative with the layout of our first feature for ‘Foodie’ magazine. Learn how to use a grid as a guide for placing text and images Get creative with typography to create a vibrant, eye-catching layout Develop an […]

The post Create a Magazine: Part 2 of 2 appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
In Part Two of this two-part tutorial, Create a Magazine in InDesign, we’ll build on the Masters we created in Part One, and get creative with the layout of our first feature for ‘Foodie’ magazine.
  • Learn how to use a grid as a guide for placing text and images

  • Get creative with typography to create a vibrant, eye-catching layout

  • Develop an eye for grouping and displaying images for a professional-standard layout


What you’ll create:


magazine, indesign, spread, part one

In this two-part tutorial we’ll be creating two complete spreads. Sign up to our mailing list to be alerted when the full Magazine course becomes available.


1. Select Images and Fonts for your Magazine Feature


Step 1


Let’s get started. Open InDesign. Go to File > Open and select Foodie Magazine Inside Pages.indd, which you saved at the end of Part One of the tutorial.

You have a 16 page document, with Facing Pages. The A-Master has been applied to pages 4 and 5 of the document, while the B-Master has been applied to pages 6 and 7.

magazine layout design indesign

Navigate down to page 4 of your document.

We’re going to apply a really fantastic typographic effect on this page, but before we do that we need to source a selection of photos that we can use across the whole feature. The images need to work well together, not only in terms of subject matter but also in terms of colour and quality. It’s a good idea to look for images which you can reuse, which can have a different ‘look’ if you show just the right-hand side, or the top left corner of the photo, for example.

These are the images I’ve used in this tutorial. You can download these by clicking on the links below, or pick similar images of your own preference:

lifestyle foodie magazine photo layout

An autumnal tart

ISS_1183_06842

A portrait of a womanlifestyle foodie magazine photo layout

A rustic pot of honey

lifestyle foodie magazine photo layout

Figs and a slab of cheese

lifestyle foodie magazine photo layout

Purple figs on a metal platter

Once you’ve sourced your images, return to InDesign and go to Window > Mini Bridge (from CS6 onwards) to open Mini Bridge. From here, you can navigate to your folder of images and drop them in to your layout with ease.


Step 2


We’ll also need to select a couple of typefaces to use in our layout. In most magazines you will notice that a standardised ‘brand’ font will be used uniformly throughout the publication. This will be applied to body text, page numbers, running headers and some titles. In this tutorial we will use ITC Century Std, which we’ve already used for the page numbers on our Master pages.

It’s also a great idea to pick out a font which has a more decorative style, which you can use for the feature title and quotations. In this tutorial I’ve used the free font Leckerli One, which has a cheerful retro aesthetic.


2. Create a High-Impact Text Effect for the Opening Page


Step 1


Remaining on Page 4 of your InDesign document, select the Type Tool (T) and drag to create a large text frame that extends across most of the page.

Type Y into the frame and set the Font to Leckerli One, Size 650 pt. With the text frame selected, go to Type > Create Outlines to convert the letter into a shape.

magazine layout design indesign typography

From the control panel running along the top of the screen, adjust the Fill Colour of the letter to [None].

magazine layout design indesign typography


Step 2


Either drag and drop an image from Mini Bridge onto the shape, or, with the shape selected, go to File > Place and select an image. Your chosen image will fill the letter. Select Fill Frame Proportionally from the top control panel to arrange the image in the shape.

fill frame proportionallymagazine layout design indesign typography

Ta-dah! A super easy but really effective technique for bringing high-impact to your magazine feature.


3. Build up the Layout of your Opening Spread


Step 1


Navigate to the bottom right corner of Page 4. Select the Type Tool (T) and drag to create a new text frame about 38 mm in Height and 103 mm in Width. Type ‘yum’ into the frame and set the Font to ITC Century Std Book, Size 150 pt, and Font Colour to a new CMYK Swatch, C=0 M=10 Y=11 K=34, a sandy beige colour.

Open the Swatches panel (Window > Color > Swatches) and adjust the Tint percentage to 35%. Position the text frame as shown.

magazine layout design indesign typographymagazine layout design indesign typography

With the text frame selected, go to Edit > Copy and Edit > Paste. Repeat two more times and adjust the text content of each frame to read ‘u (space x 2) m’, ‘scrum!’ and ‘scrum’.

You can rotate one of the text frames by Right-Clicking (Windows) or Ctrl-Clicking (Mac OS) > Transform > Rotate 90 degrees Clockwise.

Introduce a couple of new colours via the Swatches panel, changing the Font Colour of some characters to [Paper] and others to a reddy-brown swatch, C=28 M=100 Y=97 K=34.

Manoeuvre the frames into the positions indicated below.

magazine layout design indesign typography3.1.3


Step 2


Navigate to Page 5 of the spread and hit W on the keyboard to switch the Screen Mode to Normal, if not in that mode already. You can now see the guides marking out the columns on the page.

Select the Type Tool (T) and drag to create a small text frame 84 mm in Width and 80 mm in Height. Position this in the bottom right corner of the page, fitting the text frame snugly across the two far right columns.

Place your type cursor into the frame and set the Font to ITC Century Std Book, Size 11 pt. You can Edit > Paste in your chosen text for the feature or File > Place a Word document into the frame. If you’re just creating a design sample, you can go to Type > Fill with Placeholder Text to insert temporary text.

Highlight the first letter of the first paragraph, or simply place your cursor into the first paragraph of text. In the Character Formatting Controls panel running along the top of the screen, locate the Drop Cap Number of Lines icon and set the value to 4. The first letter will be pulled out in an elegant drop cap.

drop cap indesign

Highlight the first two words of the text, and set the Font Weight to Bold, All Caps, and the Font Colour to [Paper]. You can also highlight the whole first paragraph and make it slightly bigger, 13 pt, to give it more prominence on the page.

Highlight the second paragraph and set the Font Colour to [Paper] for added contrast to the text.

magazine layout design indesign typography


Step 3


Select the Rectangle Frame Tool (F) from the Tools panel and drag to create a small frame 26 mm in Width and 30 mm in Height. Drop the image of the author from Mini Bridge or go to File > Place > Open. In this example, I converted the image to black and white using a Channel Mixer Adjustment Layer in Photoshop, to give it a more professional look. This is also a great way of making all author photographs appear uniform throughout the magazine.

Place the image frame to the top right corner of the text frame you created in Step 2, above. Go to Window > Text Wrap to open the Text Wrap panel. Select the Wrap Around Bounding Box icon and set the Left Offset value to 4 mm.

text wrap indesign

With the image frame still selected, go to Object > Corner Options and set the Size to 3 mm and Shape to Bevel on all sides, to create a framed appearance.

magazine layout design indesign typography

As a final touch on the spread, select the Rectangle Frame Tool (F), as before, and drag to create a frame that fits, as with the text frame, across the two far right columns. Extend the height of the frame down until it sits just above the ‘scrum’ text frame. Drop in an image from Mini Bridge or File > Place a chosen image to give more context and colour to the spread.

magazine layout design indesign typography

Great work! The opening spread of your feature is complete, and it looks super professional…

magazine layout design indesign typography


4. Design a Professional-Standard Second Spread


Step 1


Return to the Pages panel (Window > Pages). Double-click the page icon for Page 6 to bring up the pages 6-7 spread on screen.

Back in Part One of this tutorial we applied the B-Master to these two pages, so we can see page numbers running along the bottom of each page. If the B-Master isn’t already applied to pages 6 and 7, drag the page icon next to the B-Master name at the top of the Pages panel and drop onto the relevant page icons below it.

magazine layout design indesign master

For the final two pages of our four-page feature, you’ll create a stylish page with two columns of text and a quote bubble, plus a colourful image grid on the facing page.

magazine layout design indesign text typography


Step 2


Remain on Page 6 of the document and select the Type Tool (T) from the Tools panel. Drag to create a frame that stretches across the two far-left columns on the page, and reaches from the top margin to the bottom margin. Select the text frame with the Selection Tool (V, Escape) and Edit > Copy, and Edit > Paste. Position the second text frame across the two far-right columns on the page, and adjust the Height so it finishes about halfway down the page.

magazine layout design indesign text frames

Navigate up to the previous spread, pages 4 and 5, and click in the lower right corner of the article text frame on Page 5, where you can see a small red + symbol, that indicates text is overflowing the frame. Return to Page 6 and click once into the left-hand column, allowing the text to flow into it. Repeat the process, connecting the left-hand column with the right-hand column. Go to View > Extras > Show Text Threads to ensure you have connected the frames in the order as shown below.

magazine layout design indesign text threaded

Now you can apply some formatting to the text. In the example here, I started a new paragraph on Page 6 of the article, and setting the Font Colour of the remaining text in the article to [Black]. I then set the Drop Cap Number of Lines to 3 by putting my cursor in the first paragraph, and pulled out the Drop Cap in a reddish-brown swatch, C=28 M=100 Y=97 K=34. Quotes are pulled out in LeckerliOne Regular, Size 15 pt and Font Color C=28 M=100 Y=97 K=34.

magazine layout design indesign typography


Step 3


To recreate the quote bubble effect here, select the Ellipse Tool (L) and, holding Shift, drag to create a perfect circle. Set the Fill Colour to C=28 M=100 Y=97 K=34.

Select the Type Tool (T) and click once in the circle to transform it into a text frame. Type or paste in a quote, before setting the Font to ITC Century Std, Book Italic, Size 19 pt and Align Center, from the Character Formatting Controls panel running along the top of the screen. Open the Text Wrap panel (Window > Text Wrap) and set the Offset value to 7 mm, before positioning the circle to the bottom right of the page, as shown.

magazine layout design indesign text typography ellipse tool shapeWith the circle selected go to Object > Text Frame Options and set the Inset Spacing to 10 mm to give the text frame a margin.

magazine layout design indesign text typography ellipse tool shape


Step 4


You can add more interest and detail to your layout by adding simple shapes and lines to the design.

Select the Ellipse Tool (L) again and, holding Shift, drag to create a perfect circle about 260 mm in Diameter. Set the Fill Colour to [None] and Stroke Colour to C=0 M=10 Y=11 K=34. Open the Stroke panel (Window > Stroke) and set the Weight to 1 mm and Type to Dotted.

magazine layout design indesign text typography ellipse tool shape stroke panel

You can select this shape and Edit > Copy, Edit > Paste a couple of times. Resize the circles while holding Shift to make two smaller shapes and position them in the rough positions as shown below. Make sure you select all the shapes and Ctrl-Click (Mac OS) or Right-Click (Windows) > Arrange > Send to Back. This will ensure that the decorative circles don’t obscure any of the article’s text.

magazine layout design indesign text typography ellipse tool shape


Step 5


With your Page 6 layout complete, scroll over to the right-hand page of the spread, Page 7.

Select the Rectangle Frame Tool (F) from the Tools panel and drag to create an image frame 119 mm in Height. Position this frame at the top left corner of the page, stretching it across to the middle of the page (InDesign will flash up a temporary guide when you reach the center point).

Select the frame and Edit > Copy, Edit > Paste three times, positioning each frame in a corner of the page, as shown.

magazine layout design indesign mini bridge

Either File > Place > Open individual images or drop in images from Mini Bridge, as we did earlier in the tutorial. Select Fill Frame Proportionally from the top control panel to arrange the image best in the frame.

magazine layout design indesign mini bridge


Step 6


As a final pro touch, we can disguise the centre point where the image frames meet and add extra charm to the design with a retro-style shape.

Select the Polygon Tool from the Tools panel (find it in the drop-down menu next to the Rectangle Tool) and, holding Shift, drag to create a small polygon about 65 mm in Diameter. Set the Fill Colour to [Paper] and the Stroke Colour to C=28 M=100 Y=97 K=34. From the Stroke panel, set the Weight to 2 mm and Type to Thick-Thin.

Position the shape centrally on the page, where the four image frames meet.

4.6

Select the Type Tool (T) and drag to create a small text frame that fits snugly within the border. This is a great place to pull out a special quote, or invite the reader to do something extra, like find out more about the article online. Pull out the header text in LeckerliOne Regular, Size 32 pt, and set the remaining text in ITC Century Std.

magazine layout design indesign polygon tool


Congratulations! You’ve designed two full spreads for a magazine feature and it’s looking awesome, and really professional.

You can take away some really useful skills from this exercise. You’ve learnt how to use a grid layout to structure your layout designs, apply typography professionally and create interest and detail with shapes and images.

magazine, indesign, spread, part one

The post Create a Magazine: Part 2 of 2 appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/create-a-magazine-two/feed/ 1 3479
How Did They Do That?: A Simple 3D Effect https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/3d-effect-magazine-cover-tutorial/ https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/3d-effect-magazine-cover-tutorial/#comments Thu, 23 Oct 2014 10:48:25 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=3428 In our new series of tutorials, How Did They Do That?, we dissect the tricks used by graphic design pros and share with you the simple tips that will make your InDesign documents look ultra-professional, even if you’re a beginner to the software! In this first installment of How Did They Do That? you will learn how to recreate […]

The post How Did They Do That?: A Simple 3D Effect appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
In our new series of tutorials, How Did They Do That?, we dissect the tricks used by graphic design pros and share with you the simple tips that will make your InDesign documents look ultra-professional, even if you’re a beginner to the software!

In this first installment of How Did They Do That? you will learn how to recreate a simple 3D effect commonly used across magazine publishing. It’s super simple to do, and at no point do you need to do any fiddly photo editing in Photoshop.


3D Effects in Magazine Cover Design


Magazine covers are the perfect place to get really creative with design. After all, they’re meant to attract the reader to buy the magazine. Some magazine designs get playful and showcase some fantastic optical illusions, turning a 2D medium into a 3D work of art. Here are some inspirational examples, where typography and images interact and appear to ‘jump’ off the page:

magazine cover design 3D effect v magazine

A high-contrast design with subtle 3D effect starring Lupita Nyong’o from V Magazine

magazine cover design 3D effect GIA magazine

Stylish 3D graphics from GIA Magazine
magazine cover design 3D effect zembla magazineA creative cover starring Tilda Swinton from Zembla Magazine

Now let’s create our own version…


Step 1: Set up the Layout of your Magazine Cover


Here, I’ve set up a New InDesign Document for Print, Width 203.2 mm and Height 276.22 mm, a standard size for Condé Nast magazine covers. I’ve set the Top Margin to 12 mm, Bottom Margin to 11 mm and Left and Right Margins to 9 mm.

I then placed a photo within an image frame, using the Rectangle Frame Tool (F), which extended across the whole page.

magazine cover design 3D effect photo alone

I then created a new layer (Window > Layers, to open the Layers panel, > Create New Layer) and used the Rectangle Tool (M) to create a frame with no Fill colour and a solid Stroke set in [Paper], with a Weight of 2 mm (edit these from the Character Formatting Controls panel running along the top of the screen). I’ve adjusted the size of the frame so that it sits on the Margin lines.

I then added a few text frames on another New Layer using the Type Tool (T), setting the Font to Didot in [Paper], and have placed the magazine title so that it sits very snugly against the top right corner of the white frame.

magazine cover design 3D effect before

What would make our cover really ‘pop’ is to create a 3D effect, to give the impression that the white frame is interacting with the woman, and the woman is stepping outside of part of the frame.

magazine cover design 3D effect before and after

Left: The cover before the effect is applied; Right: After the 3D effect is applied


Step 2: Use the Scissors Tool


Select the Scissors Tool (C) from the Tools panel (go to Window > Tools if not shown by default).

scissors tool indesign

Zoom in to the area indicated below, and snip the edge of the white frame just above the top of the woman’s leg.

magazine cover design 3D effectscissors tool indesign

Repeat for the section of frame just below the woman’s leg.

magazine cover design 3D effectscissors tool indesign

Select the section of the white frame lying across the woman’s leg and press the Delete key on the keyboard to remove the section of frame.

scissors tool indesign


Step 3: Use the Rectangle Tool (M)


Select the Rectangle Tool (M) from the Tools panel.

rectangle tool indesign

Drag to create a small long rectangle, at a similar width to the width of the white frame. Set the Stroke colour to [None] and the Fill color to [Paper].

Sit this new frame on top of the existing white frame, so that the bottom edge of the rectangle is almost touching the top of the woman’s leg. You might need to zoom right in and adjust the width of the rectangle so it fits perfectly on the edge of the white frame. You can also adjust the Width of the rectangle to exactly 2 mm from the top control panel.

rectangle tool indesign

Deselect the rectangle and then choose the Direct Selection Tool (A) from the Tools panel. Select the bottom right corner of the rectangle and drag the point down until it touches the woman’s leg. Select the bottom left corner of the rectangle and drag the point until it touches the edge of the woman’s leg also, being careful to keep the vertical sides of the rectangle very straight.

direct selection tool indesign

You can select the white rectangle and Edit > Copy and Edit > Paste, before adjusting, as above, for the lower part of the woman’s leg.

direct selection tool indesign


Step 4: Repeat the Process Above


Repeat the process described in Step 3 and Step 4 above until you have created an effect on the parts of the white frame you want to appear 3D. For this image, this is where I made all the cuts with the Scissors Tool (C), as an example.

scissors tool indesign

And you’re finished! It’s as simple as that!

magazine cover design 3D effect final cover

There’s no need to do any fiddly photo editing to achieve this simple, high-impact effect. Have fun creating your own 3D effects in InDesign!

Explore more awesome quick tutorials for InDesign.

The post How Did They Do That?: A Simple 3D Effect appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/3d-effect-magazine-cover-tutorial/feed/ 1 3428
InDesign Basics: Insert Page Numbers and Create Sections https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/indesign-basics-insert-page-numbers-and-create-sections/ Thu, 02 Oct 2014 14:19:23 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=3353 In this Bitesize tutorial, you will learn how to insert Page Numbers and create Sections in your InDesign document. This is an essential skill if you’re creating a book, magazine, booklet or report in InDesign. Learn how to apply Page Numbers to Master Pages Divide your document into Sections, which is appropriate if you’re creating a longer document, such […]

The post InDesign Basics: Insert Page Numbers and Create Sections appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
In this Bitesize tutorial, you will learn how to insert Page Numbers and create Sections in your InDesign document. This is an essential skill if you’re creating a book, magazine, booklet or report in InDesign.
  • Learn how to apply Page Numbers to Master Pages

  • Divide your document into Sections, which is appropriate if you’re creating a longer document, such as a book or report


Step 1: Apply Page Numbers to a Master Page


Inserting page numbers into your InDesign document is quick and simple. The first thing to realise is that InDesign numbers pages according to the page numbers listed in the Pages Panel (Window > Pages). Unless you want to spend the time manually inserting individual page numbers to override this, you should understand how to define sections in your document (see Step 2, below).

For now though, let’s assume you have a document with just one uniform section, going from Page 1, the first page of the document, to Page x, the last page of the document.

Here, I set up a 16-page document, with Facing Pages. In the Pages Panel, this is what the document will look like:

page numbers sections in indesign

First things first, double-click on the default A-Master page icon in the top section of the Pages Panel. This brings up the Master page spread on screen. Remember, everything we place on the A-Master spread will be applied to the pages which have that Master applied to them. To refamiliarise yourself with Masters, click here.

page numbers sections in indesign

Because this document has facing pages, we want to insert page numbers on both the left and right pages. For now, navigate to the bottom-left corner of the left-hand page by zooming in (Ctrl + [Windows] or Cmd + [Mac]). Select the Type Tool (T) from the Tools Panel (Window > Tools) and drag to create a small text frame, resting the top of the frame against the margin.

page numbers sections in indesignSet the text orientation to Align Left from the Character Formatting Controls panel running along the top of the screen. You can also set the formatting of the page number at this stage, such as Font, Size and Colour.

page numbers sections in indesign

Then go to Type in the menu running along the top of the screen and select Insert Special Character > Markers > Current Page Number. An A Marker will be dropped into the text frame. This will adjust to the relevant page number on each page in your document.

Select the text frame with the Selection Tool (V, Escape) and go to Edit > Copy and Edit > Paste. Manoeuvre this second text frame onto the right-hand page in a mirrored position. InDesign will provide pop-up guidelines once the text frame lines up exactly with the frame on the left-hand page. Once your happy with the positioning, select the Type Tool (T) and adjust the orientation of the text to Align Right from the Character Formatting Controls panel, as before.

page numbers sections in indesignAnd you’re done! The page markers on the Master will be applied to every page that has the Master applied to it.

page numbers sections in indesign

To apply the Master to a page, click and drag the A-Master page icon and drop onto the relevant page icon in the Pages Panel.

page numbers sections in indesign


Step 2: Create Sections in your InDesign document


Larger documents like books and reports may benefit from being split up into sections. In this example we’ll create two simple sections for a short book. Section I will consist of introductory pages and be set in roman numerals, i – vi. Section II will be made up of the main pages of the book, set in standard numbers, from 1 – 10.

If you created the document example in the first step, above, use this same document if you’d like to create your own example document in InDesign.

This is how our document looks. It’s 16 pages long and has page numbers applied to it, as in Step 1, throughout. You can see that the main text of the book starts on Page 7 of the document, and that the page number marker has adjusted accordingly to mark this as 7. But we want this to be numbered as 1 in the book instead. So, let’s discover how to do just that.

sections in indesign

Firstly, select the page icon of the first page in the document in the Pages Panel (Window > Pages). Then navigate to the drop-down menu in the Pages Panel, which you can find at the top-right corner of the panel.

2.1

Select Numbering & Section Options... to open the Numbering & Section Options window.

2.2

Here, you’re presented with a range of options which affect the way your document is numbered and organised. For now, check the option Start Page Numbering at, overriding Automatic Numbering. Then navigate down to the Style drop-down menu and select i, ii, iii, iv… from the options available. Click OK.

2.3

All the pages in your document will now be set in Roman Numerals.

Now, select the relevant page icon in the Pages Panel which represents the page you want to set as the first page of the second section of your document. In this example, this is Page 7 (which is currently numbered as vii). As before, go to the drop-down menu in the Pages Panel and select Numbering & Section Options… to open the Numbering & Section Options window. Again, check Start Page Numbering at, and from the Style drop-down menu select 1, 2, 3, 4… from the options available. Click OK.

sections in indesign

A new section, beginning on page 7 of the document but numbered as 1, has been created.

sections in indesign

Great work!

TIP: If you want to remove page numbers from some pages in your document, e.g. a title page or a blank page, click and drag the [None] Master page icon from the Pages Panel and drop onto the relevant page icon(s) in the lower part of the Pages Panel.

Develop more skills from our beginner InDesign tutorials page.

The post InDesign Basics: Insert Page Numbers and Create Sections appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
3353
InDesign Basics: Wrap Text around Shapes and Images https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/indesign-basics-wrap-text-around-shapes-and-images/ Wed, 24 Sep 2014 15:52:16 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=3196 In this Bitesize tutorial, you will learn how to apply a Text Wrap to Shapes and Frames in your InDesign document. Become familiar with the Text Wrap Panel Apply different types of Text Wrap to a shape or frame Step 1: Create a Frame or Shape and run Text behind them The easiest way to set up your document for text-wrapping is […]

The post InDesign Basics: Wrap Text around Shapes and Images appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
In this Bitesize tutorial, you will learn how to apply a Text Wrap to Shapes and Frames in your InDesign document.
  • Become familiar with the Text Wrap Panel

  • Apply different types of Text Wrap to a shape or frame


Step 1: Create a Frame or Shape and run Text behind them


The easiest way to set up your document for text-wrapping is to position your text frame(s) behind the image frame or shape you want to apply the text wrap effect to. This means you can easily select your frame/shape.

In this example, I have created two columns of text using the Type Tool (T), threading the text between them by clicking once on the bottom right corner of the left-hand column, then once again in the right-hand column.

Then I selected the Rectangle Frame Tool (F) and dragged to create an image frame, before going to File > Place > Open to place an image in the frame. I selected the Ellipse Frame Tool and, holding down Shift, dragged to create a perfect circular frame before placing a second image in this new frame.

text wrap indesign


Step 2: Open the Text Wrap Panel


Select the image frame or shape and go to Window > Text Wrap to open the Text Wrap Panel.

Across the top of the panel there are five icons, each of which indicate a different way of applying the text wrap. The icon to the far left, selected by default, has No Text Wrap applied to your frame/shape. Click on the second icon along from the left to apply a wrap around the Bounding Box of the frame/shape.

You can adjust the Offset values to increase or decrease the distance between the text and the edge of your frame/shape.

You can also adjust the direction of the wrap from the Wrap Options drop-down menu.

text wrap indesign text wrap paneltext wrap indesign bounding box

 

text wrap indesign text wrap panel

text wrap indesign bounding box

Experiment with different ways of applying a wrap using the icons in the Text Wrap Panel. You can wrap text around an Object’s Shape to give a more closely fitted appearance to the wrap. This can work particularly well with outlined text (Type > Create Outlines), which gives a dramatic typographic effect.

text wrap object's shape indesign

text wrap object's shape indesign

text wrap object's shape indesign


Read for more, check out our whole range of quick InDesign tutorials for beginners.

The post InDesign Basics: Wrap Text around Shapes and Images appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
3196
InDesign Basics: Gradients in InDesign https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/indesign-basics-gradients-in-indesign/ Wed, 24 Sep 2014 10:15:38 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=3159 In this Bitesize tutorial, you will learn how to apply Gradients in your InDesign document. Understand how Gradients work in InDesign Become familiar with the Effects Window Apply Gradient and Feather Effects Step 1: Create a Frame or Shape In order to apply a Gradient in InDesign, you must create a frame or shape to apply the effect to. To create an image frame: […]

The post InDesign Basics: Gradients in InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
In this Bitesize tutorial, you will learn how to apply Gradients in your InDesign document.
  • Understand how Gradients work in InDesign

  • Become familiar with the Effects Window

  • Apply Gradient and Feather Effects


Step 1: Create a Frame or Shape


In order to apply a Gradient in InDesign, you must create a frame or shape to apply the effect to.

To create an image frame:

Select the Rectangle (F), Ellipse or Polygon Frame Tool from the Tools Panel (Window > Tools) and drag to create a frame on the page. Go to File > Place > Open to insert an image.

To create a shape:

Select the Rectangle (M), Ellipse (L) or Polygon Tool from the Tools Panel (Window > Tools) and drag to create a shape on the page. Fill the shape with color to be able to see a gradient effect once applied.

gradient shape indesign


Step 2: Open the Effects Window and Apply a Gradient Feather


Select your shape or frame with the Selection Tool (V, Escape) and then go to the top menu. Object > Effects > Gradient Feather… opens the Effects window.

Gradient Feather applies an easy to adjust Linear or Radial gradient to your shape or frame. Adjust the gradient to Radial from the Type drop-down menu. You can adjust the extent of the gradient using the Gradient Stops slider, and choose to flip the direction of the gradient by selecting the Reverse Gradient icon to the right of the slider.

You can also adjust the Opacity and Angle of the gradient.

gradient feather indesign linear
gradient shape indesign
gradient feather indesign

Once you’re happy with the result, click OK.

gradient feather indesign radial


Step 3: Apply a Basic Feather


On the left-hand side of the Effects window you will notice a list of possible effects you can apply to your shape or frame. Two places above the Gradient Feather effect is Basic Feather. Click on Basic Feather to open the options for this effect.

Basic Feather applies a uniform, more subtle gradient around the edges of your shape or frame, with a defined boundary. You can adjust the Feather Width, Choke (which effects how diffused the edges appear), the appearance of the Corners and the amount of Noise (grainy appearance) from the Effects window.

basic feather indesign

When you’re pleased with the look, click OK.

basic feather indesign


Step 4: Apply a Directional Feather


There is a third gradient effect you can apply to your shape or frame from the Effects window. This is the Directional Feather effect, which sits between the Basic Feather and Gradient Feather options. Click on Directional Feather to adjust the options for this effect.

Directional Feather gives a uniform gradient effect with a sharper appearance. As with the Basic Feather, you can adjust the Feather Width, Choke and Noise, but you can also give the effect more direction, by adjusting the Shape, giving the fill of the frame or shape a jaunty appearance.

directional feather indesign

When you’re happy with the effect, click OK.

directional feather indesign

You can remove a gradient or feather effect by navigating back to the Effects window (Object > Effects > click on one of the Feather or Gradient options) and unchecking the check box next to the name of the effect.

Can’t wait to learn more? Check out all our InDesign tutorials.

The post InDesign Basics: Gradients in InDesign appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
3159
InDesign Basics: Creating a Book https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/create-a-book-in-indesign/ Sun, 14 Sep 2014 11:14:57 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=2676 In this Bitesize tutorial, you will learn how to create a basic Book Template in InDesign. How to set suitable Page Sizes and Margins for Paperback and Hardback books How to create simple Master Pages for maintaining consistency throughout your book How to define Page Numbering Sections This tutorial covers how to create the inside pages of a book. Check back soon for a Book Cover Template tutorial. Step 1: Creating a Book File […]

The post InDesign Basics: Creating a Book appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
In this Bitesize tutorial, you will learn how to create a basic Book Template in InDesign.
  • How to set suitable Page Sizes and Margins for Paperback and Hardback books
  • How to create simple Master Pages for maintaining consistency throughout your book
  • How to define Page Numbering Sections
  • This tutorial covers how to create the inside pages of a book. Check back soon for a Book Cover Template tutorial.

Step 1: Creating a Book File


First things first – how does InDesign help you to create a book? Before you go to create a New Document in InDesign, you should know that InDesign offers you a really useful feature for creating long book documents – these are called Book Files.

A Book File is a collection of documents grouped together to form a whole book. You can share Styles across the documents within the Book and the Numbering Sequence will continue from one document to the next. You can also make edits to your book more quickly and easily when you work from a Book File. Instead of opening a single large file with a high number of pages, you can simply bring up the section or chapter you would like to edit.

Note: In this tutorial we are creating a book for print. For producing digital and eBooks, check back soon for more tutorials.

Let’s start by creating our own Book File. Open InDesign. From the Welcome Window, select Book from the Create New list. You can also go to File > New > Book. You’ll be prompted to give the Book a Name and to Save it. Find a suitable name and location, then click OK.

book file welcome window

book file

 

A small window will appear, which is currently empty. You’ll notice when you click the + icon that InDesign wants you to add an existing InDesign document to the Book.

book file

The next step is to create your first Chapter or Section, which we’ll then add to the Book File…


Step 2: Creating your first Document


First, decide how your book will be divided up. If it’s a long book, you may have split the text into Chapters. If it’s very long, you may have Sections, with Chapters sitting within them.

Your first task is to create a document which will feature the formatting Styles you will be using across the whole book. A good place to start is with the first chapter of your book. Save your introductory pages to do afterwards, as they will have some unique formatting atypical to the chapters in the book.

For a Standard Paperback:

(United States ‘B’ Format – 130mm x 198mm [5.12″ x 7.8″]).

Go to File > New Document to open the New Document Window.  Ensure the Intent is set to Print. Set the No. of Pages to 10 (you may know the number of pages your text will probably fill, but you can easily add or delete extra pages as you go) and keep Facing Pages checked.

Next up, set the Print Size by selecting Custom… from the drop-down menu. In the Custom Page Size window type a Name for your custom page size, such as B – Paperback. Set the Width to 130 mm and the Height to 198 mm, click Add to save it to the custom list (this means you can reuse this Size template for future documents by simply selecting it from the Custom menu), and then OK.

book file page size

 

Back in the New Document window, we can set the Margins and the Bleed (to find out more about the basics of creating New Documents, click here).

If you look at an example of a Paperback book, you’ll notice that the Inside Margin (i.e. the margin which sits against the bind of the book) will be a little more generous than the Outside Margin. This is to allow for a few millimeters of the page to be sucked into the binding and the fold created by the binding. For a glue-bound (otherwise know as ‘perfect bound’) Paperback, whatever the page size, allow an extra 3 mm on the Inside Margin.

Set the Margins to: Top 15 mm, Bottom 20 mm, Inside 18 mm, Outside 15 mm.

Include a Bleed if you will have any pages in the book with content that will cross the edge of the page (e.g. colored pages, or images that extend across the edge of the page). If you’re producing a standard typeset paperback on white paper, you might not need one.

Set the Bleed to: Top 5 mm, Bottom 5 mm, Inside 0 mm, Outside 5 mm. You won’t need a Bleed on the Inside edge. And click OK.

book file new document

paperback page

For a Standard Hardback:

Hardcover sizes vary widely, the dimensions stated here are common for printing hardcover novels.

Go to File > New Document to open the New Document Window.  Ensure the Intent is set to Print. Set the No. of Pages to 10 and keep Facing Pages checked.

Next up, set the Print Size by selecting Custom… from the drop-down menu. In the Custom Page Size window type a Name for your custom page size, such as Hardback Novel. Set the Width to 151 mm and the Height to 233 mm, click Add to save it to the custom list, and then OK.

hardback book custom page size

 

In the New Document window, let’s set the Margins and the Bleed.

If you look at an example of a Hardback book, you’ll notice that the Inside Margin will be more generous than the Outside Margin, even more so than a Paperback if the hardback has Stitch Binding. For a glue-bound (perfect bound) Hardback, whatever the page size, allow an extra 5 mm on the Inside Margin. For a stitch-bound hardback, you may need a little extra added to the Inside Margin; check with your printer before you set up your document.

Set the Margins to: Top 23 mm, Bottom 25 mm, Inside 25 mm, Outside 20 mm.

Include a Bleed if you will have any pages in the book with content that will cross the edge of the page (e.g. colored pages, or images that extend across the edge of the page). If you’re producing a standard typeset hardback on white paper, you might not need one.

Set the Bleed to: Top 5 mm, Bottom 5 mm, Inside 0 mm, Outside 5 mm. You won’t need a Bleed on the Inside edge. Click OK.

hardback new document

hardback page


Step 3: Creating a simple set of Master Pages for your book


Now you have set up the first document for your book, you should create a set of Master Pages to carry common features (such as page numbers and page headers) across all the pages. Here we’ll be working using the Paperback document we set up earlier, in Step 2, but you can follow the same steps for a Hardback as well.

Open the Pages Panel by going to Window > Pages in the top menu bar. You’ll notice at the top of the Pages Panel there is a marked-off section, with a default Master spread, A-Master. Double-click on the double-page icon on the right-hand side of the Panel to bring up the A-Master on screen.

pages panel

Now click in the top-right corner of the Pages Panel, to bring up a drop-down menu. Select Master Options for A-Master… to open an options window for the Master. Rename the Master as Start of Chapter – Master and click OK.

master optionsThis will be the Master spread applied to all pages which begin a chapter, i.e. the text will start halfway down the page and there will be a prominent chapter title.

We will also need to create a second Master spread, for applying to all pages in the body of chapters, i.e. simple text-filled pages with page numbers and a running header at the top of each page. To do this, click once again in the top-right of the Pages Panel to open the drop-down menu. Select New Master…

master menu

In the New Master window that appears, set the Prefix to B and name the Master BodyMaster. Click OK.

master options

Now you can edit the Masters and then apply them to the relevant pages.

On the Start of Chapter – Master you can insert page numbers at the bottom of each page. Create a text frame using the Type Tool (T) and stretch it centrally across the margins of the left-hand page. Set your desired Font (here I’ve used Fournier Std), Size and a Centered Orientation (using the options available to you in the Character Formatting Panel). Then go to Type > Insert Special Characters > Markers > Current Page Number to drop in a flexible page number glyph. This will appear as A on the Master but will adapt to the given page number on the pages themselves.

TIP: You can also flank the page number with decorative glyphs (Window > Type & Tables > Glyphs to view the full selection available to you in your chosen font) to add an extra flourish.

With your page number text frame selected, go to Edit > Copy and Edit > Paste to create a second page number frame. Manouver this into a mirrored position on the right-hand page.

master chapter title

You may also want to mark out where you would like the Chapter Titles to sit on the page. You can pull down Guides from the top Ruler (View > Show Rulers) onto the Master to mark where a text frame should sit. This makes it extra easy to ensure you’re always placing chapter titles in the same place each time:

paperback pageTo apply the Start of Chapter – Master to the first page in your document, simply click and drag the right-hand page of the Master icon in the Pages Panel, dropping it on top of the Page 1 icon in the section of the panel below.

Once you’ve done that, return to the Start of ChapterMaster and select both the page number text frames at the bottom of the page. Edit > Copy and double-click the BodyMaster in the Pages Panel to bring up your second Master, then simply Edit > Paste in Place to drop the page number frames onto the Master.

You may want to insert Running Headers along the top of your pages too. To do this, remain on the Start of Chapter – Master and introduce two new text frames using the Type Tool (T). Place these, with matching formatting to your page numbers, at the top of the left and right pages of the Master, as shown below. You can type the name of the book in the left frame, and the chapter number in the right frame.

master body pages

To apply this Master to the remaining 9 pages in your document, you can either manually drag and drop the Master icon onto pages in the Pages Panel, or click in the top-right of the panel to open the drop-down menu, select Apply Master to Pages… and type in the page range you would like the Master to be applied to.


Step 4: A Brief Note on Numbering and Sections


You may want a very simple numbering arrangement for your book – the first page of the book will be Page 1 and so on. But you may want to have Sections, each with their own numbering system. A common example of this is a book with the introductory pages listed in Roman Numerals, with Page 1 only beginning from the first page of the first chapter.

We’ll set up an example here with our paperback document. Say we wanted to start a new section on Page 5 of the document, and number the first four pages in Roman Numerals…

In the Pages Panel, click the Page 1 icon to select it, then click on the right-hand corner of the panel to bring up the drop-down menu. Select Numbering & Section Options… to open a new window. Check the Start Page Numbering at: box, keeping the value as 1. Next to Style, pick i, ii, iii, iv… from the drop-down menu. Then click OK. The whole document has been renumbered in Roman Numerals.

numbering and sections

Now click on the Page 5 icon in the Pages Panel. Again, bring up the Numbering & Section Options… window, and again check the Start Page Numbering at: box, keeping the value, as before, as 1. This time, for Style, select the 1, 2, 3, 4… option and click OK.

And there you have it! An easy way of creating new sections. Simply repeat the process above to create more new sections throughout your book.

numbering and sections

numbering and sections


Step 5: Adding Documents to your Book File


Now you’ve created your first Chapter in your book, you can add this to your Book File (see Step 1).

If the Book File isn’t already open, go to File > Open and navigate to the folder where it is saved. Open as you would a normal document file. Click the + icon in the window that appears; you will be prompted to navigate to an InDesign document. First, ensure you have saved your document with a suitable name, such as Chapter One. Then navigate to the document as prompted and click Open.

book file

You’ve created a simple book template in hardly any time at all! Well done!

Now you can add more documents to your Book File (you don’t need to complete each document before you add it, just set it to the same size and Copy and Paste the Masters across to each new document).

The post InDesign Basics: Creating a Book appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
2676
InDesign Basics: Word-Count your InDesign Document https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/word-count-indesign-document/ Sun, 14 Sep 2014 11:14:03 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=2753 In this Bitesize tutorial, you will learn how to word-count text in your InDesign document. How to use the Info Panel to conduct a super quick and simple Word-Count This tutorial covers word-counting in InDesign. See here to learn how to spell-check your document. Step 1: Open the Info Panel Go to Window > Info to open the Info Panel. Step 2: Conduct a Word-Count To count words in a […]

The post InDesign Basics: Word-Count your InDesign Document appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
In this Bitesize tutorial, you will learn how to word-count text in your InDesign document.
  • How to use the Info Panel to conduct a super quick and simple Word-Count
  • This tutorial covers word-counting in InDesign. See here to learn how to spell-check your document.

Step 1: Open the Info Panel


Go to Window > Info to open the Info Panel.

info panel


Step 2: Conduct a Word-Count


To count words in a select area of text, highlight the text and see the Character, Word, Line and Paragraph counts appear in the Info Panel.

To count words in a whole story, stretching across a large number of text frames, click your cursor into one of the text frames, and see the relevant info appear in the Panel.

info panel

The post InDesign Basics: Word-Count your InDesign Document appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
2753
Create a Magazine: Part One of Two https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/create-a-magazine-in-indesign-one/ Sun, 14 Sep 2014 11:08:31 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=2455 In Part One of this two-part tutorial, Create a Magazine in InDesign, we’ll create a new print document in InDesign and apply a simple grid. This will lay down the foundation for creating Master Pages and your first feature for ‘Foodie’ magazine. Learn how to set up a New Document for print Create a simple grid for your two-spread magazine feature […]

The post Create a Magazine: Part One of Two appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
In Part One of this two-part tutorial, Create a Magazine in InDesign, we’ll create a new print document in InDesign and apply a simple grid. This will lay down the foundation for creating Master Pages and your first feature for ‘Foodie’ magazine.
  • Learn how to set up a New Document for print

  • Create a simple grid for your two-spread magazine feature

  • Create Master spreads for the layouts in your magazine


What you’ll create:


magazine, indesign, spread, part one

In this two-part tutorial we’ll be creating two complete spreads. Sign up to our mailing list to be alerted when the full Magazine course becomes available.


1. Create a New Document in InDesign


Step 1


Let’s get started. Open InDesign. From the Welcome Window, select Document from the Create New list.

In the New Document window, set the Intent to Print from the drop-down menu. (To familiarise yourself with the New Document Window refer to this Bitesize Skill)

We’ll set up the whole magazine, although in this two-part tutorial we’ll be working on just one spread. Set the Page No. to 16 and keep Facing Pages checked.

From the Page Size drop-down menu select Custom… In the Custom Page Size window type a Name for your custom page size. As we’ll be using a standard size in this tutorial, which is used by a number of commercial publishers, including Condé Nast, a suitable name might be Magazine Conde Nast. Set the Width to 203.2 mm and the Height to 276.22 mm. Click Add, then OK.

custom page size, magazine, conde nast


Step 2


Back in the New Document window, keep the Orientation as the default selection, Portrait. Moving down to the Columns section, set the Number of columns to 4. This will create a basic grid framework for arranging text columns.

Set the Margins to: Top 17 mm, Bottom 20 mm, Inside 17 mm, Outside 14 mm.

Set the Bleed to: Top 3 mm, Bottom 3 mm, Inside 0 mm, Outside 3 mm. You won’t need a Bleed on the Inside edge. Click OK.

custom page size, magazine, conde nast
magazine, grid


2. Set up Master Pages


Step 1


In the Pages Panel (go to Window > Pages to open) you’ll see that at the top of the panel InDesign has already created a default A-Master for you. This consists of a two-page facing spread. Any content you place on this Master spread will appear on all pages with the A-Master applied to them. By default, InDesign has applied the Master already to all pages in your document. You can see this due to the appearance of a small A icon at the top corner of each page in the Pages Panel.

magazine, masters

Double-click the A-Master icon (the image of the two facing pages at the top of the Pages Panel) to bring it up on screen. Now we can begin adding features to the Master like Page Numbers and any other decorative background content we’d like to appear consistently across a number of pages.

The Columns and Margins (highlighted in purple and pink) mark out where our columns of text will go. Let’s drag some Guides from the Rulers (View > Show Rulers) to mark out where the Page Numbers should sit on the page.

From the Top Ruler, click and drag a Guide downwards towards the bottom of the left-hand page. At the top-left of the screen you’ll notice an X or Y counter appears as you drag the guide. This indicates the position of the guide on the page. You can manually enter a position in the text box here to create a precisely placed guide. Drag the first guide to Y position 267 mm on the left-hand page of the spread. Repeat for the right-hand page.

magazine, guides X position

Drag a second guide from the top ruler to Y position 9 mm on the left-hand page. Repeat for the right-hand page.

Drag another guide, this time from the left-hand ruler, to X position 9 mm. Drag a second to X-position 397.4 mm, so it sits on the far-side of the right-hand page.

magazine, guides


Step 2


Let’s add some Page Numbers to our Master, to keep the reader orientated in your magazine.

Select the Type Tool (T) from the Tools Panel (Window > Tools, if not already visible), and drag to create a small text frame. Position this in the bottom left corner of the left-hand page and type page (space). Go to Type > Insert Special Character > Markers > Current Page Number. InDesign will drop in a page number marker, which is marked out as an A on your A-Master.

magazine, page numbers

Highlight the text and set the Font to ITC Century Std, Light, Size 9 pt.

Open the Swatches Panel (Window > Color > Swatches) and create a New Color Swatch from the drop-down menu. Set it to CMYK, C=0, M=10, Y=11, K=34, click Add and OK. Set the Font Color to this new Swatch.

magazine, swatches

From the Tools Panel, select the Line Tool () and, holding Shift, drag horizontally to create a line that extends from the left of the page number to the edge of the second column. With the line selected, open the Stroke Panel (Window > Stroke), set the Weight to 0.25 mm, Type to ThinThin, Start to Circle, and End to Simple Wide (or flip the latter two settings depending on how you created the line). Set the Stroke Color to C=0, M=10, Y=11, K=34, as before.

magazine, line

Select the text frame containing the page number and Edit > Copy, and Edit > Paste. Move the frame into a mirrored position on the right-hand page, switching the Orientation to Align Right (in the top panel, Character Formatting Controls). Return to the left page and select and Edit > Copy the arrowed line. Edit > Paste, and Right-Click (PC) or Ctrl-Click (Mac OS) > Transform > Flip Horizontal. Manoeuvre into position onto the right-hand page to mirror the left.

magazine, line, page number

Select both the text frame and line on the right-hand page and Edit > Copy, Edit > Paste. Position at the top left corner of the page, resting the text frame within the guides you created earlier. Edit the text to read FOODIE NEWS, adjusting the length of the line a little if you need to. Copy the Line, Paste and Right-Click (PC) or Ctrl-Click (Mac OS) > Transform > Flip Horizontal again, and extend it along the top left of the right-hand page.

magazine, line

Let’s also Paste another line, and Right-Click (PC) or Ctrl-Click (Mac OS) > Transform > Rotate 90 degrees CCW, positioning this shape below the text frame at the top left corner of the page.

magazine


Step 3


This Master will be the template for the opening page of a feature in our magazine. Let’s give it a name so we know what it is.

Go to the Pages Panel and click to select the A-Master page icon. Click the three bars at the top-right of the panel to open a drop-down menu. Select Master Options for “A-Master”… and rename the Master MasterFeature First Spread. Click OK.

magazine, master options
magazine, master options


Step 4


Return to your newly-renamed Master on screen. For this feature, we will need a decorative background – a wood panel image to give the article an earthy, autumnal feel.

Select the Rectangle Frame Tool (F) from the Tools Panel and drag to create a frame that extends across the whole of the right-hand page of the Master, right up to the Bleed. Go to File > Place and select an appropriate image (here I’ve used this wooden background from Ingimage), and click OK.

Select Fill Frame Proportionally from the top control panel to arrange the image nicely in the frame.

magazine, background, wood

From the Tools Panel, select the Rectangle Tool (M) and drag to create a rectangle the same width and height as the frame you’ve just created. Position it over the top and set the Stroke to [None] and Fill to a new swatch (Window > Color > Swatches > New Color Swatch), CMYK, C=28, M=100, Y=97, K=34.

With the rectangle selected, go to Object > Effects > Transparency and set the Mode to Normal and adjust the Opacity to 70%. Click OK.

magazine, background, transparency

With the shape still selected, adjust the Tint of the swatch to 30% from the Swatches Panel or top control panel, as shown.

magazine, background, swatch, tint

Select both the image-filled frame and the rectangle shape by dragging your mouse, and Right-Click (PC) or Ctrl-Click (Mac OS) > Arrange > Send to Back. Your page numbers and lines are not easily seen. Change the Font Color of the text and the Stroke Color of the lines to [Paper] to make them pop a little more. That’s your first Master done!

magazine, master template, background, foodie magazine


Step 5


Let’s create a second Master that’s more pared back and simple, which would suit the inside pages of a feature or article.

In the Pages Panel, open the drop-down menu from the top-right corner. Select New Master… and maintain the default B prefix. Rename the Master MasterFeature Spread and click OK.

magazine, master, new master

Return for a moment to the A-Master on screen, and drag your mouse across to select all the text frames and lines on the page (you can hold down Shift and deselect the rectangle shape and the image frame), and go to Edit > Copy.

Return to your new B-Master on screen by double-clicking the page icon in the Pages Panel and go to Edit > Paste in Place. Adjust the Font Color of the text and the Stroke Color of the lines to C=0, M=10, Y=11, K=34.

magazine, master, new master

Delete a couple of the lines, as shown, to give this Master a much more simple, minimal look.

magazine, master, new master


Step 6


You’ll notice that InDesign has automatically applied the A-Master to all pages in your document. For now though, we just want it applied to a single spread.

Click on the [None] Master icon at the very top of the Pages Panel. Go to the drop-down menu in the panel and select Apply Master to Pages… In the window, type 1-3, 6-17 to apply the [None] Master to all pages in your document except a single spread, pages 4-5.

magazine, apply master

Click and drag the B-Master icon’s left page down and drop onto the Page 6 icon. Drag and drop the B-Master icon’s right page onto Page 7. File > Save As your InDesign document as Foodie Magazine Inside Pages.

magazine, apply master, master spreads

Great work! You’ve set up the Master pages for your magazine layout, which will provide the perfect foundation for your editorial content.

magazine, indesign, spread, part one


Go to Part Two of this two-part tutorial to find out how to give your magazine layouts a professional, gorgeous finish!

The post Create a Magazine: Part One of Two appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
2455
InDesign Basics: Spell-Check your InDesign Document https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/spell-check-indesign-document/ Sun, 14 Sep 2014 11:00:56 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=2742 In this Bitesize tutorial, you will learn how to spell-check your InDesign document. How to set Spelling Preferences Check spelling in your document This tutorial covers spell-checking in InDesign. See here to learn how to word count. Step 1: Set your Spelling Preferences You can set Spelling Preferences before you begin working on a document, while you’re working, or once the document is […]

The post InDesign Basics: Spell-Check your InDesign Document appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
In this Bitesize tutorial, you will learn how to spell-check your InDesign document.
  • How to set Spelling Preferences
  • Check spelling in your document
  • This tutorial covers spell-checking in InDesign. See here to learn how to word count.

Step 1: Set your Spelling Preferences


You can set Spelling Preferences before you begin working on a document, while you’re working, or once the document is complete. To ensure all future documents observe the same spelling rules, be sure to set your Preferences before you begin.

Go to Edit > Preferences > Spelling (Windows) or InDesign > Preferences > Spelling (Mac OS) in the top menu to open the Preferences window.

spelling preferences

You can tell InDesign to note any Misspellings (in accordance with your chosen Language Dictionary [Preferences > Dictionary]), Repeated Words, Uncapitalised Words and Uncapitalised Sentences.

You can also choose to enable Dynamic Spelling, which underlines potential spelling mistakes as you work.

spelling preferences


Step 2: Locate and Correct Spelling Errors


Go to Edit > Spelling > Check Spelling to view highlighted errors. The Check Spelling window will give you possible corrections for each error, and invite you to Change or Skip them. When you’re finished, click Done.

spell-check

The post InDesign Basics: Spell-Check your InDesign Document appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
2742
InDesign Basics: Creating your First Document https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/indesign-basics-creating-your-first-document/ https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/indesign-basics-creating-your-first-document/#comments Sat, 13 Sep 2014 20:09:35 +0000 https://indesignskills.com/?p=2577 In this Bitesize tutorial, you will learn how to create a New Document in InDesign, and how to save reusable Custom Page Sizes for print and web design. Learn how to create a New Document in InDesign Become familiar with the New Document Window Set Margins and Columns Understand Bleed and Slug Create Custom Page Sizes Step 1: Overview of the New Document […]

The post InDesign Basics: Creating your First Document appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
In this Bitesize tutorial, you will learn how to create a New Document in InDesign, and how to save reusable Custom Page Sizes for print and web design.
  • Learn how to create a New Document in InDesign

  • Become familiar with the New Document Window

  • Set Margins and Columns

  • Understand Bleed and Slug

  • Create Custom Page Sizes


Step 1: Overview of the New Document Window


Let’s get started. Open InDesign. From the Welcome Window, select Document from the Create New list.

The New Document Window opens on screen. This image shows everything you need to address before clicking that OK button…

new document window all features

There’s quite a lot going on here, but it’s really important that you set all your values correctly before creating your Document. It will be much more fiddly to make changes afterwards.

Let’s break it down bit by bit…

 


Step 2: Set the Intent of your Document


The first thing to tell InDesign is what your final document is intended for, i.e. is it for Print (e.g. a magazine, book, brochure, poster etc), Web (e.g. a website banner) or for Digital Publishing (e.g. a digital eBook designed for tablets or smart devices)? InDesign will be prompted to bring up recommended Page Sizes depending on your choice, and also set the Units and Increments of your document (e.g. Millimeters for Print, or Pixels for Web/Digital).

new document window intentClick once on the default ‘Print’ value next to Intent to bring up a drop-down menu. Click on the three different Intent options and see how the rest of the New Document Window adapts accordingly. If you keep ‘Print’ as your Intent, you are offered a number of pre-loaded, standard Page Sizes in the drop-down Page Size Menu, and all Units will be in Millimeters.

Intent page size printYou can see that InDesign has some preloaded Page Sizes ready to use, such as US Business Card, Letter, as well as European A5, A4, A3 etc. You can choose a preloaded size or create a Custom Page Size. Let’s keep the Intent as Print, and create a Custom Size for a paperback Book as an example…


Step 3: Set the Page Size of your Document


From the Page Size drop-down menu select Custom… (the last option) to open the Custom Page Size window.

You can set the Width and Height of each Page in your document and give the Custom Size a Name by typing in the bar at the top of the window. For example, for a standard European Paperback Book, you would set the values to Width, 132 mm and Height, 197 mm. Name your Custom Size, ‘Paperback Book’ and Click OK.

custom page size

You may find back in the New Document window that InDesign has switched the Orientation of your document from Portrait to Landscape. Ensure the correct Orientation is selected by clicking the left-hand Portrait icon.

page orientationNext, you want to make sure the Facing Pages check-box is selected. If you’re creating a book, magazine or booklet, you will want to be able to view spreads (of two facing pages) while you design. When you check Facing Pages, your Document will always start on a Right-Hand single page.

If you’re creating a single-page document (e.g. a Letter or Resume), or a document which will be printed on one single ream of paper stock (e.g. a Business Card, a Folding Brochure [with no spine, unlike a Booklet], or a Book Cover), you should uncheck the Facing Pages box.

For this Book example, keep Facing Pages checked.

facing pages


Step 4: Define Margins for your Document


Setting accurate Margins is a very important task before creating your Document. Adequate Margins will give your final document a professional look, and also, in the case of books in particular, ensure that text or images don’t disappear into the binding at the spine. These are recommended Margin measurements for a Paperback Book.

NOTICE that the Inside Value (i.e. the edge of the Page that sits against the spine of the Book) is Wider than the Outside Value. This allows extra white space where the page will be sucked into the binding or the folds of the book. If you’re producing a Booklet (which also has a spine, but may be bound using a Lay-Flat binding technique) you should do the same, but the Inside Margin doesn’t need to be as wide, just add 2-3 extra millimeters.

Set the Margin values to:

Top: 22.3 mm

Bottom: 22.3 mm

Inside: 19.05 mm (As this is a Book, add on an extra 5-6 mm to your Outside Margin)

Outside: 12.7 mm

margins new document


Step 5: Define Columns for your Document


To help develop a uniform Grid throughout your Document, you should set the Number of Columns and the Gutter value (the space between Columns). Setting Columns does not restrict where you can place text or images, but simply provides visual guidelines.

Columns are the backbone of a number of print documents, the most obvious being a Newspaper format. Keep in mind that for some documents, such as newspapers, newsletters or magazines, you will need to set 2-3 columns in the New Document Window. This will then be applied uniformly across all the Pages and Masters in your document.

For a paperback Book, you may not want to introduce Columns as the area for text is already restricted. So, for now, leave the default Column value at 1.

columns


Step 6: Set the Bleed for your Document


So, first a common and really important question – WHAT IS A BLEED??

A Bleed is an essential setting for Print documents (you don’t need to set one for Web or Digital Publishing).

Bleed is a small amount of space extending beyond the very edge of the Document. When a Document is printed, it is then Trimmed, or cut along the edge of the Document. There may be a small error in the accuracy of the Trim (printers are human too, after all!). If you have not set a Bleed area, and you have created, for example, a document with color that extends to the edges of the Trim, you may see an unwanted white edge along the perimeter of the card.

You can use the Bleed to extend this color across the Trim, so when it’s cut, whatever the margin of error, you will have a seamless all-color edge.

bleed trim

If you are producing a document which will have elements (text, images or color) that extend up to the edges of the document, at any point in the document, you should include a Bleed.

For a Book, you can set a 3 mm Bleed (or ask your Printer for their recommended Bleed Width), on the Top, Bottom and Outside edges. As the Inside Trim edge will not normally be visible, due to being sucked into the binding of the book, you can set the Inside value at 0 mm. This also prevents a Bleed appearing in the final PDF on the Inside edge, which could overlap with the page on an opposite spread, creating an ugly look, and a very confused (and angry) Printer!

Click the Chain icon to the right of the Bleed options to allow you to set different Bleed values.

In your document this is how it will look:

bleed trimFor now, remain in the New Document Window. We’re going to take a look at that other confusing term, the Slug


Step 7: Set the Slug for your Document


A second very common question – WHAT IS THE SLUG??

While a Bleed is ESSENTIAL for a print document, a Slug is not. But it can be useful.

A Slug, like a Bleed, does not appear on your final printed Document. It is simply a useful area to place information which might be required by an Editor, or a Printer. This might be the date of when the draft InDesign file was created, or the name of the creator etc.

I often find it easiest to place a single Slug area below the Bottom of the Document. So, for now, ‘break’ the chain icon to the right of the Slug values and set the Bottom value to 10 mm.

slug


Step 8: Set the Number of Pages in your Document


Now, all you need to do is decide how many Pages your document will have. You may have a firm idea of this before you even start inserting text and images. But you may have no idea! That’s absolutely fine, you can easily add new Pages to your Document as you work on it. So for now, type in an estimate of the number and leave it at that.

Click OK.

And ta-dah! Your Document is ready for working on.

Explore further how to create a Book here…

new document

The post InDesign Basics: Creating your First Document appeared first on InDesignSkills.

]]>
https://www.indesignskills.com/tutorials/indesign-basics-creating-your-first-document/feed/ 1 2577